2007 Cadillac STS/STS-V Owner Manual M
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
one entertainment system may be offered or
your vehicle may have been ordered without
a front passenger or rear seats.
Keep this manual in the vehicle, so it will be there
if it is needed while you are on the road. If the
vehicle is sold, leave this manual in the vehicle.
GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem,
CADILLAC, the CADILLAC Crest & Wreath, and
the name STS are registered trademarks of
General Motors Corporation.
Canadian Owners
A French language copy of this manual can be
obtained from your dealer or from:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
This manual includes the latest information at the
time it was printed. We reserve the right to
make changes in the product after that time
without notice. For vehicles first sold in Canada,
substitute the name “General Motors of Canada
Limited” for Cadillac Motor Car Division whenever
it appears in this manual.
How to Use This Manual
Many people read the owner manual from
beginning to end when they first receive their new
vehicle. If this is done, it can help you learn
about the features and controls for the vehicle.
Pictures and words work together in the
owner manual to explain things.
This manual describes features that may be
available in this model, but your vehicle may
not have all of them. For example, more than
Litho in U.S.A.
Part No. 15864563 A First Print
©2006 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved.
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is.
Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or
reduce the hazard. Please read these cautions.
If you do not, you or others could be hurt.
Index
A good place to quickly locate information about
the vehicle is the Index in the back of the manual.
It is an alphabetical list of what is in the manual
and the page number where it can be found.
You will also find a
circle with a slash
through it in this book.
This safety symbol
means “Do Not,”
“Do Not do this” or
“Do Not let this happen.”
Safety Warnings and Symbols
There are a number of safety cautions in this
book. We use a box and the word CAUTION to
tell about things that could hurt you if you were to
ignore the warning.
{CAUTION:
These mean there is something that could
hurt you or other people.
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Damage Warnings
Vehicle Symbols
Also, in this manual you will find these notices:
The vehicle has components and labels that use
symbols instead of text. Symbols are shown along
with the text describing the operation or information
relating to a specific component, control, message,
gage, or indicator.
Notice: These mean there is something
that could damage your vehicle.
A notice tells about something that can damage
the vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be
covered by your vehicle’s warranty, and it could
be costly. But the notice will tell what to do to help
avoid the damage.
If you need help figuring out a specific name of a
component, gage, or indicator, reference the
following topics:
• Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1
• Features and Controls in Section 2
• Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3
• Climate Controls in Section 3
When you read other manuals, you might see
CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different
colors or in different words.
There are also warning labels on the vehicle.
They use the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.
• Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators in
Section 3
• Audio System(s) in Section 3
• Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
These are some examples of symbols that may be found on the vehicle:
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 1
Seats and Restraint Systems
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your vehicle has the memory feature, you can
program and recall memory settings for seat
positions. See Memory Seat, Mirrors and
Front Seats
Power Seats
The power seat
controls are located
on the outboard side
of the seats.
Power Lumbar
Your vehicle’s seats may be equipped with
power lumbar.
You can increase or
decrease lumbar
support in an area of
the lower seatback with
this control, located
on the outboard sides
of the front seat(s).
To adjust the seat, do any of the following:
• Move the seat forward or rearward by sliding
the horizontal control forward or rearward.
• Raise or lower the front part of the seat
cushion by moving the front of the horizontal
control up or down.
To increase support, press and hold the front
of the control. To decrease support, press and
hold the rear of the control. Let go of the control
when the lower seatback reaches the desired
level of support.
• Raise or lower the rear part of the seat
cushion by moving the rear of the horizontal
control up or down.
• Use the vertical control to recline the seatback.
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To raise the position of the lumbar support, press
and hold the top of the control. To lower the
position of lumbar support, press and hold the
bottom of the control. Let go of the control when
the lower seatback reaches the desired level
of support.
z(Heated Seat and Seatback): This button is
for the heated seat and seatback. Press the
up arrow once to turn on the heated seat at the
highest setting. Press the down arrow once to turn
on the heated seat at the lowest setting.
Pressing the up or down arrows a second time will
raise or lower the setting. To turn off the heated
seat keep pressing the down arrow until the
indicator for heated seat on the climate control
display is off.
Your vehicle may have a memory function which
allows seat settings to be saved and recalled.
page 169 for more information.
A light bar in the climate control display shows the
setting: high, medium, or low. The longest bar
shows the high range and the shortest bar shows
the low range.
Heated Seats
Your vehicle may have
heated front seats.
The buttons are located
on the climate control
panel.
The heated seat will automatically shut off when
the vehicle is turned off.
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Pressing either the heated seat or ventilated part
of the seat button will start that feature at the
highest setting. Each time you press the button,
the feature will decrease one setting.
To turn the feature off, keep pressing the button
until the display lights turn off.
Heated and Ventilated Seats
Your vehicle may have
heated and ventilated
front seats. The buttons
are located on the
climate control panel.
The heated or ventilated seats will automatically
shut off when the vehicle is turned off.
Power Reclining Seatbacks
The front seats have
power reclining
seatbacks. Use the
vertical power seat
control located on the
outboard side of the
seat to operate them.
z(Heated Seat and Seatback): This part of the
button is for the heated seat and seatback.
{(Ventilated Seat): This part of the button is for
the ventilated seat.
There are three settings for each feature. A light bar
in the climate control display shows the setting;
high, medium or low. The longest bar shows
the high range and the shortest bar shows the
low range.
• To recline the seatback, press the control
toward the rear of the vehicle.
• To raise the seatback, press the control toward
the front of the vehicle.
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
Sitting in a reclined position when your
vehicle is in motion can be dangerous.
Even if you buckle up, your safety belts
cannot do their job when you are reclined
like this.
The shoulder belt cannot do its job
because it will not be against your body.
Instead, it will be in front of you. In a crash,
you could go into it, receiving neck or other
injuries.
The lap belt cannot do its job either. In a
crash, the belt could go up over your
abdomen. The belt forces would be there,
not at your pelvic bones. This could cause
serious internal injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is
in motion, have the seatback upright. Then
sit well back in the seat and wear your
safety belt properly.
Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle
is moving.
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Pull the head restraint
up to raise it. To lower
the head restraint,
Head Restraints
press the button,
located on the top of the
seatback, and push
the head restraint down.
The front head restraints can also tilt forward
or rearward.
Adjust the head restraint so that the top of the
restraint is at the same height as the top of
the occupant’s head. This position reduces the
chance of a neck injury in a crash.
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
z(Heated Seat and Seatback): Press this
button to turn the heated seat feature on. When
you press the button, the feature will turn on at the
highest setting. Each time you press the button,
the feature will go down one temperature setting.
A light next to the button will indicate the
setting; 3 is the highest, 1 is the lowest. To turn
the feature off, keep pressing the button until
the indicator light goes off.
Rear Seats
Heated Seats
The heated rear seats will shut off automatically
when the ignition is turned off.
Rear Seat Pass-Through Door
Your vehicle has a pass-through door that provides
access to the trunk from the rear seats. See
page 101.
Your vehicle may have this feature. The buttons
used to control the heated rear seats are
located on the back of the center console.
The engine must be running for the heated
seat feature to work.
14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Belts
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
{CAUTION:
This part of the manual tells you how to use
safety belts properly. It also tells you some things
you should not do with safety belts.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a
cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle.
In a collision, people riding in these areas
are more likely to be seriously injured or
killed. Do not allow people to ride in any
area of your vehicle that is not equipped
with seats and safety belts. Be sure
everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a safety belt properly.
{CAUTION:
Do not let anyone ride where he or she
cannot wear a safety belt properly. If you
are in a crash and you are not wearing a
safety belt, your injuries can be much
worse. You can hit things inside the
vehicle or be ejected from it. You can be
seriously injured or killed. In the same
crash, you might not be, if you are
buckled up. Always fasten your safety
belt, and check that your passengers’
belts are fastened properly too.
Your vehicle has indicators to remind you and
your passengers to buckle your safety belts. See
page 244.
15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In most states and in all Canadian provinces,
the law says to wear safety belts. Here is
why: They work.
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast
as it goes.
You never know if you will be in a crash. If you do
have a crash, you do not know if it will be a
bad one.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be
so serious that even buckled up, a person
would not survive. But most crashes are in
between. In many of them, people who buckle up
can survive and sometimes walk away. Without
belts they could have been badly hurt or killed.
After more than 40 years of safety belts in
vehicles, the facts are clear. In most crashes
buckling up does matter... a lot!
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a
seat on wheels.
16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Put someone on it.
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The
rider does not stop.
17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The person keeps going until stopped by
something. In a real vehicle, it could be the
windshield...
or the instrument panel...
18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after an
accident if I am wearing a safety belt?
A: You could be — whether you are wearing a
safety belt or not. But you can unbuckle a
safety belt, even if you are upside down. And
your chance of being conscious during and
after an accident, so you can unbuckle and
get out, is much greater if you are belted.
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I
have to wear safety belts?
or the safety belts!
A: Airbags are supplemental systems only; so
they work with safety belts — not instead of
them. Every airbag system ever offered
for sale has required the use of safety belts.
Even if you are in a vehicle that has airbags,
you still have to buckle up to get the most
protection. That is true not only in frontal
collisions, but especially in side and other
collisions.
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle
does. You get more time to stop. You stop
over more distance, and your strongest bones
take the forces. That is why safety belts
make such good sense.
19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far
from home, why should I wear safety belts?
This part is only for people of adult size.
A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are
in an accident — even one that is not your
fault — you and your passengers can be hurt.
Being a good driver does not protect you from
things beyond your control, such as bad
drivers.
Be aware that there are special things to know
about safety belts and children. And there are
different rules for smaller children and babies.
If a child will be riding in your vehicle, see Older
on page 40. Follow those rules for everyone’s
protection.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km)
of home. And the greatest number of serious
injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less
than 40 mph (65 km/h).
First, you will want to know which restraint
systems your vehicle has.
We will start with the driver position.
Safety belts are for everyone.
20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across
you. Do not let it get twisted.
Driver Position
Lap-Shoulder Belt
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let
the belt go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull
the belt across you more slowly.
The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here is how
to wear it properly.
1. Close and lock the door.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until
it clicks.
2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight.
To see how, see “Seats” in the Index.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is
secure. If the belt is not long enough,
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle
the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
5. Move the shoulder belt height adjuster to the
height that is right for you. Improper shoulder
belt height adjustment could reduce the
effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash. See
21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. This safety belt has a feature that will reduce
the tension of the safety belt on the occupant’s
shoulder if the vehicle is on. To set this
feature, gently pull on the belt, or lean forward
and then sit back. The belt will retract and
rest lightly against the occupant.
6. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the
shoulder belt.
It may be necessary to pull stitching on the
safety belt through the latch plate to fully
tighten the lap belt on smaller occupants.
22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and
snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In
a crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic
bones. And you would be less likely to slide under
the lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt would
apply force at your abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder
belt should go over the shoulder and across the
chest. These parts of the body are best able
to take belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop
or crash.
23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder
belt is too loose. In a crash, you would
move forward too much, which could
increase injury. The shoulder belt should
fit against your body.
A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give
nearly as much protection this way.
24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your lap belt
is too loose. In a crash, you could slide
under the lap belt and apply force at your
abdomen. This could cause serious or
even fatal injuries. The lap belt should be
worn low and snug on the hips, just
touching the thighs.
A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give as
much protection this way.
25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is
buckled in the wrong place like this. In a
crash, the belt would go up over your
abdomen. The belt forces would be there,
not at the pelvic bones. This could cause
serious internal injuries. Always buckle
your belt into the buckle nearest you.
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.
26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wear
the shoulder belt under your arm. In a
crash, your body would move too far
forward, which would increase the chance
of head and neck injury. Also, the belt
would apply too much force to the ribs,
which are not as strong as shoulder
bones. You could also severely injure
internal organs like your liver or spleen.
A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm.
It should be worn over the shoulder at
all times.
27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted
belt. In a crash, you would not have the
full width of the belt to spread impact
forces. If a belt is twisted, make it straight
so it can work properly, or ask your dealer
to fix it.
A: The belt is twisted across the body.
28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment
Before you begin to drive, move the shoulder belt
height adjuster to the height that is right for you.
Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of
the belt is centered on your shoulder. The
belt should be away from your face and neck, but
not falling off your shoulder. Improper shoulder
belt height adjustment could reduce the
effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
To move it down, press
the release button (A)
and move the height
adjuster to the desired
position. You can move
the height adjuster up
just by pushing up on the
shoulder belt guide.
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the
buckle. When the safety belt is unbuckled or when
the vehicle is turned off, the tension reducer will
deactivate. The belt should go back out of the way.
Before you close the door, be sure the belt is
out of the way. If you slam the door on it, you can
damage both the belt and your vehicle.
After you move the height adjuster to where you
want it, try to move it down without pressing the
release button to make sure it has locked into
position.
29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it is
more likely that the fetus will not be hurt in a crash.
For pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to
making safety belts effective is wearing them
properly.
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely
to be seriously injured if they do not wear
safety belts.
Right Front Passenger Position
To learn how to wear the right front passenger’s
The right front passenger’s safety belt works the
same way as the driver’s safety belt — except
for one thing. If you ever pull the shoulder portion
of the belt out all the way, you will engage the
child restraint locking feature. If this happens, let
the belt go back all the way and start again.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder
belt, and the lap portion should be worn as low as
possible, below the rounding, throughout the
pregnancy.
30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Seat Passengers
It is very important for rear seat passengers to
buckle up! Accident statistics show that unbelted
people in the rear seat are hurt more often in
crashes than those who are wearing safety belts.
Rear passengers who are not safety belted
can be thrown out of the vehicle in a crash. And
they can strike others in the vehicle who are
wearing safety belts.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
All rear seat positions have lap-shoulder belts.
Here is how to wear one properly.
1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across
you. Do not let it get twisted.
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let
the belt go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull
the belt across you more slowly.
31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until
it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it
is secure.
When the shoulder belt is pulled out all the
way, it will lock. If it does, let it go back all the
way and start again.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle
the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
3. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the
shoulder part.
32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
And you would be less likely to slide under the lap
belt. If you slid under it, the belt would apply force at
your abdomen. This could cause serious or even
fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the
shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the
body are best able to take belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or
a crash.
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder
belt is too loose. In a crash, you would
move forward too much, which could
increase injury. The shoulder belt should
fit against your body.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and
snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In a
crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones.
33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
There is one guide for each outboard passenger
position in the rear seat. Here is how to install
a comfort guide to the safety belt:
To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides
1. Pull the elastic cord out from between the
edge of the seatback and the interior body
to remove the guide from its storage clip.
Rear shoulder belt comfort guides may provide
added safety belt comfort for older children
who have outgrown booster seats and for some
adults. When installed on a shoulder belt, the
comfort guide positions the belt away from
the neck and head.
34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Slide the guide under and past the belt. The
elastic cord must be under the belt. Then, place
the guide over the belt and insert the two edges
of the belt into the slots of the guide.
3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies
flat. The elastic cord must be under the belt
and the guide on top.
35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Buckle, position, and release the safety belt
page 31. Make sure that the shoulder
belt crosses the shoulder.
{CAUTION:
A safety belt that is not properly worn may
not provide the protection needed in a
crash. The person wearing the belt could
be seriously injured. The shoulder belt
should go over the shoulder and across
the chest. These parts of the body are best
able to take belt restraining forces.
To remove and store the comfort guide, squeeze
the belt edges together so that you can take
them out of the guide. Pull the guide upward to
expose its storage clip, and then slide the
guide onto the clip. Turn the guide and clip inward
and slide them in between the seatback and
the interior body, leaving only the loop of
the elastic cord exposed.
36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Belt Pretensioners
Safety Belt Extender
Your vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for the
driver and right front passenger. Although you
cannot see them, they are part of the safety belt
assembly. They help tighten the safety belts during
the early stages of a moderate to severe frontal
and near frontal crash if the threshold conditions
for pretensioner activation are met. And, if
your vehicle has side impact airbags, safety belt
pretensioners can help tighten the safety belts in a
side crash.
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you,
you should use it.
But if a safety belt is not long enough, your dealer
will order you an extender. When you go in to
order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so
the extender will be long enough for you. To
help avoid personal injury, do not let someone else
use it, and use it only for the seat it is made to
fit. The extender has been designed for adults.
Never use it for securing child seats. To wear it,
just attach it to the regular safety belt. For
more information see the instruction sheet that
comes with the extender.
Pretensioners work only once. If they activate in a
crash, you will need to get new ones, and
probably other new parts for your safety belt
system. See Replacing Restraint System Parts
37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
Child Restraints
A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder belt
and get the additional restraint a shoulder belt
can provide. The shoulder belt should not
cross the face or neck. The lap belt should
fit snugly below the hips, just touching the
top of the thighs. It should never be worn over
the abdomen, which could cause severe or
even fatal internal injuries in a crash.
Older Children
According to accident statistics, children are safer
when properly restrained in the rear seating
positions than in the front seating positions.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can
strike other people who are buckled up, or can
be thrown out of the vehicle. Older children need
to use safety belts properly.
Older children who have outgrown booster seats
should wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder
belt, but the child is so small that the
shoulder belt is very close to the child’s
face or neck?
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
A: If the child is sitting in a seat next to a
window, move the child toward the center of
the vehicle. Also see Rear Safety Belt
sitting in the center rear seat passenger
position, move the child toward the safety belt
buckle. In either case, be sure that the
shoulder belt still is on the child’s shoulder, so
that in a crash the child’s upper body would
have the restraint that belts provide.
Here two children are wearing the same
belt. The belt cannot properly spread the
impact forces. In a crash, the two children
can be crushed together and seriously
injured. A belt must be used by only one
person at a time.
39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the belt
should be worn low and snug on the hips, just
touching the child’s thighs. This applies belt force
to the child’s pelvic bones in a crash.
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is
behind the child. If the child wears the belt
in this way, in a crash the child might slide
under the belt. The belt’s force would then
be applied right on the child’s abdomen.
That could cause serious or fatal injuries.
Infants and Young Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This
includes infants and all other children. Neither the
distance traveled nor the age and size of the
traveler changes the need, for everyone, to use
safety restraints. In fact, the law in every state
in the United States and in every Canadian
province says children up to some age must be
restrained while in a vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Children can be seriously injured or
strangled if a shoulder belt is wrapped
around their neck and the safety belt
continues to tighten. Never leave children
unattended in a vehicle and never allow
children to play with the safety belts.
40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Every time infants and young children ride in
vehicles, they should have the protection provided
by appropriate restraints. Young children should
not use the vehicle’s adult safety belts alone,
unless there is no other choice. Instead, they need
to use a child restraint.
{CAUTION:
People should never hold a baby in their
arms while riding in a vehicle. A baby
does not weigh much — until a crash.
During a crash a baby will become so
heavy it is not possible to hold it. For
example, in a crash at only 25 mph
(40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) baby will
suddenly become a 240 lb (110 kg) force
on a person’s arms. A baby should be
secured in an appropriate restraint.
41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
Children who are up against, or very close
to, any airbag when it inflates can be
seriously injured or killed. Airbags plus
lap-shoulder belts offer protection for
adults and older children, but not for young
children and infants. Neither the vehicle’s
safety belt system nor its airbag system is
designed for them. Young children and
infants need the protection that a child
restraint system can provide.
Q: What are the different types of add-on
child restraints?
A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by
the vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic
types. Selection of a particular restraint should
take into consideration not only the child’s
weight, height, and age but also whether or not
the restraint will be compatible with the motor
vehicle in which it will be used.
42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For most basic types of child restraints, there
are many different models available. When
purchasing a child restraint, be sure it is
designed to be used in a motor vehicle. If it is,
the restraint will have a label saying that it
meets federal motor vehicle safety standards.
CAUTION: (Continued)
strongest part of an infant’s body, the back
and shoulders. Infants always should be
secured in appropriate infant restraints.
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that
come with the restraint state the weight and
height limitations for a particular child restraint.
In addition, there are many kinds of restraints
available for children with special needs.
{CAUTION:
The body structure of a young child is
quite unlike that of an adult or older child,
for whom the safety belts are designed. A
young child’s hip bones are still so small
that the vehicle’s regular safety belt may
not remain low on the hip bones, as it
should. Instead, it may settle up around
the child’s abdomen. In a crash, the belt
would apply force on a body area that is
unprotected by any bony structure. This
alone could cause serious or fatal injuries.
Young children always should be secured
in appropriate child restraints.
{CAUTION:
Newborn infants need complete support,
including support for the head and neck.
This is necessary because a newborn
infant’s neck is weak and its head weighs
so much compared with the rest of its
body. In a crash, an infant in a rear-facing
seat settles into the restraint, so the crash
forces can be distributed across the
CAUTION: (Continued)
43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Child Restraint Systems
A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraint with
the seating surface against the back of the
infant. The harness system holds the infant in
place and, in a crash, acts to keep the infant
positioned in the restraint.
An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for use
in a motor vehicle, is an infant restraint system
designed to restrain or position a child on a
continuous flat surface. Make sure that the infant’s
head rests toward the center of the vehicle.
44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraint
for the child’s body with the harness and also
sometimes with surfaces such as T-shaped
or shelf-like shields.
A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designed
to improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt
system. Some booster seats have a shoulder belt
positioner, and some high-back booster seats
have a five-point harness. A booster seat can also
help a child to see out the window.
45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Securing an Add-on Child Restraint in
the Vehicle
Q: How Should I Use a Child Restraint?
A: A child restraint system is any device designed
for use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat, or
position children. A built-in child restraint
system is a permanent part of the motor
vehicle. An add-on child restraint system is a
portable one, which is purchased by the
vehicle’s owner. To help reduce injuries, an
add-on child restraint must be secured in the
vehicle. With built-in or add-on child restraints,
the child has to be secured within the child
restraint.
{CAUTION:
A child can be seriously injured or killed
in a crash if the child restraint is not
properly secured in the vehicle. Make sure
the child restraint is properly installed in
the vehicle using the vehicle’s safety belt
or LATCH system, following the
instructions that came with that restraint,
and also the instructions in this manual.
When choosing an add-on child restraint, be
sure the child restraint is designed to be used in
a vehicle. If it is, it will have a label saying that it
meets federal motor vehicle safety standards.
Then follow the instructions for the restraint.
You may find these instructions on the restraint
itself or in a booklet, or both.
To help reduce the chance of injury, the child
restraint must be secured in the vehicle. Child
restraint systems must be secured in vehicle seats
by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap-shoulder
belt, or by the LATCH system. See Lower
page 50 for more information. A child can
be endangered in a crash if the child restraint is
not properly secured in the vehicle.
46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When securing an add-on child restraint, refer to
the instructions that come with the restraint which
may be on the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both,
and to this manual. The child restraint instructions
are important, so if they are not available, obtain a
replacement copy from the manufacturer.
Securing the Child Within the Child
Restraint
There are several systems for securing the child
within the child restraint. One system, the
three-point harness, has straps that come down
over each of the infant’s shoulders and buckle
together at the crotch. The five-point harness
system has two shoulder straps, two hip straps, and
a crotch strap. A shield may take the place of hip
straps. A T-shaped shield has shoulder straps that
are attached to a flat pad which rests low against
the child’s body. A shelf- or armrest-type shield has
straps that are attached to a wide, shelf-like shield
that swings up or to the side.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and
injure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly
secure any child restraint in your vehicle — even
when no child is in it.
{CAUTION:
A child can be seriously injured or killed in
a crash if the child is not properly secured
in the child restraint. Make sure the child is
properly secured, following the
instructions that came with that restraint.
47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Because there are different systems, it is important
to refer to the instructions that come with the
restraint. A child can be endangered in a crash if
the child is not properly secured in the child
restraint.
Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodate
a rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sun
visor says, “Never put a rear-facing child seat
in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
Where to Put the Restraint
{CAUTION:
Accident statistics show that children are safer if
they are restrained in the rear rather than the front
seat. We recommend that child restraints be
secured in a rear seat, including an infant riding in a
rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in a
forward-facing child seat and an older child riding in
a booster seat.
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can
be seriously injured or killed if the right
front passenger’s airbag inflates. This is
because the back of the rear-facing child
restraint would be very close to the
inflating airbag.
CAUTION: (Continued)
48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Wherever you install a child restraint, be sure to
secure the child restraint properly.
CAUTION: (Continued)
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and
injure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly
secure any child restraint in your vehicle — even
when no child is in it.
Even though the passenger sensing
system is designed to turn off the
passenger’s frontal airbag if the system
detects a rear-facing child restraint, no
system is fail-safe, and no one can
guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
under some unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off. We recommend that
rear-facing child restraints be secured in
the rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
If you need to secure a forward-facing child
restraint in the right front seat, always
move the front passenger seat as far back
as it will go. It is better to secure the child
restraint in a rear seat.
49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When installing a child restraint with a top tether,
you must also use either the lower anchors or the
safety belts to properly secure the child restraint.
A child restraint must never be installed using only
the top tether and anchor.
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH)
The LATCH system holds a child restraint during
driving or in a crash. This system is designed
to make installation of a child restraint easier. The
LATCH system uses anchors in the vehicle and
attachments on the child restraint that are made for
use with the LATCH system.
In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle,
you need a child restraint that has LATCH
attachments. The child restraint manufacturer will
provide you with instructions on how to use
the child restraint and its attachments. The
following explains how to attach a child restraint
with these attachments in your vehicle.
Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraint
is properly installed using the anchors, or use the
vehicle’s safety belts to secure the restraint,
following the instructions that came with that
restraint, and also the instructions in this manual.
Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraints
have lower anchors and attachments or top
tether anchors and attachments.
50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lower Anchors
Top Tether Anchor
Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into the
vehicle. There are two lower anchors for each
LATCH seating position that will accommodate a
child restraint with lower attachments (B).
A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the child
restraint to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is built
into the vehicle. The top tether attachment (B)
on the child restraint connects to the top tether
anchor in the vehicle in order to reduce the forward
movement and rotation of the child restraint
during driving or in a crash.
Your child restraint may have a single tether (A)
or a dual tether (C). Either will have a single
attachment (B) to secure the top tether to
the anchor.
51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Some child restraints that have a top tether are
designed for use with or without the top tether
being attached. Others require the top tether
always to be attached. In Canada, the law requires
that forward-facing child restraints have a top
tether, and that the tether be attached. In
the United States, some child restraints also have
a top tether. Be sure to read and follow the
instructions for your child restraint.
Lower Anchor and Top Tether Anchor
Locations
i (Top Tether Anchor):
Seating positions with
top tether anchors.
j (Lower Anchor):
Seating positions with
two lower anchors.
If the child restraint does not have a top tether,
one can be obtained, in kit form, for many
child restraints. Ask the child restraint
manufacturer whether or not a kit is available.
Rear Seat
To assist you in locating
the lower anchors, each
seating position with
lower anchors has two
labels, near the crease
between the seatback
and the seat cushion.
52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To assist you in locating
the top tether anchors,
the top tether anchor
symbol is located on the
trim cover.
The top tether anchors are located under the trim
covers on the rear seatback filler panel. Be
sure to use an anchor located on the same side of
the vehicle as the seating position where the
child restraint will be placed.
Do not secure a child restraint in the right front
passenger’s position if a national or local law
requires that the top tether be attached, or if the
instructions that come with the child restraint
say that the top tether must be attached. There is
no place to attach the top tether in this position.
Accident statistics show that children are safer
if they are restrained in the rear rather than
page 48 for additional information.
53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for
the LATCH System
{CAUTION:
Each top tether anchor and lower anchor
in the vehicle is designed to hold only one
child restraint. Attaching more than one
child restraint to a single anchor could
cause the anchor or attachment to come
loose or even break during a crash. A
child or others could be injured if this
happens. To help prevent injury to people
and damage to your vehicle, attach only
one child restraint per anchor.
{CAUTION:
If a LATCH-type child restraint is not
attached to anchors, the restraint will not
be able to protect the child correctly. In a
crash, the child could be seriously injured
or killed. Make sure that a LATCH-type
child restraint is properly installed using
the anchors, or use the vehicle’s safety
belts to secure the restraint, following the
instructions that came with that restraint,
and also the instructions in this manual.
54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Folding an empty rear seat with the safety
belts secured may cause damage to the safety
belt or the seat. When removing the child
restraint, always remember to return the safety
belts to their normal, stowed position before
folding the rear seat.
{CAUTION:
Children can be seriously injured or
strangled if a shoulder belt is wrapped
around their neck and the safety belt
continues to tighten. Secure any unused
safety belts behind the child restraint so
children cannot reach them. Pull the
shoulder belt all the way out of the
retractor to set the lock, if your vehicle
has one, after the child restraint has been
installed. Be sure to follow the
1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments to
the lower anchors. If the child restraint does
not have lower attachments or the desired
seating position does not have lower anchors,
secure the child restraint with the top tether
and the safety belts. Refer to your child
restraint manufacturer instructions and the
instructions in this manual.
instructions of the child restraint
manufacturer.
1.1. Find the lower anchors for the desired
seating position.
1.2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
1.3. Attach and tighten the lower
attachments on the child restraint to the
lower anchors.
Notice: Contact between the child restraint or
the LATCH attachment parts and the vehicle’s
safety belt assembly may cause damage to
these parts. Make sure when securing unused
safety belts behind the child restraint that
there is no contact between the child restraint
or the LATCH attachment parts and the
vehicle’s safety belt assembly.
55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommends
that the top tether be attached, attach and
tighten the top tether to the top tether anchor,
if equipped. Refer to the child restraint
If the position you are
using does not have a
head restraint and
you are using a dual
tether, route the
instructions and the following steps:
tether over the
seatback.
2.1. Find the top tether anchor.
2.2. Open the top tether anchor trim cover
to expose the anchor.
2.3. If you have an adjustable head restraint,
raise the head restraint.
2.4. Route, attach and tighten the top tether
according to your child restraint
instructions and the following
instructions:
If the position you are
using has an adjustable
head restraint and you
are using a dual tether,
route the tether under
the head restraint and in
between the head
If the position you are
using does not have a
head restraint and
you are using a single
tether, route the
restraint posts.
tether over the
seatback.
56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the position you are
using has an adjustable
head restraint and you
are using a single tether,
route the tether under
the head restraint and in
between the head
1. Put the child restraint on the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and
shoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety belt
through or around the restraint. The child
restraint instructions will show you how.
restraint posts.
3. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
Seat Position
If your child restraint has the LATCH system, see
3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button
is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle
the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
If your child restraint does not have the LATCH
system, you will be using the lap-shoulder
belt to secure the child restraint in this position. Be
sure to follow the instructions that came with the
child restraint. Secure the child in the child restraint
when and as the instructions say.
57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way
out of the retractor to set the lock.
5. To tighten the belt, push down on the child
restraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt
to tighten the lap portion of the belt, and
feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor.
If you are using a forward-facing child
restraint, you may find it helpful to use your
knee to push down on the child restraint
as you tighten the belt.
58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. If your child restraint manufacturer
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position
recommends using a top tether, attach and
tighten the top tether to the top tether anchor.
Refer to the instructions that came with the
child restraint and see Lower Anchors
Your vehicle has a right front passenger airbag. A
rear seat is a safer place to secure a forward-facing
page 48.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
In addition, your vehicle has a passenger sensing
system. The passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag when an infant in a rear-facing infant
seat or a small child in a forward-facing child
restraint or booster seat is detected. See
more information on this including important
safety information.
To remove the child restraint, if the top tether is
attached to the top tether anchor, disconnect
it. Unbuckle the vehicle’s safety belt and let it go
back all the way. The safety belt will move
freely again and be ready to work for an adult or
larger child passenger.
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a
rear-facing child seat in the front.” This is because
the risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if the
airbag deploys.
59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CAUTION: (Continued)
{CAUTION:
If you need to secure a forward-facing
child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as
far back as it will go. It is better to secure
the child restraint in a rear seat.
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can
be seriously injured or killed if the right
front passenger’s airbag inflates. This is
because the back of the rear-facing child
restraint would be very close to the
inflating airbag.
If you need to secure a forward-facing child restraint
in the right front seat position, move the seat as far
back as it will go before securing the forward-facing
Even though the passenger sensing
system is designed to turn off the right
front passenger’s frontal airbag if the
system detects a rear-facing child
restraint, no system is fail-safe, and no
one can guarantee that an airbag will not
deploy under some unusual circumstance,
even though it is turned off. We
If your child restraint has the LATCH system, see
There is no top tether anchor in the right front
passenger’s position. Do not secure a child seat in
this position if a national or local law requires that
the top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that
come with the child restraint say that the top tether
must be anchored. See Lower Anchors and Tethers
restraint has a top tether.
recommend that rear-facing child
restraints be secured in the rear seat,
even if the airbag is off.
CAUTION: (Continued)
60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure
the child restraint in this position. Be sure to follow
the instructions that came with the child restraint.
Secure the child in the child restraint when and as
the instructions say.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and
shoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety belt
through or around the restraint. The child
restraint instructions will show you how.
1. Your vehicle has a right front passenger’s
frontal airbag. See Passenger Sensing
rear-facing child restraints be secured in a rear
seat, even if the airbag is off. If your child
restraint is forward-facing, move the seat as
far back as it will go before securing the
child restraint in this seat. See Power Seats
on page 9.
When the passenger sensing system has
turned off the right front passenger’s frontal
airbag, the off indicator in the passenger
airbag status indicator should light and stay lit
when the vehicle is running. See Passenger
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button
is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle
the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way
out of the retractor to set the lock.
6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child
restraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt
to tighten the lap portion of the belt and
feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor.
If you are using a forward-facing child
restraint, you may find it helpful to use your
knee to push down on the child restraint
as you tighten the belt. You should not be able
to pull more of the belt from the retractor
once the lock has been set.
62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
A thick layer of additional material such as a
blanket, or aftermarket equipment such as seat
covers heaters or massagers, located between the
seat cushion and the child restraint or small
occupant, can affect how the passenger sensing
system operates. Remove any additional material
from the seat cushion before reinstalling/securing
the child restraint or small occupant.
8. If the airbag is off, the off indicator in the
overhead console will be lit and stay lit
when the vehicle is running.
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove
the child restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the
child restraint.
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the
child restraint in a rear seat position in the
vehicle and check with your dealer.
If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting
the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to
make sure that the vehicle’s seatback is not
pressing the child restraint into the seat cushion.
If this happens, slightly recline the vehicle’s
seatback and adjust the seat cushion if possible.
Also make sure the child restraint is not trapped
under the vehicle head restraint. If this happens,
adjust the head restraint.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the
vehicle’s safety belt and let it go back all the way.
The safety belt will move freely again and be
ready to work for an adult or larger child
passenger.
63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here are the most important things to know about
the airbag system:
Airbag System
Your vehicle has six airbags:
• A frontal airbag for the driver and another
frontal airbag for the right front passenger.
{CAUTION:
• A seat-mounted side impact airbag for the
driver and another for the right front
passenger.
You can be severely injured or killed in a
crash if you are not wearing your safety
belt — even if you have airbags. Wearing
your safety belt during a crash helps
reduce your chance of hitting things
inside the vehicle or being ejected from it.
Airbags are “supplemental restraints” to
the safety belts. All airbags are designed
to work with safety belts, but do not
replace them.
• A roof-mounted side impact airbag for the
driver and passenger directly behind the driver.
• A roof-mounted side impact airbag for the right
front passenger and the person seated directly
behind that passenger.
Airbags are designed to supplement the protection
provided by safety belts. Even though today’s
airbags are also designed to help reduce the risk
of injury from the force of an inflating bag, all
airbags must inflate very quickly to do their job.
64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Frontal airbags for the driver and right
front passenger are designed to deploy in
moderate to severe frontal and near frontal
crashes. They are not designed to inflate in
rollover, rear crashes, or in many side
crashes. And, for some unrestrained
occupants, frontal airbags may provide
less protection in frontal crashes than
more forceful airbags have provided in
the past.
Both frontal and side impact airbags
inflate with great force, faster than the
blink of an eye. If you are too close to an
inflating airbag, as you would be if you
were leaning forward, it could seriously
injure you. Safety belts help keep you in
position for airbag inflation before and
during a crash. Always wear your safety
belt even with frontal airbags. The driver
should sit as far back as possible while
still maintaining control of the vehicle.
Occupants should not lean on or sleep
against the door.
Seat-mounted side impact airbags and
roof-mounted side impact airbags are
designed to inflate in moderate to severe
crashes where something hits the side of
your vehicle. They are not designed to
inflate in frontal, in rollover or in rear
crashes.
Everyone in your vehicle should wear a
safety belt properly — whether or not there
is an airbag for that person.
65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The system checks the airbag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an
page 244 for more information.
{CAUTION:
Anyone who is up against, or very close to,
any airbag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder
belts offer the best protection for adults,
but not for young children and infants.
Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system nor
its airbag system is designed for them.
Young children and infants need the
protection that a child restraint system can
provide. Always secure children properly
in your vehicle. To read how, see Older
Where Are the Airbags?
There is an airbag
readiness light on the
instrument panel cluster,
which shows the
airbag symbol.
The driver’s frontal airbag is in the middle of the
steering wheel.
66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The right front passenger’s frontal airbag is in the
instrument panel on the passenger’s side.
The seat-mounted side impact airbag for the driver
is in the side of the driver’s seatback closest to
the door.
67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The seat-mounted side impact airbag for the right
front passenger is in the side of the passenger’s
seatback closest to the door.
The roof-mounted side impact airbag for the driver
and the person seated directly behind the driver
is in the ceiling above the side windows.
68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
If something is between an occupant and
an airbag, the airbag might not inflate
properly or it might force the object into
that person causing severe injury or even
death. The path of an inflating airbag must
be kept clear. Do not put anything
between an occupant and an airbag, and
do not attach or put anything on the
steering wheel hub or on or near any
other airbag covering. Never secure
anything to the roof of your vehicle by
routing the rope or tie-down through any
door or window opening. If you do, the
path of an inflating airbag will be blocked.
Do not let seat covers block the inflation
path of a side impact airbag. The path of
an inflating airbag must be kept clear.
The roof-mounted side impact airbag for the right
front passenger and the person seated directly
behind that passenger is in the ceiling above the
side windows.
69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
the threshold level for the reduced deployment is
about 12 to 15 mph (19 to 24 km/h), and the
threshold level for a full deployment is about
16 to 23 mph (26 to 37 km/h). The threshold level
can vary, however, with specific vehicle design, so
that it can be somewhat above or below this range.
When Should an Airbag Inflate?
The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal
airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to
severe frontal or near-frontal crashes. But they are
designed to inflate only if the impact exceeds a
predetermined deployment threshold. Deployment
thresholds take into account a variety of desired
deployment and non-deployment events and are
used to predict how severe a crash is likely to be in
time for the airbags to inflate and help restrain the
occupants. Whether your frontal airbags will or
should deploy is not based on how fast your vehicle
is traveling. It depends largely on what you hit, the
direction of the impact, and how quickly your
vehicle slows down.
Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash
speeds. For example:
• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits a moving object.
• If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash
speed than if the vehicle hits an object that
does not deform.
In addition, your vehicle has “dual stage” frontal
airbags, which adjust the restraint according to
crash severity. Your vehicle has electronic frontal
sensors, which help the sensing system distinguish
between a moderate frontal impact and a more
severe frontal impact. For moderate frontal impacts,
these airbags inflate at a level less than full
deployment. For more severe frontal impacts, full
deployment occurs. If the front of your vehicle goes
straight into a wall that does not move or deform,
• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole),
the airbags could inflate at a different crash
speed than if the vehicle hits a wide object
(like a wall).
• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle,
the airbags could inflate at a different crash
speed than if the vehicle goes straight into
the object.
70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Frontal airbags (driver and right front passenger)
are not intended to inflate during vehicle
rollovers, rear impacts, or in many side impacts.
What Makes an Airbag Inflate?
In an impact of sufficient severity, the airbag
sensing system detects that the vehicle is
in a crash. The sensing system triggers a release
of gas from the inflator, which inflates the
airbag. The inflator, airbag and related hardware
are all part of the airbag modules. Frontal
airbag modules are located inside the steering
wheel and the instrument panel. For vehicles with
seat-mounted side impact airbags, there are
also airbag modules in the side of the front
seatbacks closest to the door. For vehicles with
roof-mounted side impact airbags, there are
also airbag modules in the ceiling of the vehicle,
near the side window.
Side impact airbags are intended to inflate in
moderate to severe side crashes. A side impact
airbag will inflate if the crash severity is above the
system’s designed “threshold level.” The
threshold level can vary with specific vehicle
design. Side impact airbags are not intended to
inflate in frontal or near-frontal impacts, rollovers,
or rear impacts. A side impact airbag is intended
to deploy on the side of the vehicle that is struck.
In any particular crash, no one can say whether
an airbag should have inflated simply because of
the damage to a vehicle or because of what
the repair costs were. For frontal airbags, inflation
is determined by what the vehicle hits, the
angle of the impact, and how quickly the vehicle
slows down in frontal and near-frontal impacts. For
side impact airbags, inflation is determined by
the location and severity of the impact.
71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How Does an Airbag Restrain?
What Will You See After an Airbag
Inflates?
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal
collisions, even belted occupants can contact the
steering wheel or the instrument panel. In
After frontal airbags and seat-mounted side impact
airbags inflate, they quickly deflate, so quickly
that some people may not even realize an airbag
inflated. Roof-mounted side impact airbags
may still be at least partially inflated minutes after
the vehicle comes to rest. Some components
of the airbag module — the steering wheel hub for
the driver’s airbag, the instrument panel for the
right front passenger’s bag, the side of the
seatback closest to the door for the seat-mounted
side impact airbags, and the area along the
ceiling of your vehicle near the side windows for
roof-mounted side impact airbags — may be
hot for a short time. The parts of the airbag that
come into contact with you may be warm, but not
too hot to touch. There may be some smoke
and dust coming from the vents in the deflated
airbags. Airbag inflation does not prevent the driver
from seeing out of the windshield or being able
to steer the vehicle, nor does it prevent people
from leaving the vehicle.
moderate to severe side collisions, even belted
occupants can contact the inside of the vehicle.
Airbags supplement the protection provided
by safety belts. Airbags distribute the force of the
impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper
body, stopping the occupant more gradually. But
the frontal airbags would not help you in many
types of collisions, including rollovers, rear
impacts, and many side impacts, primarily because
an occupant’s motion is not toward the airbag.
Side impact airbags would not help you in many
types of collisions, including many frontal or
near frontal collisions, rollovers, and rear impacts.
Airbags should never be regarded as anything
more than a supplement to safety belts, and then
only in moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal
collisions for the driver’s and right front
passenger’s frontal airbags, and only in moderate
to severe side collisions for vehicles with side
impact airbags.
72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In many crashes severe enough to inflate the
airbag, windshields are broken by vehicle
deformation. Additional windshield breakage may
also occur from the right front passenger airbag.
{CAUTION:
When an airbag inflates, there may be
dust in the air. This dust could cause
breathing problems for people with a
history of asthma or other breathing
trouble. To avoid this, everyone in the
vehicle should get out as soon as it is
safe to do so. If you have breathing
problems but cannot get out of the vehicle
after an airbag inflates, then get fresh air
by opening a window or a door. If you
experience breathing problems following
an airbag deployment, you should seek
medical attention.
• Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After
an airbag inflates, you will need some new
parts for the airbag system. If you do not get
them, the airbag system will not be there to help
protect you in another crash. A new system will
include airbag modules and possibly other
parts. The service manual for your vehicle
covers the need to replace other parts.
• Your vehicle has a crash sensing and
diagnostic module which records information
after a crash. See Vehicle Data Collection and
• Let only qualified technicians work on the
airbag systems. Improper service can mean
that an airbag system will not work properly.
See your dealer for service.
Your vehicle has a feature that may automatically
unlock the doors, turn the interior lamps on, and
turn the hazard warning flashers on when the
airbags inflate. You can lock the doors, turn the
interior lamps off, and turn the hazard warning
flashers off by using the controls for those features.
73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The passenger sensing system will turn off the
right front passenger’s frontal airbag under certain
conditions. The driver’s airbags are not part of
the passenger sensing system.
Passenger Sensing System
Your vehicle has a passenger sensing system for
the right front passenger position. The passenger
airbag status indicator will be visible when the
vehicle is running.
The passenger sensing system works with
sensors that are part of the right front passenger’s
seat. The sensors are designed to detect the
presence of a properly-seated occupant and
determine if the passenger’s frontal airbag should
be enabled (may inflate) or not.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if
they are restrained in the rear rather than the front
seat. We recommend that child restraints be
secured in a rear seat, including an infant riding in
a rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in a
forward-facing child seat, and an older child riding
in a booster seat.
United States
Canada
The words ON and OFF or the symbol for on and
off, will be visible in the overhead console
during the system check. When the system check
is complete, either the word ON or the word
OFF, or the symbol for on or the symbol for off will
be visible. See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
on page 245.
Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodate
a rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sun
visor says, “Never put a rear-facing child seat
in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn
off the right front passenger’s frontal airbag if:
{CAUTION:
• The right front passenger seat is unoccupied.
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can
be seriously injured or killed if the right
front passenger’s airbag inflates. This is
because the back of the rear-facing child
restraint would be very close to the
inflating airbag.
• The system determines that an infant is
present in a rear-facing infant seat.
• The system determines that a small child is
present in a forward-facing child restraint.
• The system determines that a small child is
present in a booster seat.
Even though the passenger sensing
system is designed to turn off the
• A right front passenger takes his/her weight off
of the seat for a period of time.
passenger’s frontal airbag if the system
detects a rear-facing child restraint, no
system is fail-safe, and no one can
guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
under some unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off. We recommend
that rear-facing child restraints be secured
in the rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
If you need to secure a forward-facing
child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as
far back as it will go. It is better to secure
the child restraint in a rear seat.
• The right front passenger seat is occupied by
a smaller person, such as a child who has
outgrown child restraints.
• Or, if there is a critical problem with the airbag
system or the passenger sensing system.
When the passenger sensing system has turned
off the passenger’s frontal airbag, the off indicator
in the overhead console will light and stay lit to
remind you that the airbag is off. See Passenger
75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove
the child restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the
child restraint following the child restraint
manufacturer’s directions and refer to Securing a
on page 59.
When the passenger sensing system has allowed
the airbag to be enabled, the on indicator will
light and stay lit to remind you that the airbag
is active.
For some children who have outgrown child
restraints and for very small adults, the passenger
sensing system may or may not turn off the
right front passenger’s frontal airbag, depending
upon the person’s seating posture and body build.
Everyone in your vehicle who has outgrown
child restraints should wear a safety belt
properly — whether or not there is an airbag
for that person.
If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting
the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to
make sure that the vehicle’s seatback is not
pressing the child restraint into the seat cushion.
If this happens, slightly recline the vehicle’s
seatback and adjust the seat cushion if possible.
Also make sure the child restraint is not trapped
under the vehicle head restraint. If this happens,
adjust the head restraint.
If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat, but the off indicator is lit, it
could be because that person is not sitting properly
in the seat. If this happens, turn the vehicle off
and ask the person to place the seatback in
the fully upright position, then sit upright in the
seat, centered on the seat cushion, with the
person’s legs comfortably extended. Restart the
vehicle and have the person remain in this position
for about two minutes. This will allow the system
to detect that person and then enable the
passenger’s airbag.
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the
child restraint in a rear seat position in the
vehicle and check with your dealer.
The passenger sensing system is designed to
enable (may inflate) the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag anytime the system senses
that a person of adult size is sitting properly
in the right front passenger’s seat.
76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CAUTION: (Continued)
If this ever happens, have the vehicle
serviced promptly, because an adult-size
person sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat may not have the
protection of the frontal airbag. See
more on this, including important safety
information.
A thick layer of additional material such as a
blanket, or aftermarket equipment such as seat
covers, seat heaters and seat massagers
can affect how well the passenger sensing system
operates. Remove any additional material from
the seat cushion before reinstalling or securing the
child restraint or small occupant. You may want
to consider not using seat covers or other
aftermarket equipment if your vehicle has the
passenger sensing system. See Adding Equipment
more information about modifications that can
affect how the system operates.
{CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light in the
instrument panel cluster ever comes on
and stays on, it means that something may
be wrong with the airbag system.
CAUTION: (Continued)
77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle
{CAUTION:
Airbags affect how your vehicle should be
serviced. There are parts of the airbag system in
several places around your vehicle. You do
not want the system to inflate while someone is
working on your vehicle. Your dealer and the
service manual have information about servicing
your vehicle and the airbag system. To purchase a
service manual, see Service Publications
For up to 10 seconds, after the ignition is
turned off and the battery is disconnected,
an airbag can still inflate during improper
service. You can be injured if you are
close to an airbag when it inflates. Avoid
yellow connectors. They are probably part
of the airbag system. Be sure to follow
proper service procedures, and make sure
the person performing work for you is
qualified to do so.
The airbag system does not need regular
maintenance.
78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Q: Because I have a disability, I have to get
my vehicle modified. How can I find out
whether this will affect my airbag system?
A: Changing or moving any parts of the
front seats, safety belts, the airbag sensing
and diagnostic module, steering wheel,
instrument panel, overhead console, ceiling
headliner, ceiling and pillar garnish trim,
roof-mounted airbag modules, or airbag wiring
can affect the operation of the airbag
Q: Is there anything I might add to the front
or sides of the vehicle that could keep the
airbags from working properly?
A: Yes. If you add things that change your
vehicle’s frame, bumper system, height,
front end or side sheet metal, they may keep
the airbag system from working properly.
Also, the airbag system may not work properly
if you relocate any of the airbag sensors. If
you have any questions about this, you should
contact Customer Assistance before you
modify your vehicle. The phone numbers and
addresses for Customer Assistance are in
Step Two of the Customer Satisfaction
Procedure in this manual. See Customer
system. If you have questions, call Customer
Assistance. The phone numbers and
addresses for Customer Assistance are in
Step Two of the Customer Satisfaction
Procedure in this manual. See Customer
79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Also look for any opened or broken airbag covers,
and have them repaired or replaced. The airbag
system does not need regular maintenance.
Restraint System Check
Checking the Restraint Systems
Notice: If you damage the covering for the
driver’s or the right front passenger’s airbag, or
the airbag covering on the driver’s and right
front passenger’s seatback, or the side impact
airbag covering on the ceiling near the side
windows, the bag may not work properly. You
may have to replace the airbag module in the
steering wheel, both the airbag module and the
instrument panel for the right front passenger’s
airbag, the airbag module and seatback for the
driver’s and right front passenger’s
Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder
light and all your belts, buckles, latch plates,
retractors and anchorages are working properly.
Look for any other loose or damaged safety
belt system parts. If you see anything that might
keep a safety belt system from doing its job, have
it repaired. Keep safety belts clean and dry.
information.
Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in
a crash. They can rip apart under impact forces.
If a belt is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.
seat-mounted side impact airbags, or side
impact airbag module and ceiling covering for
the roof-mounted side impact airbag. Do not
open or break the airbag coverings.
80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If belts are cut or damaged, replace them.
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
Collision damage also may mean you will need to
have LATCH system, safety belt or seat parts
repaired or replaced. New parts and repairs may
be necessary even if the belt or LATCH system
was not being used at the time of the collision.
{CAUTION:
If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbag
system parts. See the part on the airbag system
earlier in this section.
A crash can damage the restraint systems
in your vehicle. A damaged restraint
system may not properly protect the person
using it, resulting in serious injury or even
death in a crash. To help make sure your
restraint systems are working properly after
a crash, have them inspected and any
necessary replacements made as soon as
possible.
If the frontal airbags inflate, you will also need to
replace the driver’s and right front passenger’s
safety belt buckle assembly. Be sure to do
so. Then the new buckle assembly will be there to
help protect you in a collision.
After a crash you may need to replace the driver
and front passenger’s safety belt buckle
assemblies, even if the frontal airbags have not
deployed. The driver and front passenger’s safety
belt buckle assemblies contain the safety belt
pretensioners. Have your safety belt pretensioners
checked if your vehicle has been in a collision,
or if your airbag readiness light stays on after you
start your vehicle or while you are driving. See
If you have had a crash, do you need new belts
or LATCH system parts?
After a very minor collision, nothing may be
necessary. But if the belts were stretched, as they
would be if worn during a more severe crash,
then you need new parts.
If the LATCH system was being used during a
more severe crash, you may need new LATCH
system parts.
81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 2
Features and Controls
84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys
{CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the
keyless access transmitter is dangerous
for many reasons, children or others
could be badly injured or even killed. They
could operate the power windows or other
controls or even make the vehicle move.
The windows will function with the
keyless access transmitter in the vehicle
and they could be seriously injured or
killed if caught in the path of a closing
window. Do not leave the keyless access
transmitter in a vehicle with children.
85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You will have either of the following keys below.
To remove the key,
press the button (A)
near the bottom of the
keyless access
transmitter, and pull the
key out. Never pull
the key without pressing
the button.
This key can be used
for the driver’s door,
glove box and rear seat
pass-through door.
See “Rear Seat
Pass-Through Door”
page 101 for more
information.
Your vehicle has a Keyless Access System with
page 111 for information on starting the vehicle.
This key, located inside
the keyless access
transmitter, can be used
for the driver’s door,
glove box, and rear seat
pass-through door.
See “Rear Seat
Pass-Through Door”
page 101 for more
information.
Notice: If you ever lose your transmitter(s)
and/or key, it could be difficult to get into your
vehicle. You may even have to damage your
vehicle to get in. Be sure you have a spare
transmitter and/or key.
In an emergency, contact Cadillac Roadside
86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you ever notice a decrease in the keyless
access transmitter range, try doing one of the
following:
Keyless Access System
Your vehicle has a Keyless Access System that
operates on a radio frequency subject to Federal
Communications Commission (FCC) Rules
and with Industry Canada.
• Check the distance. You may be too far from
your vehicle. You may need to stand closer
during rainy or snowy weather.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
• Check the location. Other vehicles or objects
may be blocking the signal. Take a few steps
to the left or right, hold the transmitter
higher, and try again.
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference.
• Check to determine if battery replacement is
necessary. See “Battery Replacement”
page 88.
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
• Check to make sure that an electronic device
such as a cellular phone or lap top computer
is not causing interference.
1. This device may not cause interference.
• If you are still having trouble, see your dealer
or a qualified technician for service.
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other
than an authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You will have either of the following keyless
access transmitters below.
Keyless Access System Operation
Your vehicle has a Keyless Access System
that lets you lock and unlock your vehicle’s doors,
open the trunk lid, remotely start the engine,
and locate your vehicle, or sound your vehicle’s
alarm from a distance as much as 30 feet
(10 m) away.
The Keyless Access System also lets you lock
and unlock the vehicle’s doors and access
the trunk without removing the remote transmitter
from your pocket, purse, briefcase, etc. The
system operates when the transmitter is located
within 3 feet (1 m) of the door or trunk of your
vehicle. See “Keyless Doors Unlock” and “Keyless
Ft (Front) Door Unlock” under Vehicle
Your vehicle comes with two transmitters.
Q(Lock): Press this button to lock the doors.
The lock status light on the front doors will turn on
for five seconds and the turn signal indicators
will flash. If this button is pressed twice, the doors
will lock, the status light on the door will turn on
for five seconds, the turn signal indicators will flash
twice, and the horn will sound once.
88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the engine is off, the windows may be closed
from outside the vehicle using the lock button
on the keyless access transmitter. Press and hold
the lock button for more than two seconds to
close any open window(s) on your vehicle. If any
window is unable to close completely, it will
reverse and the horn will chirp. See “Anti-Pinch
for more information.
You can program your vehicle so the turn signal
indicators will not flash and the fog lamps and
reverse lamps remain on steady for about
20 seconds when the keyless access transmitter is
used to unlock the vehicle. See “Lights Flash at
Lock” and “Ext. (Exterior) Lights at Unlock” under
If your vehicle has the memory feature you can
program and recall memory settings when you
press the unlock button on the keyless access
transmitter. See Memory Seat, Mirrors and Steering
You can program your vehicle so the turn signal
indicators will not flash and the horn will not sound
when pressing the lock button on the keyless
access transmitter. For more information
see “Lights Flash at Lock” and “Horn Chirps at
G(Trunk): Press and hold this button for
about one second to open the trunk while
the engine is turned off or the shift lever is in
PARK (P).
/(Remote Start): Press this button to operate
the remote start feature. See “Remote Vehicle
Start” at the end of this section for more detailed
information.
L(Vehicle Locator/Panic Alarm): Press and
release this button to locate your vehicle. The horn
will chirp three times and the turn signal lamps
will flash three times. Press and hold the button for
three seconds to sound the panic alarm. The
horn will chirp and the turn signal lamps will flash
for 30 seconds. Press and release the button
again to cancel the panic alarm.
" (Unlock): Press this button once to unlock
the driver’s door. The turn signal indicators will
flash twice. Press the unlock button twice within
five seconds to unlock all the doors. If it is dark
enough outside, your interior lamps will come on.
89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Turn the key to the unlock position
five times within five seconds.
Matching Transmitter(s) to Your
Vehicle
5. The Driver Information Center (DIC)
will display READY FOR FOB X,
where X can be 2, 3 or 4.
Each Keyless Access System is coded to allow
only transmitters programmed to your vehicle
to work. If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a
replacement can be purchased and programmed
through your dealer. Your dealer can reprogram
your vehicle so lost or stolen transmitters no longer
work with your vehicle. Each vehicle can have a
maximum of four transmitters matched to it.
To match a new transmitter to your vehicle when
you have a recognized transmitter, do the
following. Two recognized transmitters are required
for Canadian owners.
1. The vehicle must be off.
2. Have the recognized transmitter and the new,
unrecognized transmitter(s) with you.
3. Insert the vehicle key into the key lock
cylinder located on the outside of the
driver’s door.
90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Once the transmitter is programmed,
a beep will sound. The DIC will display
READY FOR X, where X can be 3 or 4,
or MAX # FOBS LEARNED.
8. Remove the transmitter from the transmitter
pocket and press the unlock button on the
keyless access transmitter two times.
The Canadian immobilizer standard requires
Canadian owners to see their dealer for matching
new transmitters when a recognized transmitter
is not available. United States owners are
permitted to match a new transmitter to their
vehicle when a recognized transmitter is
not available.
6. Place the new, unrecognized transmitter into
the transmitter pocket with the transmitter
buttons facing the front of the vehicle.
The transmitter pocket is inside the center
console storage area located between
the driver and front passenger seats.
91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The procedure will require three, ten minute cycles
to complete the matching process. Do the following:
1. The vehicle must be off.
2. Place the new, unrecognized transmitter into
the transmitter pocket with the transmitter
buttons facing the front of the vehicle.
The transmitter pocket is inside the center
console storage area located between
the driver and front passenger seats.
3. Insert the vehicle key into the key lock
cylinder located on the driver’s door.
92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Turn the key to the unlock position five times
within five seconds.
14. A beep will sound and the DIC will read
READY FOR FOB 1. At this time, all
previously known transmitters have been
erased.
5. The DIC message will display OFF/ACC TO
LEARN.
15. Once the transmitter is recognized and
programmed, a beep will sound and the
DIC will display READY FOR FOB 2.
6. Press the Acc. button (ignition switch).
7. The DIC will read WAIT 10 MINUTES and will
count down to zero, one minute at a time.
16. Remove the keyless access transmitter and
press the unlock button twice to initialize it.
8. The DIC will display OFF/ACC TO LEARN
again.
If you have additional transmitters to program, this
process can be repeated until four transmitters
have been programmed. The DIC will then display
MAX # FOBS LEARNED and will exit the
programming mode.
9. Press the Acc. button (ignition switch) again.
10. The DIC will again read WAIT 10 MINUTES
and will count down to zero, one minute
at a time.
11. The DIC will display OFF/ACC TO
LEARN again.
When you are done programming transmitters,
press the unlock button on each keyless access
transmitter twice. After performing this process,
transmitters previously programmed will no longer
work with your vehicle and must be reprogrammed.
12. Press the Acc. button (ignition switch) again.
13. The DIC will again read WAIT 10 MINUTES
and will count down to zero, one minute
at a time.
93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: When replacing the battery, use care
not to touch any of the circuitry. Static
from your body transferred to these surfaces
may damage the transmitter.
Battery Replacement
Under normal use, the battery in your keyless
access transmitter should last about three years.
The battery is weak if the transmitter will not
work at the normal range in any location. If you
have to get close to your vehicle before the
transmitter works, it is probably time to change the
battery. The DIC may display KEY FOB
BATTERY LOW.
A weak battery may also cause the DIC to display
NO FOBS DETECTED when you try to start
the vehicle. If this happens, place the transmitter
in the center console storage area transmitter
pocket with the buttons facing to the front of the
vehicle. Then, with the vehicle in PARK (P)
or NEUTRAL (N), press the brake pedal and the
for additional information about your vehicle’s
electronic keyless ignition with push button start.
Although this will start the vehicle, it is
recommended that you replace the transmitter
battery as soon as possible.
94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Reassemble the transmitter. Make sure to put
it together so water will not get inside the
transmitter.
5. Test the transmitter.
Remote Vehicle Start
This feature allows you to start the engine from
outside the vehicle.
Before the remote vehicle start system can be
operated with the keyless access transmitter
it must be activated. The remote start system is
turned on through the vehicle personalization
system.
To replace the battery, do the following:
You can also program the remote vehicle start
system to start up the vehicle’s automatic climate
control system. If this feature is turned on, the
system monitors the outside temperature and turns
on the rear window defogger, front window
defogger, and heated or ventilated seats, if your
vehicle has them. See “Personal Settings
1. Depending on which keyless access
transmitter you have, Insert a flat object with a
thin edge into the slot on the side or back
of the transmitter and separate the bottom half
from the top half.
2. Carefully pull the battery out of the transmitter.
3. Put the new battery in the transmitter,
positive (+) side down. Use a battery
type CR2032 or equivalent.
95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the vehicle is left running it will automatically
shut off after 10 minutes unless a time extension
has been done. To manually shut off a remote
start, do any of the following:
/(Remote Start): To start the vehicle using the
remote start feature, do the following:
1. Aim the remote keyless access transmitter at
the vehicle.
• Aim the keyless access transmitter at the
vehicle and press the remote start button until
the parking lamps turn off.
2. Press the transmitter’s lock button, release it,
and then immediately press and hold the
transmitter’s remote start button for at least
three seconds or until the vehicle’s turn signal
lamps flash. The vehicle’s doors will be
locked.
• Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
• Press the Acc. button (ignition switch). See
When the vehicle starts, the parking lamps will
turn on and remain on while the vehicle is
running.
When you enter the vehicle during a remote start,
press the brake pedal and press the start
button on the keyless ignition switch to transition
from remote start operation to normal vehicle
operation.
3. If it is the first remote start since the vehicle
has been driven, repeat these steps, while
the engine is still running, to extend the engine
running time by 10 minutes. Remote start
can be extended one time.
Laws in some local communities may restrict the
use of remote starters. For example, laws may
require a person using remote start to have
the vehicle in view when doing so. Check local
regulations for any requirements on remote starting
of vehicles.
96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Do not use the remote start feature if your vehicle
is low on fuel. Your vehicle may run out of fuel.
The remote start feature will not operate if any of
the following occur:
• The check engine light is displayed. See
“Check Engine Light” under Malfunction
The remote start feature provides two separate
starts, each with 10 minutes of engine running. If
you press the lock button and then hold the
remote start button on the keyless access
transmitter again for at least three seconds before
the first 10 minutes of engine running time has
expired, 10 minutes is added to the remaining
minutes. For example, if the remote start is
initiated again after five minutes of the engine run
time, 10 minutes is added and you now have
15 minutes with the engine running. Once
two remote starts or 20 minutes of the engine
running have been provided, the vehicle must be
started using the keyless access with pushbutton
start feature, if the engine needs to be restarted.
information regarding the keyless ignition.
• The valet lockout switch is on.
• The keyless access transmitter is in the
vehicle.
• The vehicle’s hood is open.
• The vehicle personalization feature is not
enabled.
• An unauthorized vehicle entry or a vehicle
theft was attempted.
Your keyless access transmitter, with the remote
start button, provides an increased range of
operation. However, the range may be less while
the vehicle is running. As a result, you may
need to be closer to your vehicle to turn it off than
you were to turn it on.
There are other conditions which can affect the
performance of the transmitter, see Keyless
97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Doors and Locks
Door Locks
CAUTION: (Continued)
• Outsiders can easily enter through an
unlocked door when you slow down
or stop your vehicle. Locking your
doors can help prevent this from
happening.
{CAUTION:
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
• Passengers, especially children, can
easily open the doors and fall out of
a moving vehicle. When a door is
locked, the handle will not open it.
You increase the chance of being
thrown out of the vehicle in a crash
if the doors are not locked. So, wear
safety belts properly and lock the
doors whenever you drive.
• Young children who get into unlocked
vehicles may be unable to get out.
A child can be overcome by extreme
heat and can suffer permanent injuries
or even death from heat stroke.
Always lock your vehicle whenever
you leave it.
There are several ways to lock and unlock
your vehicle.
From the outside, press the lock or unlock button
on the keyless access transmitter. When you
have your transmitter with you, you may
also unlock and open the door by pulling the door
handle. You do not have to press the unlock
button on the transmitter. Entry occurs when the
door handle is pulled and the vehicle recognizes
your transmitter. See Vehicle Personalization
on page 148 for information on how to program
the keyless access feature.
CAUTION: (Continued)
98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
From the inside, use the power door lock switches
located on each front door. See Power Door
passenger doors have manual door lock knobs
located at the top of the door panel near the
window. Push down the knob to lock the door.
Pull up the knob to unlock the door.
Programmable Automatic Door
Locks
Your vehicle was programmed from the factory so
that when the doors are closed, the ignition is
on and the shift lever is moved out of PARK (P),
all the doors will lock.
The front doors can still be opened from the inside
while the doors are locked. If a rear passenger
needs to exit the vehicle, have that person use the
manual knob or use the power door lock switch on
either front door. When the door is closed again, it
will not lock automatically. Use the manual knob or
the power door lock switch to lock the door.
Power Door Locks
The power door lock switches are located on the
armrest on the front doors.
K(Unlock): Press the side of the switch with the
unlock symbol to unlock the doors.
The doors were also programmed from the factory
to unlock every time the shift lever is moved
back into PARK (P).
Q(Lock): Press the side of the switch with the
lock symbol to lock the doors.
The power door locks can be programmed
through the radio display. The radio display allows
you to choose various lock and unlock settings.
For more information on programming, see Vehicle
99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The rear doors on your vehicle cannot be opened
from the inside when this feature is in use.
Rear Door Security Locks
Your vehicle has rear door security locks that
prevent passengers from opening the rear doors
on your vehicle from the inside.
When you want to open a rear door when the
security lock is on, do the following:
1. Unlock the door using the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter, the front door power
lock switch or by lifting the rear door
manual lock.
The rear door security
locks are located on the
inside edge of each
rear door. You
must open the rear
doors to access them.
2. Then open the door from the outside.
To cancel the rear door security lock, do the
following:
1. Unlock the door and open it from the outside.
2. Insert your key into the slot next to the
rear door security lock label and turn it
to disengage the lock.
3. Repeat the steps for the other lock.
To use these locks, do the following:
The rear door locks will now work normally.
1. Insert your key into the slot next to the rear
door security lock label and turn it to engage
the lock.
2. Close the door.
3. Repeat the steps for the other rear door.
100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lockout Protection
Trunk
Your vehicle can be programmed to sound the
horn three times and unlock the driver’s door when
all doors are closed and there is a keyless
access transmitter inside the interior of the vehicle.
When the driver’s door is reopened, the key in
reminder chime will sound continuously. The
vehicle will remain locked only when at least one
transmitter has been removed from the vehicle
and both doors are closed. See Vehicle
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to drive with the
trunk lid open because carbon monoxide
(CO) gas can come into your vehicle. You
cannot see or smell CO. It can cause
unconsciousness and even death. If you
must drive with the trunk lid open or if
electrical wiring or other cable
connections must pass through the seal
between the body and the trunk lid:
• Make sure all other windows are shut.
• Turn the fan on your heating or
cooling system to its highest speed
and select the control setting that will
force outside air into your vehicle. See
Climate Control System.
• If you have air outlets on or under
the instrument panel, open them
all the way.
101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Trunk Lid Release
There are several ways to release the trunk lid.
• V (Trunk Lid Release): Press this
button located on the driver’s door. The vehicle
must be in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) and
the valet mode turned off. To disable
page 110.
• Press the trunk lid release button on the
keyless access transmitter. See Keyless
vehicle must be in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N)
and the valet mode turned off.
• Squeeze the trunk release button located on
the rear of the trunk lid above the license
plate, as long as you have your keyless
access transmitter with you. Entry occurs when
the button is being pressed and the vehicle
recognizes the transmitter. The vehicle
must be in PARK (P) and the valet mode
turned off.
If your vehicle has lost battery power, you can still
access the trunk by unlocking and lowering the
rear seat pass-through door and pulling the
emergency trunk release handle.
102
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Seat Pass-Through Door
Emergency Trunk Release Handle
This feature allows you to access the trunk without
opening the trunk lid. If the vehicle ever loses
power, the trunk can be accessed and opened
through this door.
To open the door, do the following:
1. Pull the rear seat armrest down.
2. If the door is locked, insert the key into the
lock and turn it counterclockwise.
3. Press the button above the lock.
4. Lower the door.
To open the trunk lid, pull the emergency trunk
release handle located in the trunk on the
other side of the door opening. See “Emergency
Trunk Release Handle” following.
Notice: Do not use the emergency trunk
release handle as a tie-down or anchor point
when securing items in the trunk as it
could damage the handle.
There is a glow-in-the-dark trunk release handle
located inside the trunk near the back of the
rear seats. This handle will glow following
exposure to light. Pull down the release handle to
open the trunk from the inside of the vehicle.
103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Windows
{CAUTION:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets
in a vehicle with the windows closed is
dangerous. They can be overcome by the
extreme heat and suffer permanent
injuries or even death from heat stroke.
Never leave a child, a helpless adult, or a
pet alone in a vehicle, especially with the
windows closed in warm or hot weather.
104
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Express-Down Window
Power Windows
This feature is on all windows. It allows you to
lower the window all the way without holding the
switch down.
Press the front of the switch to the second
position and release. If you want to stop the
window as it is lowering, briefly pull up the switch.
Express-Up Window
This feature is on all windows. It allows you to
raise the window all the way without holding the
switch up. Lift the front of the switch briefly to
activate the express-up feature. If you want to stop
the window as it is raising, briefly press the
switch.
The power window switches are located on the
armrest near each window. Press the front of the
switch to the first position to open the window
to the desired level. Lift up the front of the switch
to the first position to close the window.
Your vehicle has Retained Accessory Power
(RAP) that allows you to use the power windows
once the engine has been turned off. For more
information, see Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
on page 112.
105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming the Power Windows
Express Window Anti-Pinch Override
If the battery on your vehicle has been recharged,
disconnected, or is not working, you will need to
reprogram each window for the express-up feature
to work.
{CAUTION:
If express override is activated, the
window will not reverse automatically.
You or others could be injured and the
window could be damaged. Before you
use express override, make sure that all
people and obstructions are clear of the
window path.
To program each window, follow these steps:
1. With the ignition on or in Acc., or while RAP is
active, close all doors.
2. Press and hold the power window switch until
the window has fully opened.
3. Continue holding the switch for approximately
two seconds.
4. Pull up the power window switch until the
window is fully closed.
The window is now programmed. Repeat the
process for all windows.
In an emergency, the anti-pinch feature can be
overridden in a supervised mode. Hold the window
switch all the way up in the express position.
The window will rise for as long as the switch is
held. Once the switch is released, the express
mode is re-activated.
Express Window Anti-Pinch Feature
If any object is in the path of the window when the
express-up is active, the window will stop at the
obstruction and auto-reverse to a preset factory
position. Weather conditions such as severe icing
may also cause the window to auto-reverse.
The window will return to normal operation once the
obstruction or condition is removed.
In this mode, the window can still close on an object
in its path. Use care when using the override mode.
106
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Window Lockout
Sun Visors
Swing down the visor or detach it from the center
mount and move to the side to block out glare.
The visors also have side-to-side slide capability
for greater coverage.
o(Window Lockout): The rear window lockout
button is located on the driver’s door armrest
near the window switches. Press this button to
disable the rear window controls. The light on the
button will illuminate, indicating that the feature
is in use. The rear windows can be raised or
lowered using the driver’s window switches when
the lockout feature is on. To restore power to
the rear windows, press the button again. The light
on the button will go out.
Lighted Visor Vanity Mirrors
Pull the visor down and lift the cover. Move the
slide switch up or down to brighten or dim
the lamp.
Theft-Deterrent Systems
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some
cities. Although your vehicle has a number of
theft-deterrent features, we know that nothing
we put on it can make it impossible to steal.
The front passenger window can be programmed
to be disabled using the window lockout button.
Secure Car Feature
The windows can be closed by pressing the lock
button on the keyless access transmitter. See
more information. The window, if down, will
express-up. If any window was unable to
completely close, it will reverse and the horn will
chirp. See “Anti-Pinch Feature” previously.
The engine must be off to operate this feature.
107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
the security light will flash for 60 seconds and
then turn off. At this time, the theft-deterrent
system is armed but the alarm will not sound if
the trunk lid, hood or door that was not
closed completely is tampered with or opened.
The alarm will sound for the trunk lid, hood
or a door that was completely closed at
the time the vehicle was locked using the
keyless access transmitter.
Theft-Deterrent System
Your vehicle has a theft-deterrent alarm system.
The security light is
located on the
instrument panel cluster.
• Open the door. Lock the door with the power
door lock switch or lock button on the keyless
access transmitter. The security light should
flash. Close the door. The security light
will stop flashing and stay on. After 30 seconds
the light should turn off, the theft-deterrent
system is armed.
If the ignition is off and a door is open, the
security light will flash, reminding you to arm
the theft-deterrent system.
To arm the system, do one of the following:
• Press the lock button on the keyless access
transmitter. If the door is closed when the
lock button is pressed, the security light
will stay illuminated for 30 seconds. After the
security light goes off, the theft-deterrent
system is armed. Pressing the lock button
twice will arm the system immediately.
• Passive Arming, if activated through the
vehicle personalization feature, will arm
the system automatically after you close the
door and take at least one keyless access
transmitter with you. The security light will turn
on. After 60 seconds the light should turn
off. The theft-deterrent system is armed. See
If the vehicle is locked using the keyless
access transmitter and the trunk lid, hood
or a door is open or not closed completely,
108
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If a door, hood, or the trunk is opened without
the keyless access transmitter, the horn will
sound for 30 seconds and the lamps will flash
for two minutes. The vehicle cannot be started
without a keyless access transmitter.
Pressing the unlock button on the keyless access
transmitter or using the key to unlock the
driver’s door disarms the theft-deterrent system.
Unlocking a door any other way while the
system is armed will activate the alarm.
The Theft-Deterrent system will not arm if:
• The key is used to turn the key cylinder to
the lock position.
• The driver’s door is locked using the power
door lock switch after the doors are closed.
Testing the Alarm
1. From inside the vehicle, roll down the window,
then get out of the vehicle, keeping the
door open.
2. From outside of the vehicle, with the door
open, lock the vehicle using the power door
lock switch or the keyless access transmitter
and close the door. Wait about 30 seconds
until the security light goes off.
If the vehicle is locked using the keyless access
transmitter and the trunk lid, hood or a door
is open or not closed completely, the security
light will flash for 60 seconds and then turn off.
At this time, the theft-deterrent system is armed
but the alarm will not sound if the trunk lid, hood or
door that was not closed completely is tampered
with or opened. The alarm will sound for the
trunk lid, hood or a door that was completely
closed at the time the vehicle was locked using
the keyless access transmitter.
The vehicle can be programmed to automatically
unlock the doors and disarm the theft-deterrent
system when you approach the vehicle and
the keyless access transmitter is with you. See
3. Reach in and open the door using the inside
door handle. The horn will sound and the
exterior lamps will flash.
You can turn off the alarm by pressing the unlock
button on the keyless access transmitter or by
starting the car.
If the alarm does not sound when it should, check to
see if the horn works. The horn fuse may be blown.
109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To replace the fuse, see Fuses and Circuit
be replaced, you may need to have your vehicle
serviced.
9(Off): Press the left side of the valet lockout
switch to turn the lockout feature off. When the
lockout feature is off, you can open the trunk using
either the keyless access transmitter or the trunk
release button located on the driver’s door.
To reduce the possibility of theft, always arm the
Theft-Deterrent system when leaving your vehicle.
R(On): Press the right side of the valet lockout
switch to turn the lockout feature on. When
the lockout feature is turned on, the trunk cannot
be unlocked with the keyless access transmitter
or the trunk release button located on the driver’s
door. If the valet lockout feature is on it will
also disable the remote start feature and the
Universal Home Remote transmitter, if equipped.
Valet Lockout Switch
The valet lockout switch
is located inside the
glove box.
Locking the glove box with your key will also
help to secure your vehicle.
information.
110
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Do not tow a trailer during break-in. See
trailer towing capabilities of your vehicle
and more information.
Starting and Operating Your
Vehicle
New Vehicle Break-In
Following break-in, engine speed and load can
be gradually increased.
Notice: Your vehicle does not need an
elaborate break-in. But it will perform better in
the long run if you follow these guidelines:
Ignition Positions
• Do not drive at any one constant speed,
fast or slow, for the first 500 miles
(805 km). Do not make full-throttle starts.
Avoid downshifting to brake, or slow,
the vehicle.
Your vehicle has an
electronic keyless
ignition with
pushbutton start.
• Avoid making hard stops for the first
200 miles (322 km) or so. During this time
your new brake linings are not yet
broken in. Hard stops with new linings can
mean premature wear and earlier
replacement. Follow this breaking-in
guideline every time you get new brake
linings.
/(START): Press this button while your foot is
on the brake to start the engine. The shifter
must be in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) to start the
engine and the keyless access transmitter must
be in the vehicle for the ignition to work.
111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
After being in Acc. for about 20 minutes, the vehicle
will automatically enter RAP or will turn off,
depending on if the doors are opened or closed.
9/Acc. (OFF/ACCESSORY): When this button
is pressed, the engine will turn off even if the shifter
is not in PARK (P). If the shifter is in PARK (P), the
ignition mode will change to RAP, if all doors are
closed. The ignition mode will change to off, if a
front door is opened. See Retained Accessory
If the shifter is not in PARK (P), the ignition mode
page 122.
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
The following accessories on your vehicle may be
used for up to 20 minutes after the engine is
turned off:
• Radio
• Power Windows
• Audio Steering Wheel Controls
When the engine is off, press this button to place
the vehicle in accessory mode. ACCESSORY
ACTIVE will display on the Driver Information
Center (DIC). This mode allows you to use things
like the radio and the windshield wipers while the
engine is off. Use accessory mode if you must have
your vehicle in motion while the engine is off, for
example, if your vehicle is being towed. If the door
is open while in accessory mode, the key in
reminder chime will sound continuously.
Power to these accessories stops after 20 minutes
or if one of the front doors is opened. If you
want power for another 20 minutes, close all the
doors and press to Acc. to place the vehicle
in accessory mode. Press the button again and
the vehicle will return to RAP.
If the push-button start is not working, your vehicle
may be near a strong radio antenna signal causing
interference to the keyless access system. See DIC
information.
112
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. When the engine begins cranking, let go of
the button and the engine cranks automatically
until it starts. If the battery in the keyless
access transmitter is weak, the DIC displays
KEY FOB BATTERY LOW. You can still
drive the vehicle.
Starting the Engine
Move the shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
To restart when you are already moving, use
NEUTRAL (N).
Notice: Do not try to shift to PARK (P) if your
vehicle is moving. If you do, you could
damage the transmission. Shift to PARK (P)
only when your vehicle is stopped.
See “Battery Replacement” under Keyless
Access System Operation on page 88
for more information. If the fob battery is
dead, you need to insert the fob into the fob
slot to enable engine starting. See “No
Fobs Detected” under DIC Warnings and
The keyless access transmitter must be inside the
vehicle for the ignition to work.
Cell phone chargers can interfere with the
operation of the Keyless Access System. Battery
chargers should not be plugged in when starting
or turning off the engine.
3. Do not race the engine immediately after
starting it. Operate the engine and transmission
gently until the oil warms up and lubricates all
moving parts.
To start you vehicle, do the following:
1. With your foot on the brake pedal, press the
START button located on the instrument panel.
4. If the engine does not start and no DIC
message is displayed, wait 15 seconds
before trying again to let the cranking motor
cool down.
If there is not a keyless access transmitter in
the vehicle or if there is something causing
interference with it, the DIC will display
NO FOBS DETECTED. See DIC Warnings
information.
113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the engine does not start after 5-10 seconds,
especially in very cold weather (below 0°F
or −18°C), it could be flooded with too much
gasoline. Try pushing the accelerator pedal all
the way to the floor while cranking for up to
15 seconds maximum. Wait at least
15 seconds between each try, to allow the
cranking motor to cool down. When the engine
starts, let go of the accelerator. If the vehicle
starts briefly but then stops again, do the same
thing. This clears the extra gasoline from
the engine.
If the engine does not start, cranking automatically
stops after 15 seconds to prevent cranking
motor damage. To prevent gear damage, this
system also prevents cranking if the engine
is already running.
Notice: Your engine is designed to work with
the electronics in your vehicle. If you add
electrical parts or accessories, you could
change the way the engine operates. Before
adding electrical equipment, check with your
dealer. If you do not, your engine might not
perform properly. Any resulting damage would
not be covered by your vehicle’s warranty.
Notice: Cranking the engine for long periods
of time, by pressing the START button
immediately after cranking has ended, can
overheat and damage the cranking motor, and
drain the battery. Wait at least 15 seconds
between each try, to allow the cranking motor
to cool down.
Stopping Your Engine
Move the shift lever to PARK (P) and press the Acc.
button located on the instrument panel. If the shifter
is not in PARK (P), the engine shuts off and the
vehicle goes into the Accessory Mode. The DIC
displays “SHIFT TO PARK”. Once the shifter is
moved to PARK (P), the vehicle turns off.
If the keyless access transmitter is not detected
inside the vehicle when it is turned to off, the DIC
displays NO FOB OFF OR RUN?.
Your vehicle has a Computer-Controlled Cranking
System. This feature assists in starting the
engine and protects components. Once cranking
has been initiated, the engine continues cranking
for a few seconds or until the vehicle starts.
more information.
114
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
Your vehicle may be equipped with an engine
coolant heater.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord.
In very cold weather, 0°F (−18°C) or colder, the
engine coolant heater can help. You will get easier
starting and better fuel economy during engine
warm-up.
For the 3.6L V6 engine, the cord is located in
the engine compartment on the passenger’s
side of the vehicle in front of the fuse block.
For the 4.6L V8 engine, the cord is located in
the engine compartment on the driver’s
side of the vehicle near the inner fender and
above the strut.
For the 4.4L V8 engine, the cord is located in
the front of the engine compartment, on
the passenger’s side of the vehicle. The plug
will be inside the upper grille cutout.
Usually, the coolant heater should be plugged in a
minimum of four hours prior to starting your
vehicle. At temperatures above 32°F (0°C), use of
the coolant heater is not required. Your vehicle
may also have an internal thermostat in the
plug end of the cord. This will prevent operation of
the engine coolant heater when the temperature
is at or above 0°F (−18°C) as noted on the cord.
3. You must remove the plastic cap to access
the plug.
115
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt
AC outlet.
everything here, we ask that you contact your
dealer in the area where you will be parking your
vehicle. The dealer can give you the best
advice for that particular area.
{CAUTION:
Automatic Transmission Operation
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded
outlet could cause an electrical shock.
Also, the wrong kind of extension cord
could overheat and cause a fire. You
could be seriously injured. Plug the cord
into a properly grounded three-prong
110-volt AC outlet. If the cord will not
reach, use a heavy-duty three-prong
extension cord rated for at least 15 amps.
The shift lever is located on the center console
between the front seats.
There are several
different positions for
the shift lever.
5. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug
and store the cord as it was before to keep it
away from moving engine parts. If you do
not, it could be damaged.
PARK (P): This position locks the rear wheels.
It is the best position to use when you start
the engine because your vehicle cannot move
easily.
How long should you keep the coolant heater
plugged in? The answer depends on the outside
temperature, the kind of oil you have, and
some other things. Instead of trying to list
116
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You must fully apply your regular brakes first and
then press the shift lever button before you
can shift from PARK (P) when the vehicle is
running. If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease
pressure on the shift lever and push the shift
lever all the way into PARK (P) as you maintain
brake application. Then press the shift lever button
and move the shift lever into another gear. See
{CAUTION:
It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P)
with the parking brake firmly set. Your
vehicle can roll.
Do not leave your vehicle when the engine
is running unless you have to. If you have
left the engine running, the vehicle can
move suddenly. You or others could be
injured. To be sure your vehicle will not
move, even when you are on fairly level
ground, always set your parking brake
and move the shift lever to PARK (P). See
are pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer
on page 357.
Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your
vehicle is moving forward could damage
the transmission. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Shift to
REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is
stopped.
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.
At low vehicle speeds, you can also use
REVERSE (R) to rock your vehicle back and forth
to get out of snow, ice, or sand without damaging
your transmission. See If Your Vehicle is Stuck
additional information.
Make sure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P)
before starting the engine. Your vehicle has an
automatic transmission shift lock control system.
117
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, the engine does
not connect with the wheels. To restart when
you are already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.
You can also use NEUTRAL (N) when your
vehicle is being towed.
DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving. It
provides the best fuel economy for your vehicle. If
you need more power for passing, and you are:
• Going less than 35 mph (55 km/h), push
the accelerator pedal about halfway down.
• Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, push
the accelerator all the way down.
{CAUTION:
The transmission will shift down to a lower
gear and have more power.
Shifting into a drive gear while your
engine is running at high speed is
dangerous. Unless your foot is firmly on
the brake pedal, your vehicle could move
very rapidly. You could lose control and
hit people or objects. Do not shift into a
drive gear while your engine is running at
high speed.
Downshifting the transmission in slippery road
conditions could result in skidding, see “Skidding”
Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) or
NEUTRAL (N) with the engine running at high
speed may damage the transmission. The
repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Be sure the engine is not running at high
speed when shifting your vehicle.
118
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you do not move the shift lever forward or
rearward, the vehicle will be in sport mode.
When you are in the sport mode the vehicle
will still shift automatically. While driving
in sport mode, the transmission may remain in
a gear longer than it would in normal driving
mode based on braking, throttle input,
and vehicle lateral acceleration.
Driver Shift Control (DSC)
Notice: If you drive your vehicle at high
RPMs without upshifting while using Driver
Shift Control (DSC), you could damage your
vehicle. Always upshift when necessary while
using DSC.
Your automatic transmission has a Driver Shift
Control (DSC) feature that allows you to change
gears similar to a manual transmission. To use
the DSC feature:
2. Press the shift lever forward to upshift or
rearward to downshift.
The DIC will show the
driver’s selection when
moving the shift
1. Slide the shift lever over from DRIVE (D)
to the right into the DSC area.
lever forward or
rearward. See Driver
on page 258 for more
information on the DIC.
When the transmission is in DSC mode the
sport symbol in the Driver Information
Center (DIC) will come on.
119
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your vehicle has the V6 engine and 5-speed
transmission, when shifting manually, the number
displayed on the Driver Information Center (DIC)
indicates the highest gear allowed (1,2,3,4,5).
If First (1) or Second (2) gear is selected, the
transmission will stay in that gear. If a higher
gear position is selected, the transmission will
automatically shift between the Second (2) gear
position up to the selected gear.
The transmission will only allow you to shift into
gears appropriate for the vehicle speed and engine
Revolutions Per Minute (RPM). The transmission
will not automatically shift to the next higher
gear if the engine RPM is too high.
If shifting is prevented for any reason, the selected
gear will flash multiple times, indicating that the
transmission has not shifted gears.
The transmission will allow you to shift to the gear
selected and will automatically downshift when
the vehicle comes to a stop. This will allow
for more power during take-off and passing.
If your vehicle has the V8 engine and 6-speed
transmission, when shifting manually, the number
displayed on the Driver Information Center (DIC)
indicates the gear that the transmission is in.
When starting the vehicle from a stopped condition,
only First (1) and Second (2) gear may be used.
While using the DSC feature the vehicle will
have firmer shifting and increased performance.
You can use this for sport driving or when
climbing/descending hills to stay in gear longer or
to down shift for more power or engine braking.
120
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To release the parking brake, hold the brake pedal
down with your right foot and push the parking
brake pedal with your left foot. When you lift your
left foot, the parking brake releases.
Parking Brake
The parking brake
pedal is located on the
lower portion of the
instrument panel to
the left of the steering
wheel.
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can
overheat the brake system and cause
premature wear or damage to brake system
parts. Verify that the parking brake is fully
released and the brake warning light is
off before driving.
A warning chime will sound if the parking brake
is set, the ignition is on and the vehicle begins
to move. To stop the chime, fully release the
parking brake.
This vehicle has a push-to-release parking brake
pedal. To set the parking brake, hold the
regular brake pedal down with your right foot and
push the parking brake pedal down with your
left foot.
If you are towing a trailer and parking on a hill,
information.
If the ignition is on, the brake system warning light
on the instrument panel cluster should come
on. If it does not, you need to have your vehicle
serviced. See Brake System Warning Light
on page 248 for more information.
121
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To shift into PARK (P), use the following steps:
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot.
Shifting Into Park (P)
2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) by
pressing the button on the front of the
shift lever while pushing the lever all the way
toward the front of the vehicle. Release
the button.
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your
vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in
PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly
set. Your vehicle can roll. If you have left
the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured.
To be sure your vehicle will not move,
even when you are on fairly level ground,
use the steps that follow. If you are
page 357.
3. With your right foot still holding the brake
pedal down, set the parking brake with
for more information.
4. Turn the ignition off.
122
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Then, see if you can move the shift lever away
from PARK (P) without first pushing the button on
the shift lever. If you can, it means that the
shift lever was not fully locked into PARK (P).
Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine
Running
{CAUTION:
Torque Lock
If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift
your transmission into PARK (P) properly,
the weight of the vehicle may put too much force
on the parking pawl in the transmission. You
may find it difficult to pull the shift lever out
of PARK (P). This is called “torque lock.” To
prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and then
shift into PARK (P) properly before you leave
the driver’s seat. To find out how, see “Shifting Into
PARK (P)” listed previously.
It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle
with the engine running. Your vehicle
could move suddenly if the shift lever is
not fully in PARK (P) with the parking
brake firmly set. And, if you leave the
vehicle with the engine running, it could
overheat and even catch fire. You or
others could be injured. Do not leave your
vehicle with the engine running.
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have
another vehicle push yours a little uphill to
take some of the pressure from the parking pawl
in the transmission, so you can pull the shift
lever out of PARK (P).
If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine
running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P)
and your parking brake is firmly set before you
leave it. After you have moved the shift lever into
PARK (P), hold the regular brake pedal down.
123
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Shifting Out of Park (P)
Parking Over Things That Burn
Your vehicle has an automatic transmission shift
lock control system. You have to fully apply
your regular brake before you can shift from
PARK (P) when the vehicle is running. See
If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure
on the shift lever – push the shift lever all the
way into PARK (P) and release the shift lever
button as you maintain brake application. Then
press the shift lever button and move the
shift lever into the gear desired.
If you ever hold the brake pedal down but still
cannot shift out of PARK (P), try this:
1. Press the regular bake.
2. Press the Acc. button twice to place the
ignition in accessory mode.
3. Apply and hold the brake until the end of
Step 4.
{CAUTION:
4. Shift to NEUTRAL (N).
Things that can burn could touch hot
exhaust parts under your vehicle and
ignite. Do not park over papers, leaves,
dry grass, or other things that can burn.
5. Start the engine and then shift to the drive
gear you want.
6. Have your vehicle inspected by your dealer
as soon as possible.
124
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Exhaust
CAUTION: (Continued)
• Repairs were not done correctly.
• Your vehicle or the exhaust system
has been modified improperly.
{CAUTION:
Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the
gas carbon monoxide (CO), which you
cannot see or smell. It can cause
unconsciousness and death.
If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into
your vehicle:
• Drive it only with all the windows
down to blow out any CO; and
• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.
You might have exhaust coming in if:
• The exhaust system sounds strange
or different.
• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
• Your vehicle was damaged in a
collision.
• Your vehicle was damaged when
driving over high points on the road
or over road debris.
CAUTION: (Continued)
125
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Running the Engine While Parked
{CAUTION:
It is better not to park with the engine running. But if
you ever have to, here are some things to know.
It can be dangerous to get out of your
vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in
PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly
set. Your vehicle can roll. Do not leave
your vehicle when the engine is running
unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured.
To be sure your vehicle will not move,
even when you are on fairly level ground,
always set your parking brake after you
move the shift lever to PARK (P).
{CAUTION:
Idling the engine with the climate control
system off could allow dangerous exhaust
into your vehicle. See the earlier caution
Also, idling in a closed-in place can let
deadly carbon monoxide (CO) into your
vehicle even if the climate control fan is at
the highest setting. One place this can
happen is a garage. Exhaust — with
CO — can come in easily. NEVER park in
a garage with the engine running.
Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle
page 122.
Another closed-in place can be a blizzard.
If you are parking on a hill and if you are pulling a
126
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
Mirrors
Your vehicle may have an automatic dimming
rearview mirror.
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
with Intellibeam™ and OnStar®
O(On/Off): Press and hold the button, located
on the lower left side of the mirror face, for
about three seconds to turn the automatic dimming
feature on or off. The indicator light will illuminate
when this feature is active. The automatic
dimming feature is active each time the vehicle is
started.
Your vehicle may have an Intellibeam™ inside
rearview mirror with OnStar® controls. For
To turn on and enable Intellibeam™, press and
release the Intellibeam™ button on the inside rear
view mirror. If the vehicle has the IntelliBeam™
Intelligent High-Beam Headlamp Control System,
the on/off button can also be used to turn off
or reset this system. See “IntelliBeam™ Intelligent
High-Beam Headlamp Control System” under
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
with OnStar®
Your vehicle may have an automatic dimming
rearview mirror that also contains OnStar®
controls. For more information on OnStar®, see
127
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Mirror Operation
Mirror Operation
O(On/Off): Press and hold the button, located
on the lower left side of the mirror face, for about
three seconds to turn the automatic dimming
feature on or off. The indicator light will illuminate
when this feature is active. The automatic dimming
feature is active each time the vehicle is started.
O(On/Off): Press and hold the button, located
on the lower left side of the mirror face, for about
three seconds to turn the automatic dimming
feature on or off. The indicator light will illuminate
when this feature is active. The automatic dimming
feature is active each time the vehicle is started.
Cleaning the Mirror
Compass Operation
When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or
similar material dampened with glass cleaner.
Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror
as that may cause the liquid cleaner to enter
the mirror housing.
Press the on/off button once to turn the compass
on or off.
When the ignition and the compass feature are
on, the compass will show two character boxes
for about two seconds. After two seconds,
the mirror will display the compass heading.
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
with OnStar® and Compass
Compass Calibration
If after two seconds, the display does not show a
compass heading (for example, N for North),
there may be a strong magnetic field interfering
with the compass. Such interference may be
caused by a magnetic antenna mount, magnetic
note pad holder or a similar magnetic item. If
the letter C should ever appear in the compass
window, the compass may need calibration.
Your vehicle may have an automatic dimming
rearview mirror with a compass display. The mirror
also contains OnStar® controls. For more
The mirror includes an eight-point compass display
in the upper right corner of the mirror face.
When on, the compass automatically calibrates as
the vehicle is driven.
128
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The mirror can be calibrated by driving the vehicle
in circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until the
display reads a direction.
The compass can be placed in calibration mode
manually by pressing and holding the on/off button
until a C is shown in the compass display.
Compass Variance
The zone is set to zone eight upon leaving the
factory. It will be necessary to adjust the compass
to compensate for compass variance if you live
outside zone eight. Under certain circumstances,
as during a long distance cross-country trip, it
will be necessary to adjust for compass variance.
Compass variance is the difference between
earth’s magnetic north and true geographic north.
If not adjusted to account for compass variance,
your compass could give false readings.
2. Press and hold the on/off button until a zone
number appears in the display.
3. Once the zone number appears in the display,
press the on/off button quickly until the correct
zone number appears in the display. Stop
pressing the button and the mirror will return
to normal operation. If C appears in the
compass window, the compass may need
calibration. See Compass Calibration
listed previously.
To adjust for compass variance do the following:
1. Find the current location and variance
zone number on the following zone map.
129
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
the position of each mirror. Adjust each mirror so
you can see the side of your vehicle and the
area behind your vehicle. Return the selector
switch to the center position when finished
adjusting. This will prevent unwanted mirror
movement in case the control pad is accidentally
bumped while driving.
Cleaning the Mirror
When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or
similar material dampened with glass cleaner.
Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror
as that may cause the liquid cleaner to enter
the mirror housing.
The preferred mirror positions can be stored with
the memory option. See Memory Seat, Mirrors
Outside Power Heated Mirrors
The power mirror
control is on the driver’s
door armrest and
controls the driver’s
side and passenger’s
side mirrors.
The mirrors can be manually folded inward to
prevent damage when going through car washes
or confined spaces. To fold, push the mirror
toward the vehicle. To return the mirror to its
original position, push outward. Be sure to return
both mirrors to their original unfolded position
before driving.
When the rear window defogger is turned on, both
outside rear view mirrors are heated to help
clear them of ice, snow, or condensation. See
“Rear Window Defogger” under Dual Climate
Move the selector switch left or right to choose the
driver’s side or passenger’s side mirror. Use the
arrows located on the control pad to adjust
130
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror
Outside Parallel Park Assist Mirror
The driver’s side mirror will adjust for the glare
of headlamps behind you. This feature is controlled
by the on and off settings on the automatic
dimming rearview mirror.
This feature assists the driver by improving
rear obstacle detection and is useful in viewing the
curb when parallel parking.
Press the left or right mirror symbol on the
selector control to choose the driver or passenger
outside mirror. When the vehicle is shifted into
REVERSE (R), the selected mirror will tilt to
a factory programmed position. If further mirror
adjustment is needed press the arrows located on
the outside mirror control pad. If the outside
mirror selector switch is in the middle position,
neither outside mirror will move.
Outside Convex Mirror
{CAUTION:
A convex mirror can make things (like
other vehicles) look farther away than
they really are. If you cut too sharply into
the right lane, you could hit a vehicle on
your right. Check your inside mirror or
glance over your shoulder before
changing lanes.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (R),
and a five-second delay has occurred, the
mirror will return to its original position. The delay
prevents movement of the mirror if multiple
gear transitions REVERSE (R) to DRIVE (D) to
REVERSE (R) occur during a parallel parking
maneuver.
The passenger’s side mirror is convex. A convex
mirror’s surface is curved so more can be
seen from the driver’s seat. This mirror does not
have a dimming feature.
131
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OnStar® System
and Conditions are included in the vehicle’s
OnStar® Subscriber glove box literature. For more
information, visit onstar.com or onstar.ca,
contact OnStar® at 1-888-4-ONSTAR
(1-888-466-7827) or TTY 1-877-248-2080, or
press the OnStar® button to speak with an
OnStar® advisor 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.
Not all OnStar® features are available on all
vehicles. To check if your vehicle is equipped to
provide the services described below, or for a
full description of OnStar® services and system
limitations, see the OnStar® Owner’s Guide in your
glove box or visit onstar.com.
OnStar® uses several innovative technologies and
live advisors to provide you with a wide range
of safety, security, information, and convenience
services. If your airbags deploy, the system is
designed to make an automatic call to OnStar®
Emergency advisors who can request emergency
services be sent to your location. If you lock
your keys in the vehicle, call OnStar® at
OnStar® Services
For new vehicles with OnStar®, the Safe & Sound
Plan, or the Directions & Connections® Plan is
included for one year from the date of purchase.
You can extend this plan beyond the first year,
or upgrade to the Directions & Connections® Plan.
For more information, press the OnStar® button
to speak with an advisor. Some OnStar® services
(such as Remote Door Unlock or Stolen Vehicle
Location Assistance) may not be available
until you register with OnStar®.
1-888-4-ONSTAR and they can send a signal to
unlock your doors. If you need roadside
assistance, press the OnStar® button and they
can contact Roadside Service for you.
OnStar® service is provided to you subject to the
OnStar® Terms and Conditions. You may
cancel your OnStar® service at any time by
contacting OnStar® as provided below. A complete
OnStar® Owners Guide and the OnStar® Terms
132
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Available Services with Safe & Sound® Plan
OnStar® Hands-Free Calling
OnStar® Hands-Free Calling allows eligible
OnStar® subscribers to make and receive calls
using voice commands. Hands-Free Calling is fully
integrated into the vehicle, and can be used with
OnStar® Pre-Paid Minute Packages. Hands-Free
Calling may also be linked to a Verizon Wireless
service plan in the U.S. or a Bell Mobility service
plan in Canada, depending on eligibility. To find out
more, refer to the OnStar® Owners Guide in the
vehicle’s glove box, visit www.onstar.com or
www.onstar.ca, or speak with an OnStar® advisor
by pressing the OnStar® button or calling
• Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment
• Advanced Automatic Crash Notification (AACN)
(If equipped)
• Link to Emergency Services
• Roadside Assistance
• Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance
• AccidentAssist
• Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert
• OnStar® Vehicle Diagnostics
• GM Goodwrench® On Demand Diagnostics
• OnStar® Hands-Free Calling with
30 complimentary minutes
• OnStar® Virtual Advisor (U.S. Only)
1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827).
OnStar® Virtual Advisor
OnStar® Virtual Advisor is a feature of OnStar®
Hands-Free Calling that uses your minutes to
access location-based weather, local traffic reports,
and stock quotes. By pressing the phone button
and giving a few simple voice commands, you can
browse through the various topics. See the OnStar®
Owners Guide for more information (Only available
in the continental U.S.).
Available Services included with Directions
& Connections® Plan
• All Safe and Sound Plan Services
• Driving Directions - Advisor delivered or
OnStar® Turn-by-Turn Navigation (If equipped)
• RideAssist
• Information and Convenience Services
133
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OnStar® Steering Wheel Controls
and, in the event of a crash, additional information
regarding the accident that your vehicle has
been involved in (e.g. the direction from which
your vehicle was hit). When you use the Virtual
Advisor feature of OnStar® Hands-Free Calling,
your vehicle also sends OnStar® your GPS
location so that we can provide you with
location-based services.
OnStar® service cannot work unless your vehicle
is in a place where OnStar® has an agreement
with a wireless service provider for service in that
area. OnStar® service also cannot work unless
you are in a place where the wireless service
provider OnStar® has hired for that area
Your vehicle may have a Talk/Mute button that
can be used to interact with OnStar® Hands-Free
page 310 for more information.
On some vehicles, you may have to hold the
button for a few seconds and give the command
“ONSTAR” in order to activate the OnStar®
Hands-Free Calling feature.
On some vehicles, the mute button can be used to
dial numbers into voicemail systems, or to dial
phone extensions. See the OnStar® Owner’s
Guide for more information.
has coverage, network capacity and reception
when the service is needed, and technology that
is compatible with the OnStar® service. Not all
services are available everywhere, particularly in
remote or enclosed areas, or at all times.
OnStar® service that involves location information
about your vehicle cannot work unless GPS
satellite signals are unobstructed and available in
that place as well.
How OnStar® Service Works
In order to provide you with OnStar® services,
your vehicle’s OnStar® system has the capability
of recording and transmitting vehicle information.
This information is automatically sent to an
OnStar® Call Center at the time of an OnStar®
button press, Emergency button press or if
your airbags or AACN system deploys. The vehicle
information usually includes your GPS location
134
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your vehicle must have a working electrical
system (including adequate battery power) for the
OnStar® equipment to operate. There are other
problems OnStar® cannot control that may prevent
OnStar® from providing OnStar® service to you
at any particular time or place. Some examples are
damage to important parts of your vehicle in an
accident, hills, tall buildings, tunnels, weather
or wireless phone network congestion.
Universal Home Remote
System
Universal Home Remote System
(With Three Round LED)
The Universal Home Remote System provides a
way to replace up to three hand-held
radio-frequency (RF) transmitters used to activate
devices such as garage door openers, security
systems, and home lighting.
Your Responsibility
You may need to increase the volume of your
radio to hear the OnStar® advisor. If the light next
to the OnStar® buttons is red, this means that
your system is not functioning properly and should
be checked by a dealer. If the light appears
clear (no light is appearing), your OnStar®
subscription has expired. You can always press
the OnStar® button to confirm that your OnStar®
equipment is active.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference.
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
The FCC Grant of Equipment Authorization
Certificate number is KOBGTV06A.
135
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference.
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
The Canadian Registration ID number is
3521A-GTV06A.
The FCC Grant of Equipment Authorization
Certificate number is CB2SAHL3.
Changes or modifications to this system by other
than an authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
Universal Home Remote System
(With One Triangular LED)
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
The Universal Home Remote System provides a
way to replace up to three hand-held
radio-frequency (RF) transmitters used to activate
devices such as garage door openers, security
systems, and home lighting.
The Canadian Registration ID number is
2791021849A.
Changes or modifications to this system by other
than an authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
136
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This system provides a way to replace up to three
remote control transmitters used to activate
devices such as garage door openers, security
systems, and home lighting.
Universal Home Remote System
Operation (With Three Round LED)
Do not use this system with any garage door
opener that does not have the stop and reverse
feature. This includes any garage door opener
model manufactured before April 1, 1982.
Read the instructions completely before attempting
to program the transmitter. Because of the steps
involved, it may be helpful to have another
person available to assist you in programming the
transmitter.
Your vehicle may have the Universal Home Remote
System. If there are three round Light Emitting
Diode (LED) under the Universal Home Remote
System buttons, follow the instructions below. If
there is one triangular LED next to the Universal
Home Remote System buttons, follow the
Be sure to keep the original remote control
transmitter for use in other vehicles, as well as,
for future programming. You only need the
original remote control transmitter for fixed code
programming. It is also recommended that upon
the sale or lease termination of the vehicle,
instructions under Universal Home Remote System
Operation (with one triangular LED).
137
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
the programmed buttons should be erased for
security purposes. See “Erasing your Universal
Home Remote Buttons” later in this section.
If you do not know if your garage door opener is a
fixed code or rolling code device, open your
garage door opener’s remote control battery cover.
Your garage door opener is a fixed code device
if there is a panel of switches. If not, your
Be sure that people and objects are clear of the
garage door or security device you are
programming. When programming a garage door,
it is advised to park outside of the garage.
garage door opener is a rolling code device.
Programming Universal Home
Remote — Fixed Code
Fixed Code garage door openers are used for
garage doors produced prior to 1996. Fixed code
uses the same coded signal every time, which
is manually programmed by setting DIP switches
for a unique personal code.
138
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Follow these steps to program up to three
channels:
3. Enter these positions into the Universal Home
Remote System as follows.
Press and release all three buttons at the same
time to put the device into programming mode.
1. Remove the battery cover of the hand-held
transmitter.
Example of Switch Settings
4. The indicator light will blink slowly. In order
from left to right, and within two and
2. Write down the eight to 12 coding switch
settings from left to right. When the switch
is in the up position, write “on,” and when a
switch is in the down position, write “off”.
If a switch is set between the up and down
position, write “middle”.
one-half minutes, enter each switch setting
into the Universal Home Remote System.
Push one button for each switch as follows:
• Left button = “on” switch position.
• Right button = “off” switch position.
• Middle button = “middle” switch position.
139
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. After entering the switch settings, press and
release all three buttons at the same time.
The indicator lights will turn on.
Programming Universal Home
Remote — Rolling Code
Rolling code garage door openers are used for
garage doors produced after 1996 and are
code protected. Rolling code means the coded
signal is changed every time your remote control
garage door opener is used.
6. Press and hold the button you would like to
use to control the garage door until the
garage door moves. The indicator light above
the selected button should slowly blink.
You may need to hold the button from five to
55 seconds.
Programming a rolling code garage door opener
involves time-sensitive actions, so read the
entire procedure before you begin. If you do not
follow these actions, the device will time out
and you will have to repeat the procedure.
7. Immediately release the button when the
garage door moves. The indicator light will
blink rapidly until programming is complete.
8. Press and release the button again. The
garage door should move, confirming that
programming is successful and complete.
To program another device such as an additional
garage door opener, a security device, or
home lighting, repeat Steps 1–8, choosing a
different function button in Step 6 than what you
used for the garage door opener.
140
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Follow these steps to program up to three
channels:
After pressing the “learn” button, you have
10 to 30 seconds to complete Step 4
depending on your garage control unit. If you
cannot locate the “learn” button, refer to
the owners guide for your garage door opener.
1. Press the two outside buttons at the same
time for one to two seconds, and immediately
release them.
3. Press and hold the button you would like
to use to control the garage door until the
garage door moves. The indicator light, above
the selected button, should slowly blink.
You may need to hold the button from five to
20 seconds.
4. Immediately release the button when the
garage door moves. The indicator light will
blink rapidly until programming is complete.
5. Press and release the button again. The
garage door should move, confirming that
programming is successful and complete.
To program another device such as an additional
garage door opener, a security device, or
home lighting, repeat Steps 1–5, choosing a
different function button in Step 3 than what you
used for the garage door opener.
2. Go to the garage. Locate the garage door
motor head and press and release the
“learn” button.
141
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Universal Home Remote
Universal Home Remote System
Operation (With One Triangular LED)
Press and hold the appropriate button for at least
half of a second. The indicator light will come
on while the signal is being transmitted.
Reprogramming Universal Home
Remote Buttons
You can reprogram any of the three buttons by
repeating the instructions.
Your vehicle may have the Universal Home
Remote System. If there is one triangular Light
Emitting Diode (LED) next to the Universal Home
Remote buttons, follow the instructions below.
If your vehicle has three round LED under
the Universal Home Remote buttons, follow the
instructions under Universal Home Remote System
Operation (With three round LED).
Erasing Universal Home Remote
Buttons
You should erase the programmed buttons when
you sell or terminate your lease.
To erase either rolling code or fixed code on the
Universal Home Remote device, do the following:
1. Press and hold the two outside buttons at
the same time for approximately 20 seconds,
until the indicator lights, located directly
above the buttons, begin to blink rapidly.
Do not use the Universal Home Remote with any
garage door opener that does not have the stop
and reverse feature. This includes any garage door
opener model manufactured before April 1, 1982.
If you have a newer garage door opener with rolling
codes, please be sure to follow Steps 6 through 8
to complete the programming of your Universal
Home Remote Transmitter.
2. Once the indicator lights begin to blink,
release both buttons. The codes from all
buttons will be erased.
142
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Read the instructions completely before attempting
to program the Universal Home Remote.
Because of the steps involved, it may be helpful to
have another person available to assist you in
the programming steps.
Programming Universal Home Remote
Follow these steps to program up to three
channels:
1. Press and hold down the two outside
Universal Home Remote buttons, releasing
only when the Universal Home Remote
indicator light begins to flash, after
Keep the original hand-held transmitter for use in
other vehicles as well as for future Universal
Home Remote programming. It is also
recommended that upon the sale of the vehicle,
the programmed Universal Home Remote buttons
should be erased for security purposes. See
“Erasing Universal Home Remote Buttons” later in
this section or, for assistance, see Customer
20 seconds. Do not hold down the buttons for
longer than 30 seconds and do not repeat
this step to program a second and/or
third hand-held transmitter to the remaining
two Universal Home Remote buttons.
2. Position the end of your hand-held transmitter
about 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the
Universal Home Remote buttons while
keeping the indicator light in view.
Be sure that people and objects are clear of the
garage door or gate operator you are
programming. When programming a garage door,
it is advised to park outside of the garage.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the
desired Universal Home Remote button
and the hand-held transmitter button. Do not
release the buttons until Step 4 has been
completed.
It is recommended that a new battery be installed
in your hand-held transmitter for quicker and
more accurate transmission of the radio-frequency
signal.
Some entry gates and garage door openers
may require you to substitute Step 3 with
the procedure noted in “Gate Operator and
Canadian Programming” later in this section.
143
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. The indicator light will flash slowly at first and
then rapidly after Universal Home Remote
successfully receives the frequency signal
from the hand-held transmitter. Release both
buttons.
6. Locate in the garage, the garage door opener
receiver (motor-head unit). Locate the “Learn”
or “Smart” button. This can usually be
found where the hanging antenna wire is
attached to the motor-head unit.
5. Press and hold the newly-trained Universal
Home Remote button and observe the
indicator light.
7. Firmly press and release the “Learn” or
“Smart” button. The name and color of
the button may vary by manufacturer.
If the indicator light stays on continuously,
programming is complete and your device
should activate when the Universal Home
Remote button is pressed and released.
To program the remaining two Universal Home
Remote buttons, begin with Step 2 under
“Programming Universal Home Remote.” Do
not repeat Step 1 as this will erase all of
the programmed channels.
You will have 30 seconds to start Step 8.
8. Return to the vehicle. Firmly press and hold
the programmed Universal Home Remote
button for two seconds, then release it.
Immediately press and hold the same button
a second time for two seconds, then
release it. Immediately, press and hold the
same button a third time for two seconds, then
release.
If the indicator light blinks rapidly for
two seconds and then turns to a constant
light, continue with Steps 6 through 8 following
to complete the programming of a rolling-code
device, most commonly, a garage door
opener.
The Universal Home Remote should now
activate the rolling-code device.
To program the remaining two Universal Home
Remote buttons, begin with Step 2 of
“Programming Universal Home Remote.” You do
not want to repeat Step 1, as this will erase
all previous programming from the Universal Home
Remote buttons.
144
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Gate Operator and Canadian
Programming
Using Universal Home Remote
Press and hold the appropriate Universal Home
Remote button for at least half of a second.
The indicator light will come on while the signal is
being transmitted.
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter
signals to time out or quit after several seconds
of transmission. This may not be long enough
for Universal Home Remote to pick up the signal
during programming. Similarly, some U.S. gate
operators are manufactured to time out in
the same manner.
Erasing Universal Home Remote
Buttons
To erase programming from the three Universal
Home Remote buttons do the following:
If you live in Canada, or you are having difficulty
programming a gate operator or garage door
opener by using the “Programming Universal
Home Remote” procedures, regardless of where
you live, replace Step 3 under “Programming
Universal Home Remote” with the following:
1. Press and hold down the two outside buttons
until the indicator light begins to flash, after
20 seconds. Do not hold the two outside
buttons for longer than 30 seconds.
2. Release both buttons.
Continue to press and hold the Universal Home
Remote button while you press and release every
two seconds (cycle) the hand-held transmitter
button until the frequency signal has been
successfully accepted by the Universal Home
Remote. The Universal Home Remote indicator
light will flash slowly at first and then rapidly.
Proceed with Step 4 under “Programming
Universal Home Remote” to complete.
The Universal Home Remote is now in the training
(learning) mode and can be programmed at any
time beginning with Step 2 under “Programming
Universal Home Remote” shown earlier in
this section.
Individual buttons cannot be erased, but they can
be reprogrammed. See “Reprogramming a
Single Universal Home Remote Button” following
this section.
145
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reprogramming a Single Universal
Home Remote Button
Cupholder(s)
Your vehicle has two cupholders in the center
console area.
To program a device to Universal Home Remote
using a Universal Home Remote button
previously trained, follow these steps:
Center Console Storage Area
1. Press and hold the desired Universal Home
Remote button. Do not release the button.
Your vehicle has a center console storage area
located between the front seats. It includes storage
areas, and accessory power outlet(s) on the
rear of the console.
2. The indicator light will begin to flash after
20 seconds. While still holding the Universal
Home Remote button, proceed with
Step 2 under “Programming Universal Home
Remote” shown earlier in this section.
Convenience Net
Your vehicle may have a tie down strap and
convenience net. The convenience net attaches to
the floor or back wall of the rear of the vehicle
using six anchor points. The net can be used like
a hammock across the rear of the vehicle or
hooked on the floor. Put small loads, like grocery
bags, behind the net. It can help keep them
from falling over during sharp turns or quick starts
and stops.
For additional information on Universal Home
Remote, see Customer Assistance Offices
on page 529.
Storage Areas
Glove Box
To open the glove box, lift up on the lever.
The glove box has a light inside.
The net is not for larger, heavier loads. Store them
in the rear of the vehicle as far forward as you can.
146
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
in either direction, to stop the movement. If the
sunshade is in the closed position, it will open with
the sunroof, or it can be opened manually.
Sunroof
If your vehicle has a
power sunroof, the
switches are located on
the overhead console.
Vent Open: To open the power sunroof to the
vent position from the closed position, press and
hold the passenger’s side sunroof switch forward.
The rear of the sunroof panel will tilt upward to
the full vent position. The sunshade must be
opened manually.
Express Close: The express close feature will
operate from the open or partially open position.
To express close the power sunroof, fully press the
driver’s side switch forward once. To stop the
sunroof glass in a desired position other
than closed, press the switch again in either
direction. The sunshade must be closed manually.
To open or close the sunroof, the ignition must be
on or Retained Accessory Power (RAP) must
be active. See Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
on page 112.
Close: To close the power sunroof, operate the
controls according to one of the following:
• From the open position, press and hold the
driver’s side sunroof switch forward. The
sunshade must be closed manually.
Express Open: The express open feature will
operate from the closed or partially open position.
To express open the power sunroof, fully press
the driver’s side switch rearward once. To stop the
sunroof glass in a desired position other than to
the express-open position, press the switch again,
• From the vent position, press and hold the
passenger’s side sunroof switch rearward.
147
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Anti-Pinch: If an object is in the path of the
sunroof while it is closing, the anti-pinch feature
will detect the object and stop the sunroof
from closing at the point of the obstruction. The
sunroof will then return to the full-open or
vent position. To close the sunroof once it has
re-opened, refer to the two options previously
described under the “Close” feature instructions.
that is always on. You cannot turn the automatic
door locking feature off. See Programmable
Some vehicles have additional features that can
be programmed including the seat, steering
column, and outside rearview mirror position.
If your vehicle has the base audio system,
the following information explains the vehicle
personalization on your vehicle.
Vehicle Personalization
If your vehicle has the Navigation system, see
“Personalization” in the Index of the Navigation
System manual for information on vehicle
personalization.
Your vehicle has personalization that allows you to
program certain features to a preferred setting
for up to two drivers. The back of the keyless
access transmitters are labelled 1 or 2. Additional
keyless access transmitters programmed to
the vehicle, as 3 and/or 4, do not have a number
on the back and are not capable of being
personalized. The number of programmable
features varies depending upon which vehicle
options are purchased.
If your vehicle has the ability to program additional
personalization features, the driver’s preferences
are recalled by pressing any button on the keyless
access transmitter, 1 or 2, by selecting
Driver 1 or 2 on the radio display, or when a valid
keyless access transmitter is detected upon
opening the driver’s door.
On all vehicles, features such as climate control
settings, radio and XM™ preset settings, exterior
lighting at unlock and remote lock unlock
confirmation, and language have already been
programmed for your convenience. Your vehicle
also has an automatic door locking feature
If more than one valid keyless access transmitter
is detected upon opening the driver’s door, the
driver preferences for the lowest driver number will
be recalled.
148
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Certain features can be programmed not to recall
until the ignition is turned off.
5. Turn the tune/select knob and scroll to
SETUP.
6. Press the tune/select knob to enter the
SETUP menu.
To change feature preferences, use the following
procedure.
7. Turn the tune/select knob and scroll to
PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU, then
Entering the Personal Settings Menu
To enter the feature programming mode, use
the following procedure:
press the tune/select knob to turn the feature
on. A check mark appears after this
selection when it is turned on and the entire
list of personalization features will appear.
1. Be sure the ignition is either on, in Acc., or in
RAP and place the transmission in PARK (P)
or make sure that the vehicle speed is
less than 6 mph (9 km/h).
8. Turn the tune/select knob and scroll to the
feature you want to change, then press the
tune/select knob to turn the feature on or off. If
the feature is turned on, a check mark will
appear next to the feature name.
To avoid excessive drain on the battery, it is
recommended that the headlamps are
turned off.
Some features have submenus that show
additional features that can be turned on or off.
After entering a submenu, turn the tune/select
knob and scroll to the feature you want to
change, then press the tune/select knob
to turn the feature on or off.
2. Press any button on the appropriate keyless
access transmitter to identify yourself as
Driver 1 or Driver 2.
3. Turn on the radio by pressing the
power/volume knob.
4. Press the CNFG radio button or the
tune/select knob located on the right side of
the radio to enter the radio’s main menu.
149
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To turn the driver greeting feature on and to
program a customized name or greeting, use the
following procedure:
Personal Settings Menu Items
The PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU must be
selected with a check mark to program the
personalization features. If it is not selected, press
the tune/select knob until the check mark
appears. If it is selected, the entire list of features
will be available to program.
1. Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by
following the instructions listed previously
under “Entering the Personal Settings Menu.”
2. Turn the tune/select knob until DRIVER
GREETING is highlighted.
DRIVER GREETING
3. Press the tune/select knob to turn on the
DRIVER GREETING feature.
This feature allows you to type in a customized
name or greeting that will appear on the display
whenever the corresponding keyless access
transmitter, 1 or 2, is used or Driver 1 or Driver 2
is selected on the radio display.
You will see a cursor on the screen.
4. Turn the tune/select knob until you reach the
first letter you want; the letter will be
highlighted. There is a complete alphabet with
both upper and lower case letters and the
numbers zero through nine. Also included are
spaces and other non-letter characters
such as the ampersand (&).
If a customized name or greeting is not
programmed, the system will show Driver 1 or
Driver 2 to correspond with the numbers on
the back of the keyless access transmitters. In this
case, the customized driver greeting feature is
factory shipped as off.
150
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Press the tune/select knob once to select the
letter. The letter will then appear on the display
and the cursor will advance to the next letter.
To turn off the customized driver greeting, and go
back to displaying either Driver 1 or Driver 2,
use the following procedure:
If you make a mistake, press the F5 button,
located on the radio, repeatedly to cycle back
through all of the characters until you reach
the character you wish to change. Then
turn the tune/select knob until the letter you
want is highlighted and press the tune/select
knob to select the new letter.
1. Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by
following the instructions listed previously
under “Entering the Personal Settings Menu.”
2. Turn the tune/select knob until DRIVER
GREETING is highlighted.
3. Press the tune/select knob to turn on the
DRIVER GREETING feature. The check
mark will be cleared and the customized driver
greeting is off.
6. Repeat Steps 4 and 5 until the name or
greeting you want is complete. You can
program up to 16 characters.
The only way to correct a customized driver
greeting once you have exited the screen to spell
the name, is to turn the driver greeting feature
off, and then turn it back on.
The name or greeting you programmed is now
set. You can either exit the programming mode by
following the instructions later in this section or
program the next feature available on your vehicle
by pressing the F6 (BACK) button, located on
the radio, to return to the PERSONAL SETTINGS
MENU. You will now see a check mark next to
the driver greeting menu item, which means that
the driver greeting feature is on and a customized
driver greeting is being used.
151
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Press the tune/select knob to switch back and
forth between on and off.
KEY FOB REMINDER
This feature chirps the horn three times when the
driver’s door is closed and there is a keyless
access transmitter left inside of the vehicle. This
will only occur when the vehicle is off.
When the mode is turned on, a check mark
will appear next to the feature name.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either
exit the programming mode by following the
instructions later in this section or program the
next feature available on your vehicle.
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: ON
Mode 2: OFF
REMOTE START
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory,
it was programmed to Mode 1. The mode to
which the vehicle was programmed may have
been changed since it left the factory.
If your vehicle has this feature, it allows you to
choose the features you would like to have
activated when you engage the remote start on
your vehicle. These features include the climate
control system, the rear defogger, and the
seat temperature, if your vehicle has this feature.
Activating these features helps provide a more
comfortable vehicle upon entry. See “Remote
Vehicle Start” under Keyless Access System
To program the vehicle to a different mode, use
the following procedure:
1. Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by
following the instructions listed previously
under “Entering the Personal Settings Menu.”
2. Turn the tune/select knob until KEY FOB
REMINDER is highlighted.
152
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: ON
CLIMATE CONTROL: The climate control system
will engage when the vehicle is started using
the remote start feature. It will be at the same
climate control setting that was last used by the
driver using that keyless entry transmitter.
Mode 2: OFF
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory,
it was programmed to Mode 1. The mode to
which the vehicle was programmed may have
been changed since it left the factory.
REAR WINDOW DEFOG: If this feature is active,
the rear defogger will engage when the vehicle
is started using the remote start feature.
To program the vehicle to a different mode, use
the following procedure:
SEAT TEMP (Temperature) CONTROL: If your
vehicle has this feature and this feature is
active, the seats will be heated or cooled when
the vehicle is started using the remote start
feature.
1. Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by
following the instructions listed previously
under “Entering the Personal Settings Menu.”
The mode you selected is now set. You can either
exit the programming mode by following the
instructions later in this section or program the
next feature available on your vehicle by pressing
the F6 (BACK) button, located on the radio, to
return to the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU.
2. Turn the tune/select knob until REMOTE
START is highlighted.
3. Press the tune/select knob to switch back and
forth between on and off.
When REMOTE START is on, a check mark will
appear next to the feature name. You can
then choose to activate any or all of the following
features by turning the tune/select knob to
highlight the feature, then pressing the knob to
turn it on.
153
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Press the tune/select knob to switch back and
forth between on and off.
REMOTE RECALL MEMORY
If your vehicle has the optional memory package,
you will have this feature. When this feature is
turned on, you can recall any previously
programmed seat position and mirror position
when the unlock button on the keyless access
transmitter is pressed.
When the mode is turned on, a check mark
will appear next to the feature name.
If this feature is selected, START BUTTON
RECALL cannot be selected.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either
exit the programming mode by following the
instructions later in this section or program the
next feature available on your vehicle.
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: ON
Mode 2: OFF
START BUTTON RECALL
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory,
it was programmed to Mode 2 with the exception
of recall seat to driver position which is on.
The mode to which the vehicle was programmed
may have been changed since it left the factory.
If your vehicle has the optional memory package,
you will have this feature. When this feature is
turned on, you can recall any previously
programmed seat, mirror, and steering column
position when the start button on the ignition
is pressed.
To program the vehicle to a different mode,
use the following procedure:
1. Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by
following the instructions listed previously
under “Entering the Personal Settings Menu.”
2. Turn the tune/select knob until REMOTE
RECALL MEMORY is highlighted.
154
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: ON
The mode you selected is now set. You can either
exit the programming mode by following the
instructions later in this section or program the
next feature available on your vehicle.
Mode 2: OFF
AUTO EXIT SEAT
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory,
it was programmed to Mode 2. The mode to
which the vehicle was programmed may have
been changed since it left the factory.
If your vehicle has the optional memory package,
you will have this feature. When this feature is
turned on, you can recall any previously
programmed exit position for the driver’s seat
when the vehicle is off, the shift lever is in
PARK (P), and the driver’s door is opened.
To program the vehicle to a different mode, use
the following procedure:
1. Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by
following the instructions listed previously
under “Entering the Personal Settings Menu.”
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: ON
2. Turn the tune/select knob until START
BUTTON RECALL is highlighted.
Mode 2: OFF
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory,
it was programmed to Mode 2. The mode to
which the vehicle was programmed may have
been changed since it left the factory.
3. Press the tune/select knob to switch back and
forth between on and off.
When the mode is turned on, a check mark
will appear next to the feature name.
If this feature is selected, REMOTE RECALL
MEMORY cannot be selected.
155
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To program the vehicle to a different mode, use
the following procedure:
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: ON
1. Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by
following the instructions listed previously
under “Entering the Personal Settings Menu.”
Mode 2: OFF
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory,
it was programmed to Mode 2. The mode to
which the vehicle was programmed may have
been changed since it left the factory.
2. Turn the tune/select knob until AUTO EXIT
SEAT is highlighted.
3. Press the tune/select knob to switch back and
forth between on and off.
To program the vehicle to a different mode, use
the following procedure:
When the mode is turned on, a check mark will
appear in the box next to the feature name.
1. Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by
following the instructions listed previously
under “Entering the Personal Settings Menu.”
The mode you selected is now set. You can either
exit the programming mode by following the
instructions later in this section or program the
next feature available on your vehicle.
2. Turn the tune/select knob until AUTO EXIT
COLUMN is highlighted.
3. Press the tune/select knob to switch back and
forth between on and off.
AUTO EXIT COLUMN
If your vehicle has the optional memory package,
you will have this feature. When this feature is
turned on, you can recall any previously
When the mode is turned on, a check mark will
appear in the box next to the feature name.
programmed exit position for the steering column
when the vehicle is off, the shift lever is in
PARK (P), and the driver’s door is opened.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either
exit the programming mode by following the
instructions later in this section or program the
next feature available on your vehicle.
156
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To program the vehicle to a different mode, use
the following procedure:
LIGHTS FLASH AT UNLOCK
This feature allows the exterior lamps to flash
when the keyless access transmitter is used
to unlock the vehicle. All doors must be closed for
this feature to work, and the lamps will not
flash if the parking lamps or headlamps are on.
1. Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by
following the instructions listed previously
under “Entering the Personal Settings Menu.”
2. Turn the tune/select knob until LIGHTS
FLASH AT UNLOCK is highlighted.
If LIGHTS FLASH AT UNLOCK is turned on
and either KEYLESS FT DOOR UNLOCK
or KEYLESS DOORS UNLOCK is turned on, the
exterior lamps will flash when the doors are
passively unlocked. See “KEYLESS FT (Front)
DOOR UNLOCK” and “KEYLESS DOORS
UNLOCK” later in this section for more information.
3. Press the tune/select knob to switch back and
forth between on and off.
When the mode is turned on, a check mark
will appear next to the feature name.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either
exit the programming mode by following the
instructions later in this section or program the
next feature available on your vehicle.
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: ON
Mode 2: OFF
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory,
it was programmed to Mode 1. The mode to
which the vehicle was programmed may have
been changed since it left the factory.
157
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To program the vehicle to a different mode, use
the following procedure:
LIGHTS FLASH AT LOCK
This feature allows the exterior lamps to flash
once when the keyless access transmitter is used
to lock the vehicle. All doors must be closed for
this feature to work, and the lamps will not flash if
the parking lamps or headlamps are on.
1. Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by
following the instructions listed previously
under “Entering the Personal Settings Menu.”
2. Turn the tune/select knob until LIGHTS
FLASH AT LOCK is highlighted.
If LIGHTS FLASH AT LOCK is turned on and
either KEYLESS FT DOOR UNLOCK or KEYLESS
DOORS UNLOCK is turned on, the exterior
lamps will flash when the doors are passively
unlocked. See “KEYLESS FT (Front) DOOR
UNLOCK” and “KEYLESS DOORS UNLOCK” later
in this section for more information.
3. Press the tune/select knob to switch back and
forth between on and off.
When the mode is turned on, a check mark
will appear next to the feature name.
You can select this feature by itself, or you can
combine it with Horn Chirps At Lock so that
both the exterior lamps flash and the horn chirps
when you lock your vehicle.
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: ON
The mode you selected is now set. You can either
exit the programming mode by following the
instructions later in this section or program the
next feature available on your vehicle.
Mode 2: OFF
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory,
it was programmed to Mode 1. The mode to
which the vehicle was programmed may have
been changed since it left the factory.
158
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Press the tune/select knob to switch back and
forth between on and off.
EXT. (Exterior) LIGHTS AT UNLOCK
This feature turns on the exterior lamps when the
keyless access transmitter is used to unlock
the vehicle. The lamps will remain on for about
20 seconds unless a door is opened, the ignition is
in Acc., on, or START, or the keyless access
transmitter is used to lock the vehicle.
When the mode is turned on, a check mark
will appear next to the feature name.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either
exit the programming mode by following the
instructions later in this section or program the
next feature available on your vehicle.
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: ON
HORN CHIRPS AT LOCK
This feature sounds the horn once when the
keyless access transmitter is used to lock
the vehicle. All doors must be closed for this
feature to work.
Mode 2: OFF
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory,
it was programmed to Mode 1. The mode to
which the vehicle was programmed may have
been changed since it left the factory.
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: ON
To program the vehicle to a different mode, use
the following procedure:
Mode 2: OFF
1. Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by
following the instructions listed previously
under “Entering the Personal Settings Menu.”
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory,
it was programmed to Mode 2. The mode to
which the vehicle was programmed may have
been changed since it left the factory.
2. Turn the tune/select knob until EXT. LIGHTS
AT UNLOCK is highlighted.
159
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To program the vehicle to a different mode, use
the following procedure:
TWILIGHT DELAY
This feature allows you to set the amount of time
you want the exterior lamps to remain on after
you exit the vehicle.
1. Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by
following the instructions listed previously
under “Entering the Personal Settings Menu.”
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: 0:00 seconds (off)
Mode 2: 0:05 seconds
Mode 3: 0:15 seconds
Mode 4: 0:30 seconds
Mode 5: 1:30 minutes
Mode 6: 2:00 minutes
Mode 7: 3:00 minutes
Mode 8: 4:00 minutes
2. Turn the tune/select knob until HORN CHIRPS
AT LOCK is highlighted.
3. Press the tune/select knob to switch back and
forth between on and off.
When the mode is turned on, a check mark
will appear next to the feature name.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either
exit the programming mode by following the
instructions later in this section or program the
next feature available on your vehicle.
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory,
it was programmed to Mode 2. The mode to
which the vehicle was programmed may have
been changed since the vehicle left the factory.
160
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To determine the mode to which the vehicle is
programmed or to program the vehicle to a
different mode, use the following procedure:
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: ON
Mode 2: OFF
1. Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by
following the instructions listed previously
under “Entering the Personal Settings Menu.”
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory,
it was programmed to Mode 2. The mode to
which the vehicle was programmed may have
been changed since it left the factory.
2. Turn the tune/select knob until TWILIGHT
DELAY is highlighted.
3. Press the tune/select knob to scroll through
the available delay settings and set your
selection.
To program the vehicle to a different mode, use
the following procedure:
1. Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by
following the instructions listed previously
under “Entering the Personal Settings Menu.”
If you choose Mode 1, the exterior lamps will
not illuminate when you exit the vehicle.
Only one mode can be selected at a time.
2. Turn the tune/select knob until DRIVER
UNLOCK AT OFF is highlighted.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either
exit the programming mode by following the
instructions later in this section or program the
next feature available on your vehicle.
3. Press the tune/select knob to switch between
on and off.
When the mode is turned on, a check mark
will appear next to the feature name.
DRIVER UNLOCK AT OFF
This feature allows the driver’s door to
automatically unlock when the ignition is
turned off.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either
exit the programming mode by following the
instructions later in this section or program the
next feature available on your vehicle.
161
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either
exit the programming mode by following the
instructions later in this section or program the
next feature available on your vehicle.
DOORS UNLOCK AT OFF
This feature allows all of the doors to automatically
unlock when the ignition is turned off.
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: ON
DRIVER UNLOCK IN PARK
The feature allows the driver’s door to
automatically unlock when the transmission is
shifted into PARK (P).
Mode 2: OFF
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory,
it was programmed to Mode 2. The mode to
which the vehicle was programmed may have
been changed since it left the factory.
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: ON
Mode 2: OFF
To program the vehicle to a different mode, use
the following procedure:
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory,
it was programmed to Mode 2. The mode to
which the vehicle was programmed may have
been changed since it left the factory.
1. Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by
following the instructions listed previously
under “Entering the Personal Settings Menu.”
To program the vehicle to a different mode, use
the following procedure:
2. Turn the tune/select knob until DOORS
UNLOCK AT OFF is highlighted.
1. Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by
following the instructions listed previously
under “Entering the Personal Settings Menu.”
3. Press the tune/select knob to switch between
on and off.
When the mode is turned on, a check mark
will appear next to the feature name.
2. Turn the tune/select knob until DRIVER
UNLOCK IN PARK is highlighted.
162
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Press the tune/select knob to switch back and
forth between on and off.
To program the vehicle to a different mode, use
the following procedure:
When the mode is turned on, a check mark
will appear next to the feature name.
1. Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by
following the instructions listed previously
under “Entering the Personal Settings Menu.”
The mode you selected is now set. You can either
exit the programming mode by following the
instructions later in this section or program the
next feature available on your vehicle.
2. Turn the tune/select knob until DOORS
UNLOCK IN PARK is highlighted.
3. Press the tune/select knob to switch back and
forth between on and off.
DOORS UNLOCK IN PARK
When the mode is turned on, a check mark
will appear next to the feature name.
The feature allows all of the doors to automatically
unlock when the transmission is shifted into
PARK (P).
The mode you selected is now set. You can either
exit the programming mode by following the
instructions later in this section or program the
next feature available on your vehicle.
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: ON
Mode 2: OFF
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory,
it was programmed to Mode 1. The mode to
which the vehicle was programmed may have
been changed since it left the factory.
163
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Press the tune/select knob to switch back and
forth between on and off.
KEYLESS FT (Front) DOOR UNLOCK
This feature automatically unlocks the appropriate
front door when you approach the vehicle with
your keyless access transmitter and pull the
page 98 for more information.
When the mode is turned on, a check mark
will appear next to the feature name.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either
exit the programming mode by following the
instructions later in this section or program the
next feature available on your vehicle.
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: ON
KEYLESS DOORS UNLOCK
Mode 2: OFF
This feature automatically unlocks all of the doors
when you approach the vehicle with your
keyless access transmitter and pull either front
information.
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory,
it was programmed to Mode 2. The mode to
which the vehicle was programmed may have
been changed since it left the factory.
To program the vehicle to a different mode, use
the following procedure:
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: ON
1. Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by
following the instructions listed previously
under “Entering the Personal Settings Menu.”
Mode 2: OFF
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory,
it was programmed to Mode 1. The mode to
which the vehicle was programmed may have
been changed since it left the factory.
2. Turn the tune/select knob until KEYLESS FT
DOOR UNLOCK is highlighted.
164
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To program the vehicle to a different mode, use
the following procedure:
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: ON
1. Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by
following the instructions listed previously
under “Entering the Personal Settings Menu.”
Mode 2: OFF
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory,
it was programmed to Mode 1. The mode to
which the vehicle was programmed may have
been changed since it left the factory.
2. Turn the tune/select knob until KEYLESS
DOORS UNLOCK is highlighted.
3. Press the tune/select knob to switch back and
forth between on and off.
To program the vehicle to a different mode, use
the following procedure:
When the mode is turned on, a check mark
will appear next to the feature name.
1. Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by
following the instructions listed previously
under “Entering the Personal Settings Menu.”
The mode you selected is now set. You can either
exit the programming mode by following the
instructions later in this section or program the
next feature available on your vehicle.
2. Turn the tune/select knob until LOCK DELAY
is highlighted.
3. Press the tune/select knob to switch back and
forth between on and off.
LOCK DELAY
This feature delays the locking of the vehicle’s
doors for eight seconds after a power door
lock switch or the lock button on the keyless
access transmitter is pressed. The eight second
delay occurs after the last door is closed. If
the keyless access transmitter is left inside of the
vehicle, the doors will not lock.
When the mode is turned on, a check mark
will appear next to the feature name.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either
exit the programming mode by following the
instructions later in this section or program the
next feature available on your vehicle.
165
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: ON
KEYLESS LOCK DELAY
This feature allows you to select whether the
doors automatically lock during normal vehicle exit.
When the ignition is turned off and all doors
become closed, the vehicle will determine how
many keyless access transmitters remain in
the vehicle interior. If at least one keyless access
transmitter has been removed from the interior
of the vehicle, the doors will lock after 10 seconds.
Mode 2: OFF
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory,
it was programmed to Mode 2. The mode to
which the vehicle was programmed may have
been changed since it left the factory.
To program the vehicle to a different mode, use
the following procedure:
For example, if there are two keyless access
transmitters in the vehicle and one is removed, the
other will be locked in. The keyless access
transmitter locked in the vehicle can still be used
to start the vehicle or unlock the doors, if
needed. A person approaching the outside of the
locked vehicle without an authorized keyless
access transmitter, however, will not be able to
open the door, even with a transmitter in the
vehicle.
1. Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by
following the instructions listed previously
under “Entering the Personal Settings Menu.”
2. Turn the tune/select knob until KEYLESS
LOCK DELAY is highlighted.
3. Press the tune/select knob to switch back and
forth between on and off.
When the mode is turned on, a check mark
will appear next to the feature name.
You may temporarily disable the passive door
locking feature by pressing the door unlock switch
for three seconds on an open door. Passive
door locking will then remain disabled until a door
lock switch is pressed or until the power mode
transitions from the off power mode.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either
exit the programming mode by following the
instructions later in this section or program the
next feature available on your vehicle.
166
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Turn the tune/select knob until FRONT PASS
WINDOW LOCK is highlighted.
FRONT PASS (Passenger) WINDOW LOCK
This feature allows you to choose whether or
not to have the front passenger window
deactivated as part of the window lockout button.
If you would like the front passenger window
to be deactivated when the window lockout button
is pushed, turn this feature on. If this feature is
left off, the window lockout button located on the
door will deactivate only the rear windows.
information.
3. Press the tune/select knob to switch back and
forth between on and off.
When the mode is turned on, a check mark
will appear next to the feature name.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either
exit the programming mode by following the
instructions later in this section or program the
next feature available on your vehicle.
CHIME VOLUME HIGH
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: ON
This feature allows you to adjust the volume level
of the vehicle’s warning chimes. The chime
volume cannot be turned off, only adjusted.
Mode 2: OFF
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: NORMAL
Mode 2: HIGH
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory,
it was programmed to Mode 2. The mode to
which the vehicle was programmed may have
been changed since it left the factory.
To program the vehicle to a different mode, use
the following procedure:
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory,
it was programmed to Mode 1. The mode to
which the vehicle was programmed may have
been changed since it left the factory.
1. Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by
following the instructions listed previously
under “Entering the Personal Settings Menu.”
167
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To program the vehicle to a different mode, use
the following procedure:
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: PERFORMANCE
Mode 2: TOURING
1. Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by
following the instructions listed previously
under “Entering the Personal Settings Menu.”
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory,
it was programmed to Mode 2. The mode to
which the vehicle was programmed may have
been changed since it left the factory.
2. Turn the tune/select knob until CHIME
VOLUME HIGH is highlighted.
3. Press the tune/select knob to switch back and
forth between the normal and high settings.
A check mark indicates that the chime volume
is set to HIGH.
To program the vehicle to a different mode, use
the following procedure:
1. Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by
following the instructions listed previously
under “Entering the Personal Settings Menu.”
The mode you selected is now set. You can either
exit the programming mode by following the
instructions later in this section or program the
next feature available on your vehicle.
2. Turn the tune/select knob until SUSPENSION
MODE is highlighted.
SUSPENSION MODE
3. Press the tune/select knob to enter the
SUSPENSION MODE submenu.
If your vehicle has this feature, you can select
between performance or touring modes.
Performance mode is used where road conditions
or personal preference demand more control.
This setting provides more “feel” or response to
road conditions. Touring mode is used for normal
city and highway driving. This setting provides
a smooth, soft ride.
4. Turn the tune/select knob to highlight
TOURING or PERFORMANCE.
5. Press the tune/select knob to select the
setting.
168
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either
exit the programming mode by following the
instructions later in this section or program the
next feature available on your vehicle by pressing
the F6 (BACK) button, located on the radio, to
return to the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU.
The following settings and presets are set
automatically:
• The language, radio and XM™ presets, tone,
volume, playback mode (AM/FM or CD), last
displayed stations, and compact disc
position
Exiting the Personal Settings Menu
• The last climate control setting
• The Head-Up Display (HUD) position, if your
vehicle has this feature
Once you have finished making your selections on
the base audio system, you will automatically
return to the main audio screen after 15 seconds.
You can also press the F6 (BACK) button,
located on the radio, to return to the main audio
screen.
• Other personalization settings, for example,
remote start settings
For vehicles with the base audio system, memory
features are programmed and recalled through
the radio from the DRIVER SELECTION and the
DRIVER EXIT SETTINGS submenus. See
“Entering the Driver Selection Submenu” and
“Entering the Driver Exit Settings Submenu” later
in this section for more information on recalling
and programming the memory settings using the
base audio system.
Memory Seat, Mirrors and Steering
Wheel
If your vehicle has the memory feature, you can
program and recall memory settings for the
following features for up to two drivers:
• The driver’s seat position
• The outside rearview mirrors position
• The power tilt wheel and telescopic steering
column position
169
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For vehicles with the Navigation system, memory
features are programmed and recalled through
the navigation display. See “Personalization” in the
Index of the Navigation System manual for more
information on programming and recalling the
memory settings using the Navigation system.
3. Turn on the radio by pressing the
power/volume knob.
4. Press the CNFG radio button to enter the
main menu of the radio.
5. Turn the tune/select knob and scroll to
SETUP.
For vehicles with the Navigation system, you can
also recall the memory features by using voice
recognition, if your vehicle has this feature.
See “Voice Recognition” in the Index of the
Navigation System manual for more information.
6. Press the tune/select knob to enter the
SETUP menu.
7. Turn the tune/select knob and scroll to
DRIVER SELECTION.
8. Press the tune/select knob to enter the
DRIVER SELECTION submenu. The following
items will appear:
Entering the Driver Selection
Submenu
To enter the memory programming mode for your
driver settings, use the following procedure:
• DRIVER 1
• DRIVER 2
• RECALL DRIVER SETTINGS
• STORE DRIVER SETTINGS
1. Be sure the ignition is either on, in Acc., or in
RAP and place the transmission in PARK (P)
or make sure that the vehicle speed is
less than 6 mph (9 km/h).
2. Press any button on the appropriate keyless
access transmitter to identify yourself as
Driver 1 or Driver 2.
170
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RECALL DRIVER SETTINGS
Driver Selection Submenu Items
DRIVER 1/DRIVER 2
To recall driver settings, use the following
procedure:
The numbers on the back of each keyless access
transmitter correspond to DRIVER 1 and
DRIVER 2. If you would like to recall or store
driver settings for the driver that does not
correspond to the number on the back of the
keyless access transmitter that you are using,
use the following procedure:
1. Enter the memory programming mode for
your driver settings by following the
instructions listed previously under “Entering
the Driver Selection Submenu.”
1. Enter the memory programming mode for
your driver settings by following the
instructions listed previously under “Entering
the Driver Selection Submenu.”
2. From the DRIVER SELECTION submenu, turn
the tune/select knob to scroll to RECALL
DRIVER SETTINGS and press in the knob.
If the vehicle is in PARK (P), one beep will
sound and your previously saved driving
position will then be recalled.
If the vehicle is not in PARK (P), three beeps
will sound and your previously saved
driving position will not be recalled.
2. From the DRIVER SELECTION submenu,
turn the tune/select knob to highlight the
driver number that you want, either DRIVER 1
or DRIVER 2.
3. Set your choice by pressing in the
tune/select knob.
A memory recall can be stopped by pressing any
memory seat or mirror position button.
If you would like to recall or store driver settings for
the selected driver, see “RECALL DRIVER
SETTINGS” or “STORE DRIVER SETTINGS”
later in this section.
If you would like to recall or store exit settings for
the selected driver, see “RECALL EXIT SETTINGS”
or “STORE EXIT SETTINGS” later in this section.
If you would like the stored driving positions to be
recalled when unlocking your vehicle with the
keyless access transmitter or when starting your
vehicle, see “REMOTE RECALL MEMORY”
or “START BUTTON RECALL” under Vehicle
171
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STORE DRIVER SETTINGS
To store driver settings, use the following
procedure:
1. Adjust your settings for the driver’s seat, the
outside rearview mirrors, and the steering
column to a comfortable driving position.
2. Enter the memory programming mode for
your driver settings by following the
instructions listed previously under “Entering
the Driver Selection Submenu.”
3. From the DRIVER SELECTION submenu,
turn the tune/select knob to scroll to STORE
DRIVER SETTINGS and press in the
knob. Two beeps will sound to confirm that
your driver settings are saved.
4. Set the HUD position, if your vehicle has this
feature, the climate control temperature, fan
speed and mode settings, the radio presets,
tone, volume, playback mode (AM/FM,
XM™, or CD), and compact disc position.
Your memory settings are now programmed.
Any changes that are made to the HUD,
audio system, and climate controls while
driving will be automatically stored when the
ignition is turned off.
Entering the Driver Exit Settings
Submenu
To enter the memory programming mode for your
exit settings, use the following procedure:
1. Be sure the ignition is either on, in Acc., or in
RAP and place the transmission in PARK (P)
or make sure that the vehicle speed is
less than 6 mph (9 km/h).
2. Press any button on the appropriate keyless
access transmitter to identify yourself as
Driver 1 or Driver 2.
3. Turn on the radio by pressing the
power/volume knob.
4. Press the CNFG radio button to enter the
main menu of the radio.
5. Turn the tune/select knob and scroll to SETUP.
6. Press the tune/select knob to enter the
SETUP menu.
7. Turn the tune/select knob and scroll to
DRIVER EXIT SETTINGS.
8. Press the tune/select knob to enter the
DRIVER EXIT SETTINGS submenu.
The following items will appear:
• RECALL EXIT SETTINGS
• STORE EXIT SETTINGS
5. Repeat the procedure for a second driver by
programming the other driver number.
172
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STORE EXIT SETTINGS
Driver Exit Settings Submenu Items
RECALL EXIT SETTINGS
To store exit settings, use the following procedure:
To recall exit settings, use the following procedure:
1. Adjust your settings for the driver’s seat,
the outside rearview mirrors, and the
1. Enter the memory programming mode for
your exit settings by following the instructions
listed previously under “Entering the Driver
Exit Settings Submenu.”
steering column to a comfortable exit position.
2. Enter the memory programming mode for your
exit settings by following the instructions listed
previously under “Entering the Driver Exit
Settings Submenu.”
2. From the DRIVER EXIT SETTINGS submenu,
turn the tune/select knob to scroll to RECALL
EXIT SETTINGS and press in the knob.
3. From the DRIVER EXIT SETTINGS submenu,
turn the tune/select knob to scroll to STORE
EXIT SETTINGS and press in the knob.
Two beeps will sound to confirm that your new
exit settings are saved.
If the vehicle is in PARK (P), one beep will
sound and your previously saved exit position
will then be recalled.
If the vehicle is not in PARK (P), three beeps
will sound and your previously saved exit
position will not be recalled.
4. Repeat the procedure for a second driver by
programming the other driver number.
A memory recall can be stopped by pressing
any memory seat or mirror position button.
If you would like the stored exit positions to be
recalled when your vehicle is in PARK (P),
the vehicle is off, and the driver’s door is opened,
see “AUTO EXIT SEAT” and “AUTO EXIT
page 148.
173
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
174
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 3
Instrument Panel
176
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
177
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The main components of your instrument panel are the following:
page 237.
G. Audio Steering Wheel Controls (If Equipped).
page 310. Adaptive Cruise Control Gap Button
(If Equipped). See Adaptive Cruise Control
on page 197. Heated Steering Wheel Button (If
page 181.
B. Instrument Panel Brightness Control. See
Driver Information Center (DIC) Buttons. See
HUD Controls (If Equipped). See Head-Up
on page 193. Adaptive Cruise Control (If
page 197. Forward Collision Alert (FCA)
(If Equipped). See Forward Collision Alert
H. Power Tilt Wheel and Telescopic Steering
Column. Power Tilt Wheel and Telescopic
page 111.
E. Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever. See
on page 305.
179
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press the button to make the front and rear turn
signal lamps flash on and off. Press the button
again to turn the flashers off.
Hazard Warning Flashers
Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others.
They also let police know you have a problem.
Your front and rear turn signal lamps will flash on
and off.
When the hazard warning flashers are on, your
turn signals will not work.
The hazard warning
flasher button is located
on the console, near
the shift lever. See
Other Warning Devices
If you carry reflective triangles, you can set them up
at the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m)
behind your vehicle.
Horn
Press near or on the horn symbols on your
steering wheel pad to sound the horn.
Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what
position your key is in, and even if the key is
not in.
180
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power Tilt Wheel and Telescopic
Steering Column
Heated Steering Wheel
Your vehicle may have a heated steering wheel.
The button for this
feature is located on
the steering wheel.
The power tilt and
telescope wheel control
is located on the
outboard side of the
steering column.
Press the bottom of the button to turn the heated
steering wheel on or off. A light on the button
will display while the feature is on.
To operate the power tilt feature, move the control
up or down to tilt the steering wheel up or down.
To set the memory position, see Vehicle
The steering wheel will take about three minutes
to reach its maximum temperature.
To operate the power telescope feature, move the
control forward or rearward and the steering
wheel moves toward the front or rear of the
vehicle.
181
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
page 193.
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
• Adaptive Cruise Control (If Equipped). See
• Forward Collision Alert (FCA) (If Equipped).
on page 184.
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes the following:
To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or
down. The lever returns automatically when
the turn is complete.
• G Turn and Lane-Change Signals. See
• 3 Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer.
on page 183.
An arrow on the
instrument panel
cluster flashes in the
direction of the turn
or lane change.
page 188.
182
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Raise or lower the lever until the arrow starts to
flash to signal a lane change. Hold it there until the
lane change is complete. The lever returns to its
original position when it is released.
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
Push forward on the turn signal/multifunction
lever to change the headlamps from low to high
beam. Pull the lever back and then release it
to change from high to low beam.
Rapid flashing of arrows when signaling for a turn
or lane change may be caused by a burned-out
signal bulb. Other driver’s will not see the signal.
If you turn the vehicle off with the high beams on,
the next time you start your vehicle the low
beams will be on.
Replace burned-out bulbs to help avoid possible
accidents. Check the fuse and for burned-out bulbs
if the arrow fails to work when signaling a turn.
more information.
To re-activate high beams, pull lever toward you
and then push it forward again.
This light on the
Turn Signal On Chime
instrument panel cluster
will be on, indicating
high-beam usage.
If the turn signal is left on for about 1 mile (1.6 km),
a warning chime will sound and the TURN
SIGNAL ON message will appear on the Driver
Information Center (DIC) display. See “Turn Signal
page 264 for more information.
183
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
Forward Collision Alert (FCA)
System
If your vehicle has this feature, be sure to read
this entire section before using it.
The system operates on a radio frequency subject
to Federal Communications Commission (FCC)
Rules and with Industry Canada.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other
than an authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
The Forward Collision Alert (FCA) system provides
an audible and visual warning if you approach a
vehicle too rapidly. FCA also provides a visual
warning with no audible warning if you are
following another vehicle much too closely. FCA
uses the Adaptive Cruise Control radar to detect a
vehicle directly ahead, in your path, within a
distance of 328 ft (100 m) and operates at
speeds above 20 mph (32 km/h).
1. This device may not cause interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
184
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Forward Collision
Alert (FCA) controls are
located on the end of
the multifunction lever.
{CAUTION:
FCA is only a warning system and does
not apply the brakes. When you are
approaching a vehicle or object too rapidly
or when you are following a vehicle too
closely that is ahead of you, FCA may not
provide you with enough time to avoid a
collision. FCA is not designed to warn the
driver of pedestrians or animals. Your
complete attention is always required while
driving and you should be ready to take
action and apply the brakes. For more
page 316.
9(Off): This position turns the system off.
R(On): This position turns the system on.
To enable FCA, move the Adaptive Cruise Control
switch to on. To disable FCA, move the switch
to off.
185
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Make sure the Head-Up Display is on and
properly adjusted. If the HUD is not on, FCA will
not be enabled and you will not be provided
with FCA audible and visual warnings. See
information.
{CAUTION:
When FCA is enabled, the Adaptive Cruise
Control switch is on. If you press another
Adaptive Cruise Control button, you might
go into cruise when you do not want to.
You could be startled and even lose
control. Be careful not to press adaptive
cruise buttons unless you want to use
cruise control.
{CAUTION:
• On winding roads, FCA may not detect
a vehicle ahead. You could crash into
a vehicle ahead of you. Do not rely on
FCA on winding roads.
• When weather limits visibility, such as
in fog, rain, or snow, FCA performance
is limited. There may not be enough
warning distance to the vehicle in front
of you. Do not rely on FCA in low
visibility conditions.
186
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Warning the Driver
The alert symbol will
flash on the HUD and
a warning beep will
sound when driver
{CAUTION:
When the Adaptive Cruise Control radar is
blocked by snow, ice, or dirt, it may not
detect a vehicle ahead. FCA may not
action may be required.
help you avoid a collision under these
conditions. Do not use FCA when the radar
is blocked by snow, ice, or dirt. Keep your
radar clean. See “Cleaning the System”
The driver warning is active when:
• You are approaching a vehicle too quickly.
• You are following a vehicle ahead much
too closely.
information.
{CAUTION:
Detecting the Vehicle Ahead
FCA may not detect and warn soon
enough to stationary or slow-moving
vehicles or other objects ahead of you.
You could crash into an object ahead
of you. Do not rely on FCA when
approaching stationary or slow-moving
vehicles or other objects.
The vehicle ahead symbol will only appear on the
HUD when a vehicle ahead of you is detected in
your path. If this symbol does not appear, or
disappears briefly, FCA will not respond to vehicles
you may see ahead. The symbol may disappear on
curves, highway exit ramps, or hills. Also, when
another vehicle enters the same lane as you, the
FCA system will not detect the vehicle until it is
completely in your driving lane.
187
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Unnecessary Warnings
Flash-to-Pass
FCA may occasionally provide an unnecessary
warning to guard rails, signs, and other stationary
objects. This is normal operation, your vehicle
does not need service.
This feature allows you to use the high-beam
headlamps to signal the driver in front of you that
you want to pass.
Pull and hold the turn signal/multifunction lever
toward you to use this feature. When you do this,
the following will occur:
Other Messages
There are three messages that may appear on the
Driver Information Center (DIC). They are
CLEAN RADAR, RADAR CRUISE NOT READY
and SERVICE RADAR CRUISE. See DIC
• If the headlamps are off, in low-beam or in
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) mode, the
high-beam headlamps will turn on. They will
stay on as long as you hold the lever
there. Release the lever to turn them off.
Cleaning the System
• If the headlamps are in high-beam mode, they
will switch to low beam. To return to
The radar can become blocked by snow, ice, or
dirt. If so, you may need to turn off the engine and
clean the lens. See “Cleaning the System”
high-beam, push the lever away from you.
188
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
x(Delay Adjustment): Use this band to set the
length of the delay between wipes when using the
delay feature. The closer you move the band
toward mist, the longer the delay. The windshield
wiper lever must be in delay for this feature to work.
Windshield Wipers
6 (Low Speed): Put the lever in this position
for slow, steady wiping cycles.
1 (High Speed): Put the lever in this position
for rapid wiping cycles.
The lever on the right side of the steering column
operates the windshield wipers.
If the windshield wipers are in use for about
six seconds while you are driving, the exterior
lamps will come on automatically if the exterior
lamp control is in AUTO. See Wiper Activated
7(Mist): Pull the lever down and release it for
a single wiping cycle. The lever will return to its
original position. For more cycles, hold the
lever down before releasing it.
Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper
blades before using them. If they’re frozen to the
windshield, gently loosen or thaw them. If the
blades do become damaged, install new blades.
For more information, see Windshield Wiper Blade
9(Off): Put the lever in this position to turn off
the wipers.
&(Delay): Put the lever in this position to set a
delay between wipes. Turn the delay adjustment
band to set the length of the delay.
189
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor. A
circuit breaker will stop the motor until it cools down.
Clear away snow or ice to prevent an overload.
delay mode as well as a continuous low or high
speed as needed. If the system is left on for long
periods of time, occasional wipes may occur
without any moisture on the windshield. This is
normal and indicates that the Rainsense™ system
is activated.
Your vehicle (STS-V only) is equipped with a
feature that disables the wiper system when the
hood is open and your vehicle is stopped. Opening
the hood will automatically park the wipers if
they are not parked. This prevents the wipers from
interfering with hood operation. Be sure the
hood is not opened when you require the vehicle’s
wipers out of the park position, such as when
changing the wiper blades.
To activate the Rainsense™ system, turn the
wiper band to delay mode and select one of the
four sensitivity levels indicated on the wiper stalk.
The position closest to off is the lowest sensitivity
setting, level one. This allows more rain or snow to
collect on the windshield between wipes. Turning
the wiper band away from you to higher sensitivity
levels increases the sensitivity of the system and
frequency of wipes. The highest sensitivity setting,
level four, is closest to low. A single wipe will occur
each time you turn the wiper stalk to a higher
sensitivity level to indicate that the sensitivity level
has been increased.
Rainsense™ II Wipers
If your vehicle has this feature, the moisture
sensor is mounted on the interior side of the
windshield behind the rearview mirror. It is used to
automatically operate the wipers by monitoring
the amount of moisture build-up on the windshield.
Wipes occur as needed to clear the windshield
depending on driving conditions and the sensitivity
setting. In light rain or snow, fewer wipes will
occur. In heavy rain or snow, wipes will occur more
frequently. The Rainsense™ wipers operate in a
Notice: Going through an automatic car wash
with the wipers on can damage them. Turn
the wipers off when going through an
automatic car wash.
190
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The mist and wash cycles operate as normal and
are not affected by the Rainsense™ function.
The Rainsense™ system can be overridden at any
time by manually turning the wiper band to low
or high speed.
{CAUTION:
In freezing weather, do not use your
washer until the windshield is warmed.
Otherwise the washer fluid can form ice
on the windshield, blocking your vision.
When Rainsense™ is active, the headlamps will
turn on automatically. The headlamps will turn
off again once the wipers turn off if it is light
enough outside. If it is dark, they will remain on.
If the fluid in the windshield washer fluid reservoir
is low, the message CHECK WASHER FLUID
will appear on the Driver Information Center (DIC)
display. It will take 60 seconds after the bottle
is refilled for this message to turn off. For
information on the correct washer fluid mixture to
page 516.
Notice: Do not place stickers or other items
on the exterior glass surface directly in front of
the moisture sensor. Doing this could cause
the moisture sensor to malfunction.
Windshield Washer
K(Washer Fluid): The lever on the right side
of the steering column also controls the windshield
washer. There is a button at the end of the
lever. To spray washer fluid on the windshield,
press the button and hold it. The washer will spray
until you release the button. The wipers will
continue to clear the window for about six seconds
after the button is released and then stop or
return to your preset speed.
191
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To wash the headlamps, press the washer button
located at the end of the windshield wiper lever.
The headlamps will be washed after the fifth press
of the windshield washer button.
Headlamp Washer
Your vehicle may have headlamp washers.
The headlamp washers clear debris from the
headlamp lenses.
The headlamps must be on to be washed. If the
headlamps are off, only the windshield will be
washed when the washer button is pressed.
If the washer fluid is low, the headlamp washers
will not work.
information.
The headlamp washers are located to the inside
of the headlamps.
192
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
R(On): Move to this position to turn on the system.
Cruise Control
+ (Resume/Accelerate): Move to this position to
make the vehicle resume a previously set speed or
to accelerate when cruise is already active.
These controls are
located on the end of
the multifunction lever.
T(Set/Decrease): Press this button to set the
speed or to decrease the speed when cruise
is already active.
With cruise control, a speed of about 25 mph
(40 km/h) or more can be maintained without
keeping your foot on the accelerator. This
can really help on long trips. Cruise control does
not work at speeds below about 25 mph (40 km/h).
9(Off): Move to this position to turn the
system off.
193
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you apply your brakes, the cruise control will
shut off.
Setting Cruise Control
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
If you leave your cruise control on when
you are not using cruise, you might hit a
button and go into cruise when you do not
want to. You could be startled and even
lose control. Keep the cruise control switch
off until you want to use cruise control.
Cruise control can be dangerous where
you cannot drive safely at a steady speed.
So, do not use your cruise control on
winding roads or in heavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous on
slippery roads. On such roads, fast
changes in tire traction can cause
excessive wheel slip, and you could lose
control. Do not use cruise control on
slippery roads.
1. Move the cruise control switch to on.
2. Get up to the speed desired.
3. Press in the set button at the end of the lever
and release it.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the
Traction Control System (TCS) begins to limit
wheel spin, the cruise control will automatically
When road conditions allow you to safely use
it again, you may turn the cruise control back on.
This light on the
instrument panel cluster
will come on while
cruise control is on.
194
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Resuming a Set Speed
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
Suppose you set the cruise control at a desired
speed and then you apply the brake. This, of
course, disengages the cruise control. But it does
not need to be reset.
There are two ways to go to a higher speed:
• Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher
speed. Press the set button at the end of the
lever, then release the button and the
accelerator pedal. You will now cruise at the
higher speed.
Once you are going about 25 mph (40 km/h) or
more, you can move the cruise control switch
briefly from on to resume/accelerate.
You will go right back up to your chosen speed
and stay there.
• Move the cruise switch from on to resume/
accelerate. Hold it there until you get up to the
desired speed, and then release the switch. To
increase your speed in very small amounts,
move the switch briefly to resume/accelerate.
Each time you do this, your vehicle will go
about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.
If you hold the switch at resume/accelerate the
vehicle will keep going faster until you release the
switch or apply the brake. Do not hold the
switch at resume/accelerate, unless you want the
vehicle to go faster.
If using the accelerator pedal and the set button at
end of the lever to increase cruise set speed, your
new set speed must be at least 5 mph higher than
current speed for this method to work. If it is not
5 mph higher, switch cruise switch off, then on, and
then reset your speed using the set button.
195
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well the cruise control works on hills depends
upon the vehicle speed, load, and the steepness of
the hills. When going up steep hills, you might have
to step on the accelerator pedal to maintain the
vehicle’s speed. When going downhill, you might
have to brake to keep the vehicle’s speed down.
Applying the brake will turn off the cruise control. If
you need to apply the brake due to the grade of the
downhill slope, you might not want to attempt to use
your cruise control feature.
There are two ways to reduce your speed while
using cruise control:
• Press in the button at the end of the lever until
you reach the lower speed desired, then
release it.
• To slow down in very small amounts, briefly
press the set button. Each time you do this,
you will go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.
Passing Another Vehicle While Using
Cruise Control
Ending Cruise Control
To end a cruise control session, step lightly on the
brake pedal.
Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed.
When you take your foot off the pedal, the
vehicle will slow down to the cruise control speed
you set earlier.
Stepping on the brake pedal will end the current
cruise control session only. Move the cruise control
switch to off to turn off the system completely.
Erasing Speed Memory
When you turn off the cruise control or the
ignition, the cruise control set speed memory
is erased.
196
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changes or modifications to this system by other
than an authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
Adaptive Cruise Control
If your vehicle has this feature, be sure to read
this entire section before using it.
Adaptive Cruise Control is an enhancement to
traditional cruise control and is not a safety
system. It allows you to keep cruise control
engaged in moderate traffic conditions without
having to constantly reset your cruise control.
Adaptive Cruise Control uses radar to detect a
vehicle directly ahead in your path, within a
distance of 328 ft (100 m), and operates at speeds
above 25 mph (40 km/h). When it is engaged by
the driver, the system can apply limited braking or
acceleration of the vehicle, automatically, to
maintain a selected follow distance to the vehicle
ahead. The vehicle’s braking during Adaptive
Cruise Control is comparable to a person applying
moderate pressure to the vehicle’s brake pedal.
The system operates on a radio frequency subject
to Federal Communications Commission (FCC)
Rules and with Industry Canada.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
197
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To disengage Adaptive Cruise Control, apply the
brake. If no vehicle is in your path, your vehicle
will react like traditional cruise control.
{CAUTION:
• On winding roads, Adaptive Cruise
Control may not detect a vehicle
ahead. You could crash into a vehicle
ahead of you. Do not use Adaptive
Cruise Control on winding roads.
• Adaptive Cruise Control may not have
time to slow your vehicle enough to
avoid a crash when you are driving in
conditions where vehicles may
suddenly slow or stop ahead of you,
enter your lane, or cross your vehicle’s
path. If you are driving in these
conditions, do not use Adaptive Cruise
Control. The warning beep and alert
symbol may indicate that you are
driving in conditions where Adaptive
Cruise Control should not be used. See
“Alerting the Driver” in this section.
{CAUTION:
Adaptive Cruise Control will not apply
hard braking or bring the vehicle to a
complete stop. It will not respond to
stopped vehicles, pedestrians or animals.
When you are approaching a vehicle or
object, Adaptive Cruise Control may not
have time to slow your vehicle enough to
avoid a collision. Your complete attention
is always required while driving and you
should be ready to take action and apply
the brakes. For more information, see
CAUTION: (Continued)
198
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Adaptive Cruise
controls are located on
the end of the
CAUTION: (Continued)
multifunction lever.
• On slippery roads, fast changes in
tire traction can cause needless
wheel spinning, and you could lose
control. Do not use cruise control on
slippery roads.
• When weather limits visibility, such as
when in fog, rain, or snow conditions,
Adaptive Cruise Control performance
is limited. There may not be enough
distance to adapt to the changing
traffic conditions. Do not use cruise
control when visibility is low.
9(Off): This position turns the system off.
R(On): This position turns the system on.
S(Resume/Increase): Push the switch to this
symbol to make the vehicle resume to a previously
set speed or to increase the set speed when
Adaptive Cruise Control is already active.
T(Set/Decrease): Press this button to set the
speed or to decrease the set speed when
Adaptive Cruise Control is already active.
199
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engaging Adaptive Cruise Control With
the Set Button
{CAUTION:
If you operate Adaptive Cruise Control
without your Head-up Display (HUD)
properly adjusted, your Adaptive Cruise
Control settings may not be visible. You
could forget your settings and be startled
by Adaptive Cruise Control response and
even lose control. Keep your HUD on and
properly adjusted when using Adaptive
Cruise Control.
{CAUTION:
If you leave your Adaptive Cruise Control
switch on when you are not using cruise,
you might hit a button and go into cruise
when you do not want to. You could be
startled and even lose control. Keep the
Adaptive Cruise Control switch off until
you want to use cruise control.
The set speed is selected by the driver. This is the
speed you will travel if there is no vehicle
detected in your path.
200
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To set Adaptive Cruise Control, do the following:
This symbol will
appear on the Head-Up
Display (HUD) to
indicate that Adaptive
Cruise Control is active.
The number indicates
the set speed.
1. Make sure the Head-Up Display (HUD) is
on and properly adjusted. You cannot
engage Adaptive Cruise Control unless the
HUD is on. See Head-Up Display (HUD)
on page 223 for more information.
2. Move the switch to on.
United States version
shown, Canada similar
3. Get up to the speed you want.
more information.
4. Press in the set button at the end of the lever
and release it.
Make sure the set speed is visible on the HUD so
you know the speed your vehicle will accelerate to if
a vehicle is not detected in your path. Keep in mind
speed limits, surrounding traffic speeds and
5. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
Once Adaptive Cruise Control is set, it may
immediately apply the brakes if it detects a vehicle
ahead is too close or moving slower than your
vehicle.
weather conditions when adjusting your set speed.
If your vehicle is in Adaptive Cruise Control when
the traction control system begins to limit wheel
spin, the Adaptive Cruise Control will automatically
When road conditions allow you to safely use it
again, you may turn the Adaptive Cruise Control
back on.
201
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Increasing Set Speed While Using Adaptive
Cruise Control
Decreasing Set Speed While Using
Adaptive Cruise Control
There are two ways to increase the set speed:
Press in the set/decrease button on the end of the
lever until you reach the lower speed you want,
then release it.
• Use the accelerator to get to the higher speed.
Press the set button at the end of the lever,
then release the button and the accelerator
pedal. You will now cruise at the higher speed.
To slow down in very small amounts, briefly press
the set/decrease button. Each time you do this,
your set speed will be 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.
• Move the Adaptive Cruise Control switch from
on to resume/increase. Hold it there until the
desired set speed is displayed in the HUD,
then release the switch. To increase your set
speed in very small amounts, move the
switch briefly to resume/increase. Each time
you do this, your vehicle set speed will
increase by 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
Resuming a Set Speed
Suppose you set your Adaptive Cruise Control at
a desired speed and then you apply the brake.
This will disengage the Adaptive Cruise Control.
But you do not need to reset it.
Once you are going about 25 mph (40 km/h) or
more, move the Adaptive Cruise Control
switch briefly from on to resume/increase. Adaptive
Cruise Control will be engaged with the previously
chosen set speed.
Your vehicle will not reach the set speed until the
system determines there is not a vehicle in
front of you. At that point, your vehicle speed will
increase to the set speed.
202
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
distance maintained for a selected follow distance
will vary based on vehicle speed. The faster
the vehicle speed the further back you will follow.
Consider traffic and weather conditions when
selecting the follow distance. The range of
selectable distances may not be appropriate for all
drivers and driving conditions. If you prefer to
travel at a follow distance farther than Adaptive
Cruise Control allows, disengage the system
and drive manually.
Selecting the Follow Distance (GAP)
When the system detects a slower moving vehicle,
it will adjust your vehicle’s speed and maintain
the follow distance (gap) you select.
Use the GAP button on
the steering wheel to
adjust the follow
distance.
Press the top of the button to increase the
distance or the bottom of the button to decrease
the distance. The first button press will show
you the current follow distance setting on the HUD.
Your current follow distance setting will be
maintained until you change it.
United States version shown, Canada similar
A graphic on the HUD indicates the selected
follow distance. This picture shows a maximum
follow distance. The vehicles will move closer
together as you select a smaller follow distance.
There are six follow distances to choose from. The
follow distance selection ranges from near to far
(one second to two seconds follow time). The
203
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alerting the Driver
{CAUTION:
The alert symbol will
flash on the HUD and a
warning beep will
sound when driver
action is required.
Adaptive Cruise Control has only limited
braking ability to slow your vehicle. In
some cases, Adaptive Cruise Control may
not have time to slow your vehicle enough
to avoid a collision. Be ready to take
action and apply the brakes yourself. See
Driver action is required when:
• Adaptive Cruise Control cannot apply sufficient
braking because you are approaching a
vehicle too rapidly.
• The vehicle speed drops below about
20 mph (32 km/h).
• A temporary condition prohibits Adaptive
Cruise Control from operating. See DIC
information.
• A malfunction is detected in the system. See
DIC Warnings and Messages on page 264
for more information.
204
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Approaching and Following a Vehicle
CAUTION: (Continued)
The vehicle ahead
symbol will only appear
on the HUD when a
vehicle ahead is
Do not use Adaptive Cruise Control when
the radar is blocked by snow, ice, or dirt.
Keep your radar clean. See “Cleaning the
System” later in this section.
detected in your path.
Adaptive Cruise Control will, automatically, slow
your vehicle down when approaching a slower
moving vehicle. It will then adjust your speed to
follow the vehicle in front at the selected follow
distance. Your speed will increase or decrease to
follow the vehicle in front of you but will not
exceed the set speed. It may apply limited braking,
if necessary. When braking is active, your brake
lights will come on. It may feel or sound different
than if you were applying the brakes yourself. This
is normal.
If this symbol does not appear, or disappears
briefly, Adaptive Cruise Control will not respond to
vehicles you may see ahead.
{CAUTION:
When the Adaptive Cruise Control radar is
blocked by snow, ice, or dirt, it may not
detect a vehicle ahead. Adaptive Cruise
Control may not have time to slow your
vehicle enough to avoid a collision.
CAUTION: (Continued)
205
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Stationary or Very Slow-Moving Objects
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Adaptive Cruise Control may not detect
and react to stationary or slow-moving
vehicles or other objects ahead of you.
Your vehicle may accelerate toward
objects, such as a stopped vehicle that
suddenly appears after the lead vehicle
changes lanes. Your complete attention is
always required while driving and you
should be ready to take action and apply
the brakes.
Adaptive Cruise Control may not detect
and react to stationary or slow-moving
vehicles or other objects ahead of you.
You could crash into an object ahead of
you. Do not use Adaptive Cruise Control
when approaching stationary or
slow-moving vehicles or other objects.
206
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Low-Speed Deactivation
Passing a Vehicle/Adaptive Cruise
Control Override
If your speed falls below 20 mph (32 km/h) while
following a vehicle ahead, Adaptive Cruise Control
will begin to disengage. The driver alert symbol
on the HUD will flash and the warning beep
will sound. The driver must take action since
Adaptive Cruise Control will not slow the vehicle
to a stop.
If you need to increase speed to pass a vehicle, use
the accelerator pedal. While you are doing this, the
system will not automatically apply the brakes. A
PEDAL APPLIED ACC OVERRIDE message will
appear on the HUD. See Head-Up Display (HUD)
on page 223 for additional information. Once you
pass the vehicle and remove your foot from the
accelerator pedal, Adaptive Cruise Control will
return to normal operation and be able to apply the
brakes, if needed.
Deactivation When Head-Up Display is
Turned Off
If you turn the HUD off when Adaptive Cruise
Control is engaged, it will begin to disengage. A
warning beep will sound and the message RADAR
CRUISE NOT READY will appear on the Driver
Information Center (DIC). See DIC Warnings
information. If Adaptive Cruise Control was braking
when the HUD is turned off, the braking will
continue briefly.
{CAUTION:
If you rest your foot on the accelerator
pedal, the system will not automatically
apply the brakes. You could crash into a
vehicle ahead of you. Do not rest your
foot on the accelerator pedal when using
Adaptive Cruise Control.
207
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Curves in the Road
{CAUTION:
Due to Adaptive Cruise Control limitations
in curves, it may respond to a vehicle in
another lane, or may not have time to
react to a vehicle in your lane. You could
crash into a vehicle ahead of you, or lose
control of your vehicle. Give extra
attention in curves and be ready to use
the brakes if necessary. Select an
appropriate speed while driving in curves.
When following a vehicle and entering a curve,
Adaptive Cruise Control could lose track of
the vehicle in your lane and accelerate your
vehicle. When this happens, the vehicle ahead
symbol will not appear on the HUD.
Adaptive Cruise Control may operate differently in
a sharp curve. It may reduce your speed if the
curve is too sharp.
208
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Highway Exit Ramps
{CAUTION:
Adaptive Cruise Control may lose track of
the vehicle ahead and accelerate up to
your set speed while entering or on
highway exit ramps. You could be startled
by this acceleration and even lose control
of the vehicle. Disengage Adaptive Cruise
Control before entering a highway exit
ramp. Do not use Adaptive Cruise Control
while entering or on exit ramps.
Adaptive Cruise Control may detect a vehicle that
is not in your lane and apply the brakes.
Adaptive Cruise Control may, occasionally,
provide a driver alert and/or braking that you
consider unnecessary. It could respond to signs,
guardrails and other stationary objects when
entering or exiting a curve. This is normal
operation. Your vehicle does not need service.
209
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
steepness of the hills. It may not detect a vehicle
in your lane while driving on hills. When going
up steep hills, you may want to use the accelerator
pedal to maintain your speed. When going
downhill when towing a trailer, you may want to
brake to keep your speed down. Applying the
brake disengages the system. You may choose
not to use Adaptive Cruise Control on steep
hills when towing a trailer.
Other Vehicle Lane Changes
If another vehicle enters the same lane as you,
Adaptive Cruise Control will not detect the vehicle
until it is completely in the lane. Be ready to
take action and apply the brakes yourself.
Disengaging Adaptive Cruise Control
To disengage the system, apply the brake pedal
or move the Adaptive Cruise Control switch to
off. Adaptive Cruise Control information will
not appear on the HUD when the system is not
engaged.
Using Adaptive Cruise Controls on Hills
and When Towing a Trailer
Erasing Set Speed Memory
When you turn the Adaptive Cruise Control switch
or the ignition off, the set speed memory is erased.
How well Adaptive Cruise Control will work on hills
and when towing a trailer depends on your
speed, vehicle load, traffic conditions and the
210
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Other Messages
Headlamps
There are three messages that may appear on the
DIC. They are SERVICE RADAR CRUISE,
RADAR CRUISE NOT READY and CLEAN
RADAR. These messages will appear to indicate
a problem with the Adaptive Cruise Control.
for more information.
Cleaning the System
The exterior lamp control is located in the middle
of the turn signal/multifunction lever.
The radar can become blocked by snow, ice or
dirt. If so, you may need to turn off the engine and
clean the lens. Remember, do not use Adaptive
Cruise Control in icy conditions, or when visibility is
low, such as in fog, rain or snow.
O(Exterior Lamp Control): Turn the control
with this symbol on it to operate the exterior lamps.
The exterior lamp control has four positions:
The emblem/lens is located in the center of
the grille.
O(On/Off): Turn the control to this position to
turn off all lamps and automatic lighting features
including Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) and
IntelliBeam™.
To clean the emblem/lens, wipe the surface with a
soft cloth. After cleaning the emblem/lens,
engage the Adaptive Cruise Control. If you are
unable to do so, see your dealer.
211
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This is a momentary switch that springs back to the
AUTO position when released. An AUTOMATIC
LIGHTS ON message appears on the DIC when
automatic lights are enabled or an AUTOMATIC
LIGHTS OFF message appears on the DIC when
the automatic lights are disabled.
To disable automatic lighting do any of the
following:
• Turn the headlamp control from AUTO to off
and release the switch. It returns back to the
AUTO position by itself.
• Turn the headlamp control from AUTO to the
parking lamp position.
AUTO (Automatic): Turn the control to this
position to put the headlamps in automatic mode.
AUTO mode, turns the exterior lamps on and
off depending upon how much light is available
outside of the vehicle.
• Turn the headlamp control from AUTO to the
headlamp position.
Disabling automatic lighting disables the automatic
headlamp operation, DRL, and IntelliBeam™
High-Beams (if the vehicle has them).
Due to the switch design, the automatic lights may
be disabled even if the control is in the AUTO
position.
;(Parking Lamps): Turn the control to this
position to turn on the parking lamps together with
the following:
To enable automatic lighting do any of the
following:
• Sidemarker Lamps
• Taillamps
• License Plate Lamps
• Instrument Panel Lights
• Turn the headlamp control from AUTO to off
and release the switch. It returns back to the
AUTO position by itself.
• Turn the headlamp control from the parking
lamp position to AUTO.
5(Headlamps): Turn the control to this position
to turn on the headlamps, together with the
previously listed lamps and lights.
• Turn the headlamp control from the headlamp
position to AUTO.
212
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The High-Beam On Light appears on the
IntelliBeam™ Intelligent High-Beam
Headlamp Control System
instrument panel cluster when the high-beams are
vehicle has variable intensity high-beams.
The high-beam indicator on the instrument panel
cluster comes on as soon as the high-beams
start to come on, and remains on until the
high-beams have completely turned off. All
vehicles that have IntelliBeam™, however, quickly
turn off the high-beams if the system detects
the sudden presence of vehicle lights ahead.
If your vehicle has this feature, be sure to read
this entire section before using it.
IntelliBeam™ is an enhancement to the vehicle’s
headlamp system. Using a digital light sensor
located on the back of the rearview mirror,
this system turns the high-beam headlamps on
and off according to surrounding traffic conditions.
The IntelliBeam™ system turns the high-beam
headlamps on when it is dark enough, there is no
other traffic present, and the IntelliBeam™
system is enabled.
Driving with IntelliBeam™
IntelliBeam™ only activates the high-beams when
driving over 20 mph (32 km/h).
Turning On and Enabling IntelliBeam™
The high-beam headlamps remain on, under the
control of IntelliBeam™, until any of the following
situations occur:
AUTO 3 (IntelliBeam™ On/Off): Press
and release the IntelliBeam™ button on the inside
rear view mirror. The IntelliBeam™ indicator on
the mirror turns on. Once the system has
been turned on, it remains on each time the
vehicle is started. Additionally, the IntelliBeam™
system must be enabled.
• The system detects an approaching vehicle’s
headlamps.
• The system detects a preceding vehicle’s
taillamps.
• The outside light is bright enough that
high-beam headlamps are not required.
To enable the IntelliBeam™ System, turn the
exterior lamp control to AUTO, with the turn
signal/multifunction lever in its neutral position.
213
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IntelliBeam™ may not turn off the high-beams if
the system cannot detect other vehicle’s lamps
because of any of the following:
• The high-beam headlamps are manually
turned on or you use the flash-to-pass feature.
• The others vehicle’s lamp(s) are missing,
damaged, obstructed from view, or otherwise
undetected.
When either of these conditions occur,
the IntelliBeam™ feature is temporarily
disabled until the high-beam stalk is returned
to the neutral position. If either of these
conditions occur and IntelliBeam™ already
has the high-beam headlamps on, the
IntelliBeam™ feature is disabled and the
IntelliBeam™ light in the mirror turns off.
• The other vehicle’s lamp(s) are covered with
dirt, snow and/or road spray.
• The other vehicle’s lamp(s) cannot be detected
due to dense exhaust, smoke, fog, snow, road
spray, mist, or other airborne obstructions.
• Your vehicle’s windshield is dirty, cracked, or
obstructed by something that blocks the view
of the IntelliBeam™ light sensor.
• The exterior lamp control is turned to any
setting except AUTO.
When this occurs, IntelliBeam™ is disabled
until the control is turned back to the
AUTO position and the AUTOMATIC LIGHTS
ON message displays on the DIC.
• Your vehicle’s windshield is covered with ice,
dirt, haze, or other obstructions.
• Your vehicle is loaded such that the front end
of the vehicle points upward, causing the
IntelliBeam™ sensor to aim high and
not detect headlamps and taillamps.
• The IntelliBeam™ system is turned off at the
inside rearview mirror.
• The vehicle’s speed drops below
15 mph (24 km/h).
• You are driving on winding or hilly roads.
You might need to manually disable or cancel the
high-beam headlamps by turning the low-beam
headlamps on, if any of the above conditions exist.
214
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Disabling and Resetting IntelliBeam™ at
the Rearview Mirror
Cleaning the IntelliBeam™ Light Sensor
The light sensor is
located on the inside of
the vehicle at the back of
the rearview mirror.
IntelliBeam™ can be disabled and reset to the
original factory setting by using the controls on the
inside rearview mirror.
AUTO 3 (IntelliBeam™ On/Off): To disable the
system, press this button on the inside rearview
mirror. The IntelliBeam™ indicator turns off
and does not come back on until the IntelliBeam™
button is pressed again.
When IntelliBeam™ has turned on the high-beams,
pull or push the high-beam stalk. This disables
IntelliBeam™ and the IntelliBeam™ indicator
on the rearview mirror turns off. To re-enable
IntelliBeam™, press the IntelliBeam™ button on
the mirror.
Clean the light sensor window, periodically, using
glass cleaner on a soft cloth. Gently wipe the
sensor window. Do not spray glass cleaner directly
on the surface of the sensor window.
Wiper Activated Headlamps
A different sensitivity setting is available for dealer
diagnostics. This is done by pushing and holding
this button for 20 seconds until the light flashes
three times. If you accidentally activate this, the
vehicle’s setting automatically resets each time the
ignition is turned off and then on again; otherwise,
refer to the text above for resetting the system.
This feature activates the headlamps and parking
lamps after the windshield wipers have been in
use for about six seconds. For this feature to work,
automatic lighting must be enabled. See
When the ignition is turned off, the wiper-activated
headlamps will immediately turn off. They will also
turn off if the windshield wiper control is turned off.
215
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the automatic lights are enabled and it is dark
enough outside, the DRL will turn off and the
low-beam headlamps will turn on. When it is bright
enough outside, the low-beam headlamps will go
off, and the DRL will turn back on. If you start your
vehicle in a dark garage, the automatic headlamp
system will come on immediately. Once you leave
the garage, it will take about one minute for the
automatic headlamp system to change to DRL if it
is light outside. During that delay, your instrument
panel cluster may not be as bright as usual. Make
sure your instrument panel brightness lever is in the
full bright position. See Instrument Panel Brightness
on page 220.
To operate your vehicle with the DRL off, turn the
exterior lamp control off and then do one of the
following:
• Turn the exterior lamp control to the parking
lamp position.
• Turn the exterior lamp control to the headlamp
position.
• Turn the exterior lamp control from AUTO to
off and back to AUTO.
Headlamps on Reminder
A warning chime will sound if the exterior lamp
control is left on in either the headlamp or parking
lamp position and the driver’s door is opened
page 256 for additional information.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier
for others to see the front of your vehicle during
the day. DRL can be helpful in many different
driving conditions, but they can be especially
helpful in the short periods after dawn and before
sunset. Fully functional daytime running lamps
are required on all vehicles first sold in Canada.
The DRL system will make the turn signal lamps
come on when the following conditions are met:
• It is still daylight and the ignition is on,
• the automatic lights are enabled, and
• the transmission is not in PARK (P).
When DRL are on, only your front turn signal
lamps will be on. No other exterior lamps will be
on when the DRL are being used. Your instrument
panel will not be lit.
216
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
An AUTOMATIC LIGHTS OFF message will
appear on the DIC, showing that automatic lighting
has been disabled.
Fog Lamps
Use the fog lamps for better vision in foggy or
misty conditions.
As with any vehicle, you should turn on the
regular headlamp system when you need it.
The fog lamp controls are located on the turn
signal/multifunction lever.
Light Sensor
-(Fog Lamps): The band with this symbol is
used to turn the fog lamps on and off.
The parking lamps must be on for the fog lamps
to work.
To turn the fog lamps on, turn the fog lamp band
on the lever up to the dot and release it. The
band will return to its original position.
To turn the fog lamps off, turn the fog lamp band
up to the dot and release it. The band will
return to its original position, and the fog lamps
will turn off. If the high-beam headlamps are turned
on, the fog lamps will also turn off. They will turn
back on again when you switch back to low-beam
headlamps.
The light sensor for the DRL is located on top of
the instrument panel. If you cover the sensor, it will
read dark, and the exterior lamps may come on
when you do not need them.
Some localities have laws that require the
headlamps to be on along with the fog lamps.
217
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
With Twilight Sentinel® the following will happen:
Twilight Sentinel®
Twilight Sentinel® can turn your lamps on and off
for you.
• When it is dark enough outside, the front
turn signal lamps (DRL) will go off, and
the headlamps and parking lamps will come
on. The other lamps that come on with
headlamps will also come on.
• When it is bright enough outside, the
headlamps will go off, and the front turn signal
lamps (DRL) will come on, as long as the
exterior lamp switch is in the off position.
If you start your vehicle in a dark garage, the
automatic headlamp system will come on
immediately. Once you leave the garage, it will
take about one minute for the automatic headlamp
system to change to DRL if it is light outside.
During that delay, the instrument panel cluster
might not be as bright as usual. Make sure
the instrument panel brightness control is in full
bright position. See Instrument Panel Brightness
on page 220 for more information.
A light sensor on top of the instrument panel
makes the Twilight Sentinel® work, so be sure it is
not covered.
You can idle the vehicle with the lamps off, even
when it is dark outside. First set the parking
brake while the ignition is in OFF/ACCESSORY.
Then start the vehicle. The lamps will stay off until
the parking brake is released.
218
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Twilight Sentinel® also provides exterior
illumination as you leave the vehicle. If Twilight
Sentinel® has turned on the lamps when you turn
off the ignition, the lamps will remain on until:
Exterior Lighting Battery Saver
If the parking lamps or headlamps have been
left on, the exterior lamps will turn off about
10 minutes after the ignition is turned off. This
protects against draining the battery in case you
have accidentally left the headlamps or parking
lamps on. The battery saver does not work if the
headlamps are turned on after the ignition is
turned off.
• The exterior lamp switch is moved from off to
the parking lamp position.
• A delay time that you select has elapsed.
the delay time that you want. You can also
select no delay time.
If you need to leave the lamps on for more than
10 minutes, use the exterior lamp control to
turn the lamps back on.
If the ignition is turned off with the exterior lamp
switch in the parking lamp or headlamp position,
the Twilight Sentinel® delay will not occur.
The lamps will turn off as soon as the switch is
turned off.
As with any vehicle, the regular headlamp system
should be turned on when needed.
219
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel Brightness
Entry Lighting
The entry lighting system turns on the reading and
dome lamps and the backlighting to the exterior
lamp control when a door is opened or if you
press the remote keyless entry transmitter
unlock button. If activated by the transmitter, the
lighting will remain active for about 25 seconds.
The entry lighting system uses the light sensor; it
must be dark outside in order for the lamps to
turn on. The lamps turn off about 25 seconds after
the last door is closed. They will dim to off if the
ignition is on, or immediately deactivate if the
power locks are activated.
This feature controls the
brightness of the
instrument panel lights.
Base Level Shown,
Uplevel Similar
Parade Dimming
This feature prohibits dimming of the instrument
panel displays and backlighting during daylight
hours when the key is in the ignition and the
headlamps are on. This feature operates with the
light sensor and is fully automatic. When the
light sensor reads darkness outside and the
parking lamps are active, the instrument panel
displays can be adjusted by turning the instrument
panel brightness knob. See Instrument Panel
Press in the center knob on the DIC control panel
until the knob pops out. Then turn the knob
clockwise to brighten the lights or counterclockwise
to dim them. If you turn the knob completely
clockwise, the interior lamps will turn on.
220
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the battery continues to discharge, even with the
engine idling at a higher rpm setting, some
electrical loads will automatically be reduced.
When this occurs, the rear window defogger may
take slightly longer to clear the glass and the
fan may cut back to a lower speed. For more
battery saving information, see “Battery Saver
Active Message” under DIC Warnings and
Reading Lamps
The reading lamps are located on the overhead
console. These lamps come on automatically when
any door is opened.
For manual operation, press the button next to
each lamp to turn it on or off.
If the reading lamps are left on, they automatically
shut off 10 minutes after the ignition has been
turned off.
Electric Power Management
Battery Load Management
The vehicle has Electric Power Management (EPM)
that estimates the battery’s temperature and state
of charge. It then adjusts the voltage for best
performance and extended life of the battery.
The battery load management feature is designed
to monitor the vehicle’s electrical load and
determine when the battery is in a heavy discharge
condition. During times of high electrical loading,
the engine may idle at a higher
revolutions per minute (rpm) setting than normal to
make sure the battery charges. High electrical
loads may occur when several of the following are
on: headlamps, high beams, fog lamps, rear
window defogger, the climate control fan at high
speeds, heated seats and engine cooling fans.
When the battery’s state of charge is low, the
voltage is raised slightly to quickly put the charge
back in. When the state of charge is high, the
voltage is lowered slightly to prevent overcharging.
If the vehicle has a voltmeter gage or voltage
display on the Driver Information Center (DIC), you
may see the voltage move up or down. This is
normal. If there is a problem, an alert will be
displayed.
221
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The battery can be discharged at idle if the
electrical loads are very high. This is true for all
vehicles. This is because the generator (alternator)
may not be spinning fast enough at idle to
produce all the power that is needed for very high
electrical loads.
Normally, these actions occur in steps or levels,
without being noticeable. In rare cases at the
highest levels of corrective action, this action may
be noticeable to the driver. If so, a Driver
Information Center (DIC) message might be
displayed, such as Battery Saver Active or Service
Battery Charging System. If this message is
displayed, it is recommended that the driver
reduce the electrical loads as much as possible.
A high electrical load occurs when several of the
following loads are on: headlamps, high beams,
fog lamps, rear window defogger, climate
control fan at high speed, heated seats, engine
cooling fans, trailer loads, and loads plugged into
accessory power outlets.
Inadvertent Power Battery Saver
EPM works to prevent excessive discharge of the
battery. It does this by balancing the generator’s
output and the vehicle’s electrical needs. It
can increase engine idle speed to generate more
power, whenever needed. It can temporarily
reduce the power demands of some accessories.
This feature is designed to protect your vehicle’s
battery against drainage from the interior
lamps, trunk lamp, glove box lamp, or the garage
door opener. When the ignition is turned off,
the power to these features will automatically turn
off after 10 minutes (three minutes if a new car
has 15 miles (24 km) or less). Power will be
restored for an additional 10 minutes if any door is
opened, the trunk is opened or the courtesy
lamp switch is turned on.
222
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• High-Beam Indicator Symbol
Head-Up Display (HUD)
• Driver Shift Control Transmission Feature,
page 116
{CAUTION:
• Check Gages Icon
If the HUD image is too bright, or too high
in your field of view, it may take you more
time to see things you need to see when it
is dark outside. Be sure to keep the HUD
image dim and placed low in your field
of view.
• Adaptive Cruise Control Features and
Indicators (If Equipped), see Adaptive Cruise
Control on page 197
• Forward Collision Alert Features and
Indicators (If Equipped), see Forward Collision
Alert (FCA) System on page 184
• Radio Features
If equipped, the Head-Up Display (HUD) allows
you to see some of the driver information that
appears on your instrument panel cluster on the
windshield.
The information may be displayed in English or
metric units and appears as an image focused out
toward the front of your vehicle. To change
from English to metric units, see DIC Controls and
The HUD consists of the following information:
• Speedometer
United States version shown, Canada similar
• Turn Signal Indicators
223
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Be sure to continue scanning your displays,
controls and driving environment just as you would
in a vehicle without HUD. If you never look at your
instrument panel cluster, you may not see
something important, such as a warning light.
Under important warning conditions, the CHECK
GAGES message will display in the HUD. View
your Driver Information Center (DIC) for more
information.
You can also adjust the brightness of the HUD
image. Press the knob on the center of the
DIC control panel in until it pops out and then pull
the knob until is completely extended. Turn the
knob clockwise or counter-clockwise to increase or
decrease the brightness. If you turn the knob all
the way to the left, the HUD image will turn off.
To adjust the HUD so you can see it properly,
do the following:
The HUD controls are
located to the left of the
steering wheel on the
DIC control panel.
1. Adjust the seat to a comfortable driving
position. If you change your seat position later,
you may have to re-adjust your HUD.
2. Start your engine and press the top or bottom
of the HUD button to center the HUD image in
your view.
The HUD image can only be adjusted up and
down, not side-to-side.
3. Turn the knob on the DIC control panel to
adjust the brightness of the HUD image.
The brightness of the HUD image is determined
by the light conditions in the direction your vehicle
is facing and where you have the HUD set.
If you are facing a dark object or a heavily shaded
area, your HUD may anticipate that you are
entering a dark area and may begin to dim.
~(Head-Up Display): Press this button to
change the position of the HUD on the windshield.
Press the top part of the button to move the
HUD image up. Press the bottom part of the button
to move the HUD image down.
224
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To turn the HUD image off, turn the knob
counter-clockwise.
• The HUD image is adjusted to the
proper height.
Polarized sunglasses could make the HUD image
harder to see.
As light shines out from the HUD, it is possible for
light to shine back in. In rare occurrences,
when the sun is at a specific angle and position,
the sun’s rays can shine back into the HUD. When
this occurs, the display device within the HUD
will be temporarily illuminated. The event will end
when the vehicle’s angle to the sun changes.
Clean the inside of the windshield as needed to
remove any dirt or film that reduces the sharpness
or clarity of the HUD image.
To clean the HUD, spray household glass cleaner
on a soft, clean cloth. Wipe the HUD lens gently,
then dry it.
Notice: When cleaning, be careful not to
scratch the HUD or camera lenses. Do
not spray glass cleaner directly on the HUD
lens because the cleaner could leak inside the
unit and cause damage.
• Ambient light in the direction your vehicle is
facing is low.
Keep in mind that your windshield is part of the
HUD system. See Windshield Replacement
on page 419.
The following Adaptive Cruise Control message
may appear in the HUD:
PEDAL APPLIED ACC OVERRIDE: This
message indicates that you are pressing your
foot on the accelerator pedal and overriding
Adaptive Cruise Control. While you are doing
this, the system will not automatically apply the
brakes. Once you remove your foot from the
accelerator pedal, Adaptive Cruise Control will
return to normal operation and be able to apply
the brakes, if needed.
You may also see an Adaptive Cruise Control
active symbol, alert symbol or vehicle ahead
for more information.
If the ignition is on and you cannot see the HUD
image, check to see if:
• Something is covering the HUD unit.
• The brightness is adjusted properly.
225
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ultrasonic Rear Parking
Assist (URPA)
CAUTION: (Continued)
The Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA)
system is designed to help you park while the
vehicle is in REVERSE (R). It operates only at very
low speeds, less than 3 mph (5 km/h). URPA
can help make parking easier and help you avoid
colliding with objects such as parked vehicles.
The URPA system can detect objects up to
5 feet (1.5 m) behind the vehicle, and tell you how
close these objects are from your rear bumper.
• Detect objects that are below the
bumper, underneath the vehicle, or
that are very close to the vehicle.
• Detect children, pedestrians,
bicyclists, or pets.
So if you do not use proper care before
backing up, you could hit a vehicle, child,
pedestrian, bicyclist, or pet, resulting in
vehicle damage, injury, or death. Even
though the vehicle has the URPA system,
always check carefully before backing up
by checking behind your vehicle.
{CAUTION:
The Ultrasonic Rear Park Assist (URPA)
system does not replace driver vision.
URPA does not:
•
Operate above speeds of 3 mph (5 km/h).
• Detect objects more than 5 feet
(1.5 meters) behind the vehicle.
This distance may be less during
warmer or humid weather.
CAUTION: (Continued)
226
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The URPA display is
located inside the
vehicle, above the
rear window. It has
three color-coded lights
that can be seen
through the rearview
mirror or by turning
around.
If an object is detected at a REVERSE (R) speed
of less than 3 mph (5 km/h), one of the following
will occur:
Description
Amber light
Amber/amber lights
English
5 ft
40 in
Metric
1.5 m
1.0 m
Amber/amber/red lights &
continuous chime
20 in
0.5 m
Amber/amber/red lights
flashing & continuous
chime
1 ft
0.3 m
How the System Works
A chime will sound the first time an object is
detected between 20 inches (0.5 m) and
5 feet (1.5 m) away.
URPA comes on automatically when the shift lever
is moved into REVERSE (R) and the vehicle
speed is less than 3 mph (5 km/h). When
the system turns on, the three lights on the display
will illuminate for one and a half seconds to let
you know that the system is working. If your
vehicle is moving in REVERSE (R) at a speed
greater than 3 mph (5 km/h), the red light will flash
to remind you that the system does not work at
a speed greater than 3 mph (5 km/h).
URPA cannot detect objects that are above trunk
level. In order for the rear sensors to recognize
an object, it must be within detection range behind
the vehicle.
227
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the System Does Not Seem to Work
Properly
Accessory Power Outlet(s)
Your vehicle is equipped with accessory power
outlets. The outlets can be used to plug in
electrical equipment such as a cellular telephone,
CB radio, etc.
The light may flash red when the vehicle is in
REVERSE (R), if the ultrasonic sensors are not
kept clean. So be sure to keep your rear bumper
free of mud, dirt, snow, ice and slush. Other
conditions that may affect system performance
include things like the vibrations from a jackhammer
or the compression of air brakes on a very large
truck. If after cleaning the rear bumper and then
driving forward at least 15 mph (25 km/h), the
display continues to flash red, see your dealer.
Your vehicle has one outlet in front of the center
console, one in the center console lid and
there may be an additional outlet in the rear of the
center console.
Your vehicle may have a small cap that must be
removed to access the accessory power outlet. If it
does, when not using the outlet be sure to cover
it with the protective cap.
If a trailer was attached to your vehicle, or a
bicycle or an object was hanging out of your trunk
during your last drive cycle, the light may also
flash red. The light will continue to flash whenever
in REVERSE (R) until your vehicle is driven
forward at least 15 mph (25 km/h) without any
obstructions behind the vehicle.
Notice: Leaving electrical equipment plugged
in for an extended period of time while the
vehicle is off will drain the battery. Power is
always supplied to the outlets. Always unplug
electrical equipment when not in use and
do not plug in equipment that exceeds
the maximum 20 ampere rating.
For cleaning instructions, see Washing Your
228
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Certain accessory power plugs may not be
compatible to the accessory power outlet and
could result in blown vehicle or adapter fuses. If
you experience a problem, see your dealer
for additional information on the accessory
power outlets.
Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter
Your vehicle may have an ashtray and
cigarette lighter.
Notice: If you put papers, pins, or other
flammable items in the ashtray, hot cigarettes
or other smoking materials could ignite
them and possibly damage your vehicle. Never
put flammable items in the ashtray.
Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to
your vehicle may damage it or keep other
components from working as they should. The
repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Do not use equipment exceeding
maximum amperage rating of 20 amperes.
Check with your dealer before adding electrical
equipment.
Ashtray
The ashtray is located under the climate control
panel on the center console. Press on the door to
release the ashtray. The ashtray will automatically
slide open for use.
Follow the proper installation instructions that are
included with any electrical equipment you install.
To empty the ashtray with the ashtray in full open
position, locate the release button to the right
of the ash receiver and slide it to the right (in the
direction of the arrow). The ash receiver will
unlock and lift slightly and can then be easily
removed from the housing. To replace the
ash receiver, place it into position in the ashtray
housing and push down firmly until it locks
into place.
Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can
cause damage not covered by your warranty.
Do not hang any type of accessory or
accessory bracket from the plug because the
power outlets are designed for accessory
power plugs only.
229
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cigarette Lighter
Climate Controls
Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while it
is heating will not allow the lighter to back
away from the heating element when it is hot.
Damage from overheating may occur to the
lighter or heating element, or a fuse could be
blown. Do not hold a cigarette lighter in
while it is heating. Do not use equipment
exceeding maximum amperage rating of
15 amperes.
Dual Climate Control System
With this system you can control the heating,
cooling, and ventilation for the vehicle.
Automatic Operation
The cigarette lighter is located next to the ashtray.
The vehicle does not have any cigarette lighters
for the rear seat passengers.
To activate the cigarette lighter, push it into the
heating element and let go. When the lighter
is ready it will pop back out by itself.
Vehicles With Heated and Ventilated Seats Shown,
Vehicles Without Similar
230
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUTO (Automatic): When this button is pressed
and the temperature is set, the system will
automatically control the inside temperature, the
air delivery mode, the air conditioning compressor,
and the fan speed. AUTO will appear on the
display next to the fan, mode indicators,
and recirculation indicator if your vehicle has a air
quality sensor.
In cold weather, the system can start at
reduced fan speeds to avoid blowing cold air
into the vehicle until warmer air is available.
The system starts out blowing air at the floor,
but can automatically change modes as
the vehicle warms up to maintain the chosen
temperature setting. The length of time
needed for warm up depends on the outside
temperature and the length of time that
has elapsed since the vehicle was last driven.
1. Press the AUTO button.
2. Adjust the temperature to a comfortable
setting, generally, between 70°F (21°C)
and 80°F (27°C).
3. Wait for the system to regulate. This may take
from 10 to 30 minutes. Then adjust the
temperature, if necessary.
Choosing the coldest or warmest temperature
setting will not cause the system to heat or
cool any faster. If the system is set at
the warmest temperature setting, the system
will try to continuously heat the vehicle
and will not adjust the system down as the
vehicle warms up.
You can switch from English to metric units
through the Driver Information Center (DIC). See
The air-conditioning system removes moisture
from the air, so some water might drip underneath
the vehicle while idling or after turning off the
engine. This is normal.
231
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The mode switch can also be used to select the
defog mode. Information on defogging and
defrosting can be found later in this section.
Manual Operation
yN z(Mode): Pressing the mode switch and
changing the mode cancels automatic operation
and allows the operator to manually select the air
delivery location. Press AUTO to return to
automatic operation.
yAz(Fan): Press this switch to increase or
decrease the fan speed. Pressing this switch
cancels automatic operation and allows the
operator to manually select the amount of airflow.
Press AUTO to return to automatic operation.
The outboard air outlets always receive airflow
regardless of the mode selected. See Outlet
from the outboard outlets.
To change the current mode, select one of the
following:
If the airflow seems low when the fan speed is at
the highest setting, the passenger compartment
air filter may need to be replaced. For more
information, see Passenger Compartment Air Filter
page 505.
Y(Vent): This mode directs air to the instrument
panel outlets.
h(Recirculation): Press this button to control
the air source for the climate control system. If
in AUTO mode, press this button once to
select recirculation. This mode keeps outside air
from coming in the vehicle and recirculates the air
in the vehicle. It can be used to prevent outside
air and odors from entering the vehicle or to
help cool the air inside the vehicle more quickly.
\(Bi-Level): This mode directs about half of the
air to the instrument panel outlets, and then
directs most of the remaining air to the floor
outlets. In automatic operation, cooler air is
directed to the upper outlets and warmer air to the
floor outlets.
[(Floor): This mode directs most of the air to
the floor outlets with some air directed to the
outboard outlets, and a little air directed to
the windshield and side windows.
232
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recirculation is not available in the defrost mode
and shuts off when defog mode is selected.
Both of these features are designed to limit fogging
in the vehicle. If recirculation is selected during
defog mode, it automatically turns off after
10 minutes to limit problems with fogging.
exhaust fumes from older, poorly running, or
diesel-equipped vehicles that are driving near you.
This sensor, when active, monitors the air
quality in front of your vehicle and switches to air
recirculation when poor quality air is detected
outside your vehicle. Press the AUTO button on
the climate control to activate the air quality
sensor. The word AUTO comes on the center of
the climate control display. While the air quality
sensor senses poor quality air, the recirculation
graphic displays.
In some conditions, using recirculation for long
periods of time can cause the air inside the vehicle
to become too dry or stuffy. To prevent this from
happening, after the air in the vehicle has
cooled, select AUTO to return to automatic climate
control operation or push the recirculation button
again to select outside air.
Under some conditions, the air quality sensor
system does not operate. In cold weather, the
system might not be active (even if AUTO is
displayed) because of concerns of fogging your
windows, which may occur by activating
Press this button a second time to select
outside air.
recirculation mode. Also, the air quality sensor
system does not remain in recirculation mode for
extended periods of time that could cause stuffy or
very dry conditions in the vehicle. Following a
poorly running vehicle for an extended period of
time may not keep recirculation active indefinitely.
:(Outside Air): This mode forces the system
to pull air from outside the vehicle. It can be
used to bring fresh air into the vehicle.
Air Quality Sensor: Your vehicle could have an
air quality sensor to help limit the climate
control system from pulling in some harmful
233
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The air quality sensor does not activate due to
organic odors, like skunk, and may not activate on
many chemical-related odors. If you wish to limit
these types of odors, manually select recirculation.
Your vehicle could also have a charcoal filter that
can limit many odors from being pulled into your
vehicle. This filter, like your engines air cleaner
filter, needs to be changed periodically. See
quality sensor system does not protect against
carbon monoxide (CO), which you cannot see or
different setting than the driver. Turn the knob to
increase or decrease the temperature for the
front passenger. Turning the passenger’s
side power button off will not shut off the climate
control system for the passenger. The system
is set to the same setting as the driver.
{(Ventilated Seat): Press this button, to turn on
the driver or passenger’s side ventilated seat, if
the vehicle has this feature. See Heated and
J(Heated Seat): Press this button, to turn on
the driver or passenger’s side heated seat
and seatback, if the vehicle has this feature. See
O(Power Driver’s Temperature): Press the
power button located on the driver’s side of
the climate control panel to turn the entire climate
control system on or off. Turn the knob to
increase or decrease the temperature inside the
vehicle.
^(Air Conditioning): Press this button to
manually turn off the air conditioning compressor.
Press AUTO to return to automatic operation or
press the A/C OFF button again. To limit fogging on
the windshield, the air conditioning compressor
cannot be off while in the defrost mode.
O(Power Passenger’s Temperature): Press
the power button located on the passenger’s side
of the climate control panel to turn the passenger’s
climate control system on if they wish to have a
234
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
selected temperature. The system may also
supply cooler air to the side of the vehicle facing
the sun. Do not cover the sensors or the automatic
climate control system will not work properly.
Sensors
Defogging and Defrosting
Fog on the inside of windows is a result of high
humidity (moisture) condensing on the cool window
glass. This can be minimized if the climate
control system is used properly. There are
two modes to clear fog from the windshield. Use
the defog mode to clear the windows of fog or
moisture and warm the passengers. Use the
defrost mode to remove fog or frost from the
windshield more quickly.
There is a solar sensor located on the instrument
panel, near the windshield.
yN z(Mode): Press this button until defog
appears on the display.
There is also an interior temperature sensor
located next to the steering wheel on the
instrument panel.
-(Defog): This mode directs the air between
the windshield and floor outlets with some
air supplied to the outboard panel outlets and side
window defogging outlets. When this mode is
selected, the system turns off recirculation
and runs the air-conditioning compressor unless
the outside temperature is at or below freezing.
These sensors monitor the solar radiation and the
air inside the vehicle, then use the information
to adjust the temperature, the fan speed and the
air delivery system, in order to maintain the
235
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The recirculation mode is cancelled when the
system enters the defog mode. If recirculation is
selected while in the defog mode, it is cancelled
after 10 minutes.
=(Rear Window Defogger): Press this button
to turn the rear window defogger on or off. Be
sure to clear as much snow from the rear window
as possible.
If there is fogging on the side windows, remain in
defog or defrost mode until they clear.
The rear window defogger turns off about
10 minutes after the button is pressed. If the
vehicle’s speed is above 30 mph (48 km/h), the
rear defogger stays on continuously. If turned
on again, the defogger only runs for about
five minutes before turning off. The defogger can
also be turned off by pressing the button again
or by turning off the engine.
0(Defrost): Press this button to direct most of
the air to the windshield, with some air directed
to the side windows and outboard panel outlets. In
this mode, the system automatically turns off
recirculation and runs the air-conditioning
compressor, unless the outside temperature is at
or below freezing. Recirculation cannot be
selected while in the defrost mode.
The heated outside rearview mirrors also heat to
help clear fog or frost from the surface of the
mirror when the rear window defogger is on. See
This mode can also cause the fan speed and air
temperature to increase.
Notice: Do not use a razor blade or sharp
object to clear the inside rear window. Do not
adhere anything to the defogger grid lines
in the rear glass. These actions may damage
the rear defogger. Repairs would not be
covered by your warranty.
Rear Window Defogger
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
remove fog or frost from the rear window.
The rear window defogger only works when the
ignition is on or during remote start, if
programmed. See “Personal Settings Menu” under
information.
236
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Outlet Adjustment
Rear Climate Control System
Use the lever located in the center of each outlet
to change the direction of the airflow, either
side-to-side or up and down. Use the thumbwheels
to open or close the outlets to adjust the airflow.
Turn the thumbwheel towards the center
console to open the outlets and allow the
maximum amount of air to enter your vehicle. Turn
the thumbwheel towards the vehicle door to
close the outlets and minimize the amount of air
entering the vehicle.
Your vehicle has a rear climate control system.
The base model includes air outlets in the rear of
the center console for cooling and under-seat
air outlets for heating. The temperature, quantity,
and air delivery location is controlled automatically
by the front climate control system.
Operation Tips
• Clear away any ice, snow or leaves from the
air inlets at the base of the windshield that
may block the flow of air into your vehicle.
• Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors may
adversely affect the performance of the system.
• Keep the path under the front seats clear of
objects to help circulate the air inside of your
vehicle more effectively.
Some vehicles are equipped with an optional
climate control panel for the rear passenger,
located on the back of the center console.
The left knob controls the temperature of the air to
the rear passengers. Turning the knob to the
left will make the air cooler. Turning the knob to
the right will make the air warmer.
• If the airflow seems low when the fan speed is
at the highest setting, the passenger
compartment air filter may need to be replaced.
For more information, see Passenger
237
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The right knob controls the air delivery to the rear
passengers. Turning the knob all the way to
the left will shut off airflow to the rear passengers.
Operating with the rear air delivery off may
make the entire vehicle warm or cool less quickly.
It may also increase the air rush sound of the
front system.
The amount of airflow to the rear passengers is
controlled automatically by the front climate control
system, regardless of optional equipment.
Airflow to the rear system will be turned off when
defrost is selected on the front climate control
panel to direct air to clear the windshield.
Vehicles equipped with a rear climate control
panel, also, have heated rear seats. There are
two buttons, each with three indicator lights,
located between the two climate control knobs on
the rear climate control panel, to control the
for additional information.
9(Off): This is the off position.
Y(Vent): This mode directs all the rear
passenger airflow to the outlets in the console.
This is the normal position for cool down
conditions.
Be sure to keep the area under the front seats
clear of any objects so the air in your vehicle can
circulate effectively.
\(Bi-Level): This mode directs airflow to the
console outlets and the floor.
[(Floor): This mode directs all of the airflow to
the floor. This is the normal position for warm
up conditions.
238
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Passenger Compartment Air Filter
Your vehicle may be equipped with a passenger
compartment air filter. There are two types of filters
available. There is a standard dust filter that
traps small particles including pollen. There is,
also, a dust/odor filter available that traps dust and
pollen and also uses a charcoal element to help
reduce many offensive odors from entering
your vehicle. Like your vehicle’s engine air
cleaner/filter, it will need to be changed
The access panel for the passenger compartment
air filter is located under the hood near the
windshield, on the passenger’s side of the vehicle.
for more information on location. See Doing
periodically. For information on how often to
change the passenger compartment air filter, see
Notice: Driving without a passenger
compartment air filter in place can cause water
and small particles, like paper and leaves, to
be pulled into your climate control system
which may cause damage to it. Make sure you
always replace the old filter with a new one.
information on doing your own service work.
239
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To access the passenger compartment air filter,
do the following:
1. Pull back the rubber hood seal from the edge
of the leaf screen vent cover.
2. Remove the three fasteners that hold the filter
access cover in place and slide the cover off.
3. To access the filter, remove the black plastic
water deflector by lifting the outboard edge of
the deflector to release the retention tab.
4. Lift the inboard edge of the deflector to
release the retention tab.
6. The top edge of the filter should be visible.
Reach in and lift the filter out, pulling upward
and toward the front of the vehicle.
5. Lift and slide the water deflector toward the
inboard side and remove it.
7. Insert the new air filter by sliding it back into
place. Make sure the arrow on the filter is
pointing toward the passenger compartment.
Reverse steps 1 through 3 to reinstall the water
deflector, filter cover and the hood seal.
240
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often
gages and warning lights work together to let you
know when there is a problem with your vehicle.
Warning Lights, Gages, and
Indicators
This part describes the warning lights and gages
that may be on your vehicle. The pictures will
help you locate them.
When one of the warning lights comes on and
stays on while you are driving, or when one of the
gages shows there may be a problem, check
the section that tells you what to do about
it. Waiting to do repairs can be costly – and even
dangerous. So please get to know your warning
lights and gages. They are a big help.
Warning lights and gages can signal that something
is wrong before it becomes serious enough to
cause an expensive repair or replacement. Paying
attention to the warning lights and gages could also
save you or others from injury.
Your vehicle also has a Driver Information
Center (DIC) that works along with the
warning lights and gages. See Driver Information
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As
you will see in the details on the next few
pages, some warning lights come on briefly when
you start the engine just to let you know they
are working. If you are familiar with this section,
you should not be alarmed when this happens.
241
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel Cluster
The instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You will
know how fast you are going, how much fuel you are using and many of the other things you will need
to know to drive safely and economically.
United States Base version shown, Canada and Uplevel similar
242
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Speedometer and Odometer
Safety Belt Reminder Light
Your speedometer lets you see your speed in
both miles per hour (mph) and kilometers per
hour (km/h). See “MPH (km)” under DIC Controls
The odometer mileage can be checked without the
vehicle running. Your vehicle’s odometer works
together with the driver information center.
You can set a Trip A and a Trip B odometer. See
“Trip Information” under DIC Controls and
When the ignition button is pressed to START, a
chime will be provided for several seconds to
remind people to buckle their safety belts. The
driver safety belt light will also be provided and stay
on for several seconds, then it will flash for several
more. You should buckle your seat belt.
This chime and light will
be repeated if the driver
remains unbuckled
and the vehicle
If your vehicle ever needs a new odometer
installed, the new one will be set to the correct
mileage total of the old odometer.
is in motion.
Tachometer
If the driver’s belt is buckled, neither the chime nor
the light will be provided.
This gage indicates
the engine speed
in revolutions
per minute (rpm).
243
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Passenger Safety Belt
Reminder Light
Airbag Readiness Light
There is an airbag readiness light on the
instrument panel, which shows the airbag symbol.
The system checks the airbag’s electrical
system for malfunctions. The light tells you if there
is an electrical problem. The system check
includes the airbag sensors, the airbag modules,
the wiring and the diagnostic module. For
more information on the airbag system, see Airbag
Several seconds after the ignition button is
pressed to START, a chime will sound for several
seconds to remind the front passenger to
buckle their safety belt. This would only occur if
the passenger airbag is enabled. See Passenger
The passenger safety belt light will also come
on and stay on for several seconds, then it
will flash for several more.
This light will come on
when you start your
vehicle, and it will flash
for a few seconds.
Then the light should go
out. This means the
system is ready.
This chime and light will
be repeated if the
passenger remains
unbuckled and
the vehicle is in motion.
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you
start the vehicle or comes on when you are driving,
your airbag system may not work properly.
Have your vehicle serviced right away.
If the passenger’s safety belt is buckled, neither
the chime nor the light will come on.
244
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
{CAUTION:
Your vehicle has the passenger sensing system.
Your overhead console has a passenger airbag
status indicator.
If the airbag readiness light stays on after
you start your vehicle, it means the airbag
system may not be working properly. The
airbags in your vehicle may not inflate in
a crash, or they could even inflate without
a crash. To help avoid injury to yourself
or others, have your vehicle serviced right
away if the airbag readiness light stays on
after you start your vehicle.
United States
Canada
The indicator next to the passenger airbag status
indicator lights is the passenger safety belt
reminder light. See Passenger Safety Belt
on that indicator.
If there is a problem with the airbag system in
your vehicle, the SERVICE AIR BAG message will
appear on the DIC display. See DIC Warnings
When the vehicle is running, the passenger airbag
status indicator will light ON and OFF, or the
symbol for on and off, for several seconds as a
system check. Then, after several more seconds,
the status indicator will light either ON or OFF, or
either the on or off symbol, to let you know the
status of the right front passenger’s frontal airbag.
245
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the
passenger airbag status indicator, it means that
the right front passenger’s frontal airbag is enabled
(may inflate).
Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodate
a rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sun
visor says, “Never put a rear-facing child seat
in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
If the on indicator comes on when you have
a rear-facing child restraint installed in the
right front passenger’s seat, it means that
the passenger sensing system has not
turned off the passenger’s frontal airbag.
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can
be seriously injured or killed if the right
front passenger’s airbag inflates. This is
because the back of the rear-facing child
restraint would be very close to the
Even though the passenger sensing
system is designed to turn off the
passenger’s frontal airbag if the system
detects a rear-facing child restraint, no
system is fail-safe, and no one can
guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
under some unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off. We recommend
that rear-facing child restraints be secured
in the rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
inflating airbag. Do not use a rear-facing
child restraint in the right front passenger’s
seat if the airbag is turned on.
246
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the
airbag status indicator, it means that the
Charging System Light
passenger sensing system has turned off the right
front passenger’s frontal airbag. See Passenger
including important safety information.
When you turn the
engine on, this light
will come on briefly
to show that the
generator and battery
charging systems are
working properly.
If, after several seconds, all status indicator lights
remain on, or if there are no lights at all, there
may be a problem with the lights or the passenger
sensing system. See your dealer for service.
If this light stays on, your vehicle needs service.
You should take your vehicle to the dealer at once.
To save your battery until you get there, turn off
page 258 for more information.
{CAUTION:
If the off indicator and the airbag
readiness light ever come on together, it
means that something may be wrong with
the airbag system. If this ever happens,
have the vehicle serviced promptly,
because an adult-size person sitting in the
right front passenger seat may not have
the protection of the frontal airbag. See
247
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the ignition is on, the brake system warning
light will also come on when you set your
parking brake. The light will stay on if your parking
brake does not release fully. If it stays on after
your parking brake is fully released, it means you
have a brake problem.
Brake System Warning Light
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided
into two parts. If one part isn’t working, the
other part can still work and stop you. For good
braking, though, you need both parts working well.
If the warning light comes on, there is a brake
problem. Have your brake system inspected
right away.
If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off
the road and stop carefully. You may notice
that the pedal is harder to push, or the pedal may
go closer to the floor. It may take longer to
stop. If the light is still on, have the vehicle towed
page 355.
{CAUTION:
United States
Canada
Your brake system may not be working
properly if the brake system warning light
is on. Driving with the brake system
warning light on can lead to an accident.
If the light is still on after you have pulled
off the road and stopped carefully, have
the vehicle towed for service.
This light should come on briefly when you turn
the engine on. If it does not come on then, have it
fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a
problem.
248
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
warning light is also on, you do not have anti-lock
brakes and there is a problem with your regular
page 248 for more information.
Anti-Lock Brake System
Warning Light
With the Anti-Lock
The ABS warning light should come on briefly
when you turn the ignition on. If the light does not
come on then, have it fixed so it will be ready
to warn you if there is a problem.
Brake System (ABS),
this light will come
on when your engine is
started and may stay
on for several seconds.
That is normal.
Low Tire Pressure Warning Light
If the ABS warning light comes on and stays on,
there may be a problem with the antilock portion of
the brake system. If the brake system warning
light is not on, you still have brakes, but you do not
have antilock brakes. See Brake System Warning
This light will come on
briefly as you start the
engine, for vehicles
equipped with the
Tire Pressure
Monitor System.
If the light stays on, press the ignition Acc. button.
If the light comes on when you are driving, stop
as soon as possible and turn the ignition off.
Then start the engine again to reset the system.
If the light still stays on, or comes on again
while you are driving, your vehicle needs service.
If the regular brake system warning light is not
on, you still have brakes, but you do not have
anti-lock brakes. If the regular brake system
This light will also come on when one or more of
your tires are significantly underinflated.
249
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A CHECK TIRE PRESSURE DIC message will
accompany the light. Stop and check your tires as
soon as it is safe to do so. If underinflated,
inflate to the proper pressure. See Tires for more
information. This light will flash for approximately
60 seconds and then turn on solid if a problem
is detected with the Tire Pressure Monitor system.
The TC warning light will come on briefly when
you turn the engine on. If it does not come on then,
have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if
there is a problem.
The light will also come on if you turn the traction
control system off using the TC on/off button
located on the console.
If the TC warning light stays on or comes on while
you are driving, pull off the road as soon as
possible and stop carefully. Turn your engine off
and then restart it. If the light still stays on or
comes back on again while you are driving, your
vehicle needs service. Have the traction control
system inspected as soon as possible. See
information.
Traction Control System (TCS)
Warning Light
If the Traction
Control (TC) warning
light comes on and
stays on, there may be
a problem with the
traction control system.
page 325 for more information.
250
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Coolant Temperature
Warning Light
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
This gage shows the
engine coolant
temperature.
The engine coolant
temperature warning
light will come on when
the engine is very hot.
This light will also come on briefly when the
vehicle is started.
It can be used to see when your engine has
warmed up and to make sure your cooling system
is operating properly. If the gage pointer moves
into the shaded area, the engine coolant is too hot
and the engine coolant temperature warning
page 393 for more information.
If the light does not go out or comes on and stays
on while driving, there may be a problem with
the cooling system. Driving with engine coolant
temperature light on could cause your vehicle
to overheat, see Overheated Engine Protection
251
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with
this light on, after awhile, the emission controls
might not work as well, your vehicle’s fuel
economy might not be as good, and the engine
might not run as smoothly. This could lead
to costly repairs that might not be covered by
your warranty.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Check Engine Light
Your vehicle has a
computer which
monitors operation of
the fuel, ignition,
and emission control
systems.
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,
transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel system
of your vehicle or the replacement of the
original tires with other than those of the same
Tire Performance Criteria (TPC) can affect
your vehicle’s emission controls and can cause
this light to come on. Modifications to these
systems could lead to costly repairs not
covered by your warranty. This could also
result in a failure to pass a required Emission
Inspection/Maintenance test. See Accessories
This system is called OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended
to assure that emissions are at acceptable
levels for the life of the vehicle, helping to produce
a cleaner environment. The check engine light
comes on to indicate that there is a problem and
service is required. Malfunctions often will be
indicated by the system before any problem is
apparent. This may prevent more serious damage
to your vehicle. This system is also designed to
assist your service technician in correctly
diagnosing any malfunction.
252
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This light should come on briefly, as a check to
show you it is working, as you start the engine. If
the light does not come on, have it repaired.
This light will also come on during a malfunction in
one of two ways:
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do
so, stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park
your vehicle. Turn the engine off, wait at
least 10 seconds and restart the engine. If the
light remains on steady, see “If the Light Is
On Steady” following. If the light is still flashing,
follow the previous steps, and see your dealer for
service as soon as possible.
• Light Flashing — A misfire condition has
been detected. A misfire increases vehicle
emissions and may damage the emission
control system on your vehicle. Diagnosis and
service may be required.
If the Light Is On Steady
You also may be able to correct the emission
system malfunction by considering the following:
• Light On Steady — An emission control
system malfunction has been detected on your
vehicle. Diagnosis and service may be
required.
Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully
The diagnostic system can determine if the
fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed.
A loose or missing fuel cap will allow fuel to
evaporate into the atmosphere. A few driving trips
with the cap properly installed should turn the
light off.
If the Light Is Flashing
The following may prevent more serious damage
to your vehicle:
• Reducing vehicle speed
• Avoiding hard accelerations
• Avoiding steep uphill grades
If the light stops flashing and remains on steady,
see “If the Light Is On Steady” following.
253
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance
Programs
If so, your vehicle’s electrical system may be wet.
The condition will usually be corrected when
the electrical system dries out. A few driving trips
should turn the light off.
Some state/provincial and local governments have
or may begin programs to inspect the emission
control equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass
this inspection could prevent you from getting a
vehicle registration.
Have you recently changed brands of fuel?
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel.
quality will cause the engine not to run as
efficiently as designed. You may notice this as
stalling after start-up, stalling when you put
the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation on
acceleration, or stumbling on acceleration. (These
conditions may go away once the engine is
warmed up.) This will be detected by the system
and cause the light to turn on.
Here are some things you need to know to help
your vehicle pass an inspection:
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the
check engine light is on or not working properly.
To perform a check engine light bulb check with the
keyless ignition, make sure the transmitter fob is in
the passenger compartment. See Ignition Positions
on page 111. Press the bottom of the Acc. button
on the instrument panel and hold the button down
for five seconds. The instrument panel, including
the check engine light, will light up and the ignition
will be on, but the engine will not start — if you
press the bottom of the Acc. button only briefly, less
than five seconds, the accessory power mode will
be turned on, but not the ignition. After the bulb
check, be sure to press and release the Acc. button
again to turn the ignition off and avoid draining the
vehicle’s battery.
If you experience one or more of these conditions,
change the fuel brand you use. It will require at
least one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the
light off.
If none of the above steps have made the light
turn off, your dealer can check the vehicle.
Your dealer has the proper test equipment and
diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical
problems that may have developed.
254
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD
(on-board diagnostic) system determines that
critical emission control systems have not been
completely diagnosed by the system. The vehicle
would be considered not ready for inspection.
This can happen if you have recently replaced the
battery or if the battery has run down. The
diagnostic system is designed to evaluate critical
emission control systems during normal driving.
This may take several days of routine driving. If you
have done this and your vehicle still does not pass
the inspection for lack of OBD system readiness,
your dealer can prepare the vehicle for inspection.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance
may damage the engine. The repairs would
not be covered by your warranty. Always follow
the maintenance schedule in this manual for
changing engine oil.
If equipped, this light
tells you if there could be
a problem with your
engine oil pressure.
This light will come on briefly when you start your
engine. That is a check to be sure the light
works. If it does not come on, be sure to have it
fixed so it will be there to warn you if something
goes wrong.
Oil Pressure Light
{CAUTION:
When the light comes on and stays on, it means
that oil is not flowing through your engine properly.
You could be low on oil and you might have
some other system problem.
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is
low. If you do, your engine can become so
hot that it catches fire. You or others could
be burned. Check your oil as soon as
possible and have your vehicle serviced.
255
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Security Light
Lights On Reminder
For information
This light comes on
whenever the parking
lamps are on.
regarding this light,
see Theft-Deterrent
more information.
Fog Lamp Light
The fog lamp light will
come on when the fog
lamps are in use.
Cruise Control Light
This light comes on
whenever you set your
cruise control.
The light will go out when the fog lamps are
more information.
The light will go out when the cruise control is
more information.
256
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the fuel supply gets low, the Fuel Level Low
message will appear on the DIC and a single
chime will sound. See DIC Warnings and
Highbeam On Light
This light comes on
whenever the
high-beam headlamps
are on.
Here are a few concerns some owners have had
about the fuel gage. All of these situations are
normal and do not indicate that anything is wrong
with the fuel gage:
• At the gas station the gas pump shuts off
before the gage reads full.
See “Intellibeam™ Intelligent High-Beam
• The gage may change when you turn, stop
quickly or accelerate quickly.
• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill the tank
than the gage indicated. For example, the gage
may have indicated that the tank was half full,
but it actually took a little more or less than half
the tank’s capacity to fill the tank.
Fuel Gage
The fuel gage shows
approximately how
much fuel is in the tank.
It works only when
the engine is on.
257
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
the center. See Automatic Transmission Operation
on page 116 for more information on the shift
lever positions.
Driver Information Center (DIC)
The Driver Information Center (DIC) gives you the
status of many of your vehicle’s systems. The DIC
is also used to display warning/status messages.
All messages will appear in the DIC display located
at the bottom of the instrument panel cluster, below
the tachometer and speedometer. The DIC buttons
are located on the instrument panel, to the left of
the steering wheel.
When the sport mode is active, an S will appear
next to the shift position indicator on the center of
the DIC display. When the manual mode is
active, an M will appear on the DIC display. When
the normal mode is active, only the shift position
indicator will appear. While the Driver Shift
Control (DSC) feature is active, the DIC will
change to show the selected gear. See “Driver
Shift Control (DSC)” under Automatic Transmission
The DIC comes on when the ignition is on. After a
short delay, the DIC will display the current
driver and the information that was last displayed
before the engine was turned off.
If a problem is detected, a warning message will
appear on the display. Be sure to take any
message that appears on the display seriously and
remember that clearing the message will only make
the message disappear, not correct the problem.
The top line of the DIC display shows the vehicle
system information and the warning/status
messages. The bottom line of the DIC display
shows either the odometer, the trip odometer A or
the trip odometer B information on the left side.
Only one odometer can appear at a time. See “Trip
Information” under DIC Controls and Displays
on page 258 for information on changing the
display to show the odometer or trip odometer
information. The bottom line of the DIC display
also shows the outside temperature on the
right side and the shift lever position indicator in
DIC Controls and Displays
The Driver Information Center (DIC) has different
modes which can be accessed by pressing
the four DIC buttons located on the instrument
panel, to the left of the steering wheel.
258
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you have an STS-V, the DIC also has additional
vehicle information displays which include engine
boost, engine oil temperature, oil pressure, and
transmission fluid temperature.
DIC Buttons (Base Level)
If your vehicle does
not have a Head-Up
Display (HUD),
these are the
See “MPH (km)” later in this section for more
information on the digital speed display.
buttons for the DIC.
AB 3 00 (Trip Information): Press the top of
this button to scroll through the odometer, trip
odometer A and trip odometer B. Press and hold
the bottom of this button to reset each trip
odometer back to zero.
4// (Reset): Press this button to reset certain DIC
features and to acknowledge DIC warning
messages and clear them from the DIC display.
«4ª (Information): Press the top or bottom of
this button to scroll through the available vehicle
information displays which include digital
speed display, if your vehicle has this feature, fuel
range, fuel economy, fuel used, average speed,
timer, battery voltage, tire pressure, if your vehicle
has a Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) system, and
engine oil life, if your vehicle has this feature.
EM (English/Metric): Press this button to change
the display from English to metric.
259
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DIC Buttons (Uplevel)
«~ª (Head-Up Display): Press this button to
change the position of the HUD on the windshield.
Press the top part of the button to move the
HUD image up. Press the bottom part of the button
to move the HUD image down.
If your vehicle has a
HUD, these are the
buttons for the DIC.
To adjust the brightness of the HUD image, see
For information on adjusting the instrument panel
brightness, see Instrument Panel Brightness
on page 220.
4// (Reset): Press this button to reset certain DIC
features and to acknowledge DIC warning
messages and clear them from the DIC display.
«4ª (Information): Press the top or bottom of
this button to scroll through the available vehicle
information displays which include digital speed
display, if your vehicle has this feature, fuel range,
fuel economy, fuel used, average speed, timer,
battery voltage, tire pressure, if your vehicle has a
Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) system, engine oil life,
if your vehicle has this feature, and display units.
See “MPH (km)” later in this section for more
information on the digital speed display.
3 (Trip Information): Press this button
to scroll through the odometer, trip odometer A
and trip odometer B. To reset each trip odometer,
either press the reset button or press and hold
the trip information button until the trip odometer
displayed returns to zero.
260
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your vehicle is low on fuel, the Fuel Level Low
message will be displayed. See “Fuel Level
page 264 for more information.
Information Display Menu Items
The following display menu items can be displayed
by pressing the information button.
MPH (km/h)
MPG AVG (L/100 km AVG)
If your vehicle has this display, it shows the
vehicle’s speed digitally in either miles per
hour (mph) or kilometers per hour (km/h).
This display shows the approximate average
miles per gallon (mpg) or liters per 100 kilometers
(L/100 km). This number is calculated based
on the number of mpg (L/100 km) recorded since
the last time this display was reset. To reset
MPG AVG, press the reset button. The display
will return to zero.
MILES RANGE (km RANGE)
This display shows the approximate number of
remaining miles (mi) or kilometers (km) you
can drive without refilling the fuel tank. This
estimate is based on the current driving conditions
and will change if the driving conditions change.
For example, if you are driving in traffic making
frequent stops, the display may read one number,
but if you enter the freeway, the number may
change even though you still have the same
amount of fuel in the fuel tank. This is because
different driving conditions produce different
fuel economies. Generally, freeway driving
produces better fuel economy than city driving.
MPG INST (L/100 km INST)
This display shows the current fuel economy. This
number reflects only the fuel economy that the
vehicle has right now and will change frequently as
driving conditions change. Unlike average fuel
economy, this display cannot be reset.
GAL FUEL USED (L FUEL USED)
This display shows the number of gallons (gal) or
liters (L) of fuel used since the last reset of this
display. To reset GAL FUEL USED, press
Once the range drops below about 40 miles
(64 km) remaining, the display will show
LOW RANGE.
the reset button. The display will return to zero.
261
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
the display will have HIGH after it. Your vehicle’s
charging system regulates voltage based on
the state of the battery. The battery voltage may
fluctuate when viewing this information on the DIC.
page 247 for more information.
If there is a problem with the battery charging
system, the DIC may display a message. See DIC
more information.
AVG MPH (AVG km/h)
This display shows the average speed of the
vehicle in miles per hour (mph) or kilometers per
hour (km/h). This average is calculated based on
the various vehicle speeds recorded since the last
reset of this display. To reset AVG MPH, press the
reset button. The display will return to zero.
TIMER OFF
This display can be used like a stopwatch. You can
record the time it takes to travel from one point to
another. To access the timer, press the information
button until 00:00:00 TIMER OFF displays. To turn
on the timer, press the reset button until TIMER ON
displays. The timer will then start. To turn off the
timer, press the reset button again until TIMER OFF
displays. The timer will stop and display the end
timing value. To reset the timer, press and hold the
reset button after the timer has been stopped. The
display will return to zero.
Tire Pressure
If your vehicle has a Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)
system, this display shows the air pressure of
each road tire in either pounds per square
inch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa). If the tire pressure
is normal, the value will display. If the tire
pressure is low, LOW will appear on the display
with the value. If the tire pressure is high,
HIGH will appear on the display with the value.
Press the information button to scroll through the
following displays:
BATTERY VOLTS
This display shows the current battery voltage.
If the voltage is in the normal range, the value will
display. For example, the display may read
13.2 BATTERY VOLTS. If the voltage is low, the
display will have LOW after it. If the voltage is high,
LF TIRE: This display shows the air pressure in
the driver’s side front tire.
RF TIRE: This display shows the air pressure in
the passenger’s side front tire.
262
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LR TIRE: This display shows the air pressure in
After an oil change, reset the ENGINE OIL LIFE
page 383. The display will show 100% ENGINE OIL
LIFE after it has been reset. Also clear the
CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message from the
display.
the driver’s side rear tire.
RR TIRE: This display shows the air pressure in
the passenger’s side rear tire.
If the tire pressure display shows dashes instead
of a value, there may be a problem with your
vehicle. If this consistently occurs, see your dealer
for service.
ENGLISH DISPLAY UNITS
(METRIC DISPLAY UNITS)
This display allows you to select between English
and metric units of measurement if your vehicle
has the uplevel DIC. Press the reset button
to switch between English and metric units.
ENGINE OIL LIFE
If your vehicle has this display, it shows the
estimated oil life remaining. If you see
99% ENGINE OIL LIFE on the display, that means
that 99% of the current oil life remains.
Blank Line
This display shows no information.
When the oil life is depleted, the CHANGE
ENGINE OIL SOON message will appear on the
display. Change the oil as soon as possible.
In addition to the engine oil life system
monitoring the oil life, additional maintenance
is recommended in the Maintenance Schedule in
ENGINE BOOST (STS-V Only)
This display shows a graphic that indicates the
amount of boost the engine is receiving in
either pounds per square inch (psi) or
kilopascals (kPa).
ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE (STS-V Only)
This display shows the engine oil temperature
in either degrees Fahrenheit (°F) or degrees
Celsius (°C).
263
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For base level vehicles, each trip odometer can be
reset to zero separately by pressing and holding
the bottom of the trip information button while
the desired trip odometer is displayed. For uplevel
vehicles, reset each trip odometer by pressing
the reset button or by pressing and holding the trip
information button while the desired trip odometer
is displayed.
OIL PRESSURE (STS-V Only)
This display shows the oil pressure in either
pounds per square inch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa).
TRANS (Transmission) FLUID TEMP
(Temperature) (STS-V Only)
This display shows the transmission fluid
temperature in either degrees Fahrenheit (°F) or
degrees Celsius (°C).
DIC Warnings and Messages
Trip Information Display Menu Items
These messages appear if there is a problem
detected in one of your vehicle’s systems. The text
messages are the same for both the base audio
and Navigation systems unless otherwise
indicated.
The following display menu items can be displayed
by pressing the trip Information button.
Odometer
Press the trip information button until the odometer
appears on the DIC display. The odometer
shows the total distance the vehicle has been
driven in either miles (mi) or kilometers (km).
You must acknowledge a message to clear it from
the screen for further use. To clear a message,
press the reset button.
Trip Odometer
Be sure to take any message that appears on the
screen seriously and remember that clearing
the message will only make the message
disappear, not the problem.
Press the trip information button until trip
odometer A or B appears on the DIC display.
The trip odometer shows the current distance
traveled since the last reset for each trip odometer
in either miles (mi) or kilometers (km). Both
odometers can be used at the same time.
264
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUTOMATIC LIGHTS OFF
BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE
This message displays when the automatic
page 211 for more information.
This message displays when the system detects
that the battery voltage is dropping beyond a
reasonable level. The battery saver system starts
reducing certain features of the vehicle that
you may be able to notice. At the point that the
features are disabled, this message is displayed.
It means that the vehicle is trying to save the
charge in the battery.
AUTOMATIC LIGHTS ON
This message displays when the automatic
page 211 for more information.
Turn off all unnecessary accessories to allow the
battery to recharge.
BATTERY NOT CHARGING SERVICE
CHARGING SYS (System)
The normal battery voltage range is
11.5 to 15.5 volts. You can monitor battery voltage
on the DIC by pressing the information button
until you find BATTERY VOLTS.
This symbol appears
with this message.
This message displays when a problem with the
charging system has been detected. Have your
vehicle serviced by your dealer.
265
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH
BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW
This symbol appears
with this message.
This symbol appears
with this message.
This message displays when the electrical
charging system is overcharging the battery.
When the system detects that the battery voltage
is above an estimated 16 volts, this message
displays.
This message displays when the electrical system
is charging less than 10 volts or the battery has
been drained.
If this message appears immediately after starting
the engine, it is possible that the generator can
still recharge the battery. The battery should
recharge while driving, but may take a few hours
to do so. Consider using an auxiliary charger
to boost the battery after returning home or to a
final destination. Make sure you follow the
manufacturer’s instructions.
To reduce the charging overload, use the vehicle’s
accessories. Turn on the exterior lamps and
radio, set the climate control on AUTO and the fan
speed on the highest setting, and turn the rear
window defogger on.
The normal battery voltage range is
11.5 to 15.5 volts when the engine is running.
You can monitor battery voltage on the DIC
by pressing the information button until you find
BATTERY VOLTS.
If this message appears while driving or after
starting your vehicle and stays on, have it checked
immediately to determine the cause of this problem.
266
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To help the generator recharge the battery quickly,
you can reduce the load on the electrical system
by turning off the accessories.
CHECK GAS CAP
This message displays when the fuel cap has not
been fully tightened. Recheck the fuel cap to
ensure that it is on and tightened properly.
The normal battery voltage range is
11.5 to 15.5 volts. You can monitor battery voltage
on the DIC by pressing the information button
until you find BATTERY VOLTS.
CHECK TIRE PRESSURE
If your vehicle has a Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)
system, this message displays when the tire
pressure in one of the tires needs to be checked.
for more information on checking your vehicle’s
tire pressures. If a tire pressure message appears
on the DIC, stop as soon as you can. Have the
tire pressures checked and set to those shown on
the Tire Loading Information label. See Tire
information. If the tire pressure is low, the low tire
pressure warning light comes on. See Low Tire
CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
This message displays when service is required
for your vehicle. See your dealer. See Engine
page 505 for more information.
When you reset the CHANGE ENGINE OIL
SOON message by clearing it from the display,
you still must reset the engine oil life system
separately. For more information on resetting the
engine oil life system, see Engine Oil Life
CHECK BRAKE FLUID
This message displays if the ignition is on to
inform the driver that the brake fluid level is low.
Have the brake system serviced by your dealer as
soon as possible. See Brake System Warning
267
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHECK WASHER FLUID
COMPETITIVE DRIVING (STS-V Only)
This message displays when the competitive
driving mode is turned on with the traction control
button. The TC (traction control) light comes on
when the competitive driving mode is on. The
Traction Control System (TCS) will not operate
while in competitive driving mode. Adjust your
driving accordingly. See Competitive Driving Mode
This symbol appears
with this message.
This message displays when your vehicle is low
on windshield washer fluid. Refill the windshield
washer fluid reservoir as soon as possible.
more information.
DRIVER DOOR AJAR
This symbol appears
with this message.
CLEAN RADAR
This message displays when the Adaptive Cruise
Control system is disabled because the radar
is blocked and cannot detect vehicles in your path.
It may also activate during heavy rain or due to
road spray. To clean the system, see “Cleaning the
page 197.
This message displays if the driver’s door was not
closed completely. Make sure that the driver’s
door is closed completely.
268
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ENGINE COOLANT HOT IDLE ENGINE
ENGINE HOT –
AC (Air Conditioning) OFF
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the
engine is overheating, severe engine damage
may occur. If an overheat warning appears
on the instrument panel cluster and/or DIC,
stop the vehicle as soon as possible. Do not
increase the engine speed above normal idling
for more information.
This message displays when the engine coolant
becomes hotter than the normal operating
temperature. See Engine Coolant Temperature
engine, the air conditioning compressor is
automatically turned off. When the coolant
temperature returns to normal, the air conditioning
compressor turns back on. You can continue to
drive your vehicle.
This symbol appears
with this message.
If this message continues to appear, have the
system repaired by your dealer as soon as
possible to avoid damage to the engine.
This message displays when the engine coolant
temperature is too hot. Stop and allow the vehicle
to idle until it cools down. See Engine Coolant
safe place in an emergency.
269
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
but there is no reduction in performance, proceed
to your destination. The performance may be
reduced the next time the vehicle is driven.
The vehicle may be driven at a reduced speed
while this message is on, but acceleration
and speed may be reduced. Anytime this message
stays on, the vehicle should be taken to your
dealer for service as soon as possible.
ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the
engine is overheating, severe engine damage
may occur. If an overheat warning appears
on the instrument panel cluster and/or
DIC, stop the vehicle as soon as possible.
information.
ENGINE PROTECTION REDUCED
RPM’S (Revolutions Per Minute)
This message displays when the engine has
overheated. Immediately look for a safe place to
pull your vehicle over and turn the engine off right
away to avoid severe engine damage. See Engine
also sounds when this message is displayed.
This message displays when your vehicle is in an
overheated engine operating mode. If this
message appears, the vehicle has determined that
continued operation at the existing engine speed
may lead to engine overheating. The vehicle
automatically limits engine RPMs to prevent engine
overheating. You may notice the vehicle upshifting
early or reduced speeds while this message is
displayed. When the engine oil returns to a
safe operating temperature, this message clears
from the DIC and the vehicle returns to normal
operation. Your vehicle does not require service
when this message is displayed.
ENGINE POWER REDUCED
This message displays to inform you that the
engine power is being reduced to protect
the engine from damage. There could be several
malfunctions that might cause this message.
Reduced engine power can affect the vehicle’s
ability to accelerate. If this message is on,
270
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FUEL LEVEL LOW
ICE POSSIBLE
This message displays when the outside
temperature is cold enough to create icy road
conditions. Adjust your driving accordingly.
This symbol appears
with this message.
KEY FOB BATTERY LOW
This message displays when the battery in the
keyless access transmitter is low. Replace
the battery in the transmitter. See “Battery
Replacement” under Keyless Access System
This message displays when your vehicle is low
on fuel. Refill the fuel tank as soon as possible.
A single chime sounds when this message is
displayed.
LEFT REAR DOOR AJAR
HOOD AJAR
This symbol appears
with this message.
This symbol appears
with this message.
This message displays if the driver’s side rear
door was not closed completely. Make sure that
the door is closed completely.
This message displays if the hood was not closed
completely. Make sure that the hood is closed
completely.
271
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• The vehicle is experiencing Electromagnetic
Interference (EMI). Some locations, such as
airports, automatic toll booths, and some
gas stations, have EMI fields which may
interfere with the keyless access transmitter.
NO FOBS DETECTED
This message displays if the vehicle does not
detect the presence of a keyless access
transmitter when you have attempted to start the
vehicle or a vehicle door has just closed. The
following conditions may cause this message
to appear:
If moving the transmitter
to different locations
within the vehicle does
not help, place the
transmitter in the center
console transmitter
pocket with the buttons
facing forward and
then press the
• Driver-added equipment plugged into the
accessory power outlet on the center console
is causing interference. Examples of these
devices are cell phones and cell phone
chargers, two-way radios, power inverters, or
similar items. Try moving the keyless
access transmitter away from these devices
when starting the vehicle. In addition,
START button.
PDA devices and remote garage and gate
openers may also generate Electromagnetic
Interference (EMI) that may interfere with
the keyless access transmitter. Do not carry
the keyless access transmitter in the same
pocket or bag as these devices.
• The vehicle’s battery voltage is low. The
battery voltage must be above 10 volts for
the keyless access transmitter to be
detected properly.
272
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A multiple chime sounds when this message is
more information.
NO FOB OFF OR RUN?
This message displays when the keyless access
transmitter is not detected inside the vehicle
while you are trying to turn the ignition off. Your
vehicle may be near a strong radio antenna signal
causing the keyless access system to be jammed.
The vehicle remains in Acc. until OFF or START
has been pressed or 10 minutes has expired.
If you turn the ignition off and you cannot find the
keyless access transmitter, you will not be
Stop the vehicle immediately, as engine damage
can result from driving a vehicle with low oil
pressure. Have the vehicle serviced by your dealer
as soon as possible when this message is
displayed.
PASSENGER DOOR AJAR
able to restart the vehicle. The keyless access
transmitter needs to be inside of the vehicle
in order for the vehicle to start. See Starting the
This symbol appears
with this message.
OIL PRESSURE LOW STOP ENGINE
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while
the engine oil pressure is low, severe engine
damage may occur. If a low oil pressure
warning appears on the instrument panel
cluster and/or DIC, stop the vehicle as soon as
possible. Do not drive the vehicle until the
cause of the low oil pressure is corrected. See
This message displays if the passenger’s side
front door was not closed completely. Make sure
that the door is closed completely.
This message displays when the vehicle’s
engine oil pressure is low.
273
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRESS START AND BRAKE TO
START ENGINE
RIGHT REAR DOOR AJAR
This symbol appears
This message displays when you need to press
down on the brake pedal while pressing the
start button on the electronic keyless ignition when
trying to start your vehicle. See Starting the
with this message.
RADAR CRUISE NOT READY
This message displays if the passenger’s side rear
door was not closed completely. Make sure that
the door is closed completely.
This message displays when the Adaptive Cruise
Control system will not activate due to a
temporary condition. Your vehicle does not require
service. This message also displays when
either of the following conditions occur:
SERVICE AC (Air Conditioning)
SYSTEM
• The driver turns off the head-up display (HUD)
while the Adaptive Cruise Control is engaged.
This message displays when the electronic sensors
that control the air conditioning and heating
systems are no longer working. Have the climate
control system serviced by your dealer if you notice
a drop in heating and air conditioning efficiency.
• The driver attempts to engage the Adaptive
Cruise Control while the HUD is off.
If this message appears when you attempt to
activate the system, continue driving for several
minutes and then try activating the system again.
274
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If this message comes on while you are driving,
pull off the road as soon as possible and stop
carefully. Try resetting the system by turning the
ignition off then back on. If this message still stays
on or comes back on again while you are
driving, your vehicle needs service. Have the
StabiliTrak® System inspected by your dealer as
page 326 for more information.
SERVICE AIR BAG
This message displays when there is a problem
with the airbag system. Have your vehicle serviced
by your dealer immediately. See Airbag Readiness
SERVICE BRAKE ASSIST
This message displays when a problem with the
panic brake assist system has been detected.
Have your vehicle serviced by your dealer.
SERVICE STEERING SYS (System)
Your vehicle may have a speed variable assist
steering system.
SERVICE RADAR CRUISE
This message displays when the Adaptive Cruise
Control system is disabled and needs service.
See your dealer.
This message displays if a problem is detected
with the speed variable assist steering system.
When this message is displayed, you may notice
that the effort required to steer the vehicle
increases or feels heavier, but you will still be able
for more information.
SERVICE STABILITY SYS (System)
Your vehicle may have a vehicle stability
enhancement system called StabiliTrak®.
This message displays if there has been a problem
detected with the StabiliTrak® System.
SERVICE SUSPENSION SYS (System)
This message displays when the suspension
system is not operating properly. Have your
vehicle serviced by your dealer.
275
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SERVICE TIRE MONITOR
SERVICE VEHICLE SOON
If your vehicle has a Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)
system, this message displays if a part on the
system is not working properly. If you drive your
vehicle while any of the four sensors are
missing or inoperable, the warning comes on in
about 20 minutes. A sensor would be missing, for
example, if you put different wheels on your
vehicle without transferring the sensors. If the
warning comes on and stays on, there may be a
problem with the TPM. See your dealer.
This message displays when a non-emissions
related malfunction occurs. Have your vehicle
serviced by your dealer as soon as possible.
SPEED LIMITED TO XXX
This message displays when your vehicle speed is
limited to XXX, mph in English mode and km/h
in Metric mode, because the vehicle detects
a problem in the suspension system. Have your
vehicle serviced by your dealer.
SERVICE THEFT SYSTEM
STABILITY SYS (System) ACTIVE
This message displays when there is a problem
with the hood open and closed switches. The
switches may need to be replaced. When
this message is displayed, the theft-deterrent
system will still be protecting the interior of
the vehicle, however, the hood area will not be
protected at this time. Also, the remote start
function will not work when this message appears.
See your dealer for service.
This message displays any time the StabiliTrak®
System is actively assisting you with directional
control of the vehicle. Slippery road conditions may
exist when this message is displayed, so adjust
your driving accordingly. This message may
stay on for a few seconds after StabiliTrak® stops
assisting you with directional control of the
more information.
SERVICE TRANSMISSION
This message displays when there is a problem
with the transmission of your vehicle. Have
your vehicle serviced by your dealer.
276
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
longer available to assist you with directional
control of the vehicle. Adjust your driving
page 326 for more information.
STABILITY SYS (System) NOT READY
This message displays if the StabiliTrak®
System is not ready. Two conditions may cause
this message to display:
STABILITY SYS (System) READY
• The vehicle needs to be driven in a straight
line until the sensors are centered. Once
the sensors are centered, the StabiliTrak®
System will be ready and the STABILITY SYS
READY message will display.
This message displays any time you turn back on
StabiliTrak® using the TC (traction control)
on/off button. See Traction Control System (TCS)
on page 323 for more information. When this
message has been displayed, StabiliTrak® is ready
to assist you with directional control of the
page 326 for more information.
• The system needs to warm up. This may
occur when you first start your vehicle
and drive away during cold winter weather.
This is normal. You can acknowledge
this message by pressing the reset button.
The StabiliTrak® performance is affected until the
STABILITY SYS READY message is displayed
for more information.
STARTING DISABLED THEFT
PROBLEM
This message displays when incorrect conditions
exist within the theft-deterrent system. See
your dealer for service.
STABILITY SYS (System) OFF
STARTING DISABLED THROTTLE
PROBLEM
This message displays any time you turn off
StabiliTrak® using the TC (traction control) on/off
page 323 for more information. When this
message has been displayed, StabiliTrak® is no
This message displays when your vehicle’s throttle
system is not functioning properly. Have your
vehicle serviced by your dealer.
277
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THEFT ATTEMPTED
TRANS (Transmission) HOT
IDLE ENGINE
This message displays when the transmission fluid
in your vehicle is too hot. Stop the vehicle and
allow it to idle until the transmission cools down or
until this message is removed.
This symbol appears
with this message.
TRUNK OPEN
This symbol appears
with this message.
This message displays if the theft-deterrent
system has detected a break-in attempt while you
were away from your vehicle.
TRACTION ACTIVE
This message displays when the Traction Control
System (TCS) is actively limiting wheel spin.
Slippery road conditions may exist if this message
is displayed, so adjust your driving accordingly.
The message stays on for a few seconds after the
TCS stops limiting wheel spin. See Traction
information.
This message displays if the trunk was not closed
completely. Make sure that the trunk is closed
completely.
TURN SIGNAL ON
This message displays as a reminder to turn off
the turn signal if you drive your vehicle for
more than about 1 mile (1.6 km) with a turn signal
on. A multiple chime sounds when this message
is displayed.
278
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• OFF/ACC (Accessory) TO LEARN
Other Messages
See “Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle”
on page 88.
Here are more messages that you can receive on
your Driver Information Center (DIC). To
acknowledge a message and read another
message that may have come on at the same
time, press the reset button.
• READY FOR FOB X
See “Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle”
on page 88.
• ACCESSORY ACTIVE
• KNOWN FOB
• SHIFT TO PARK
See “Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle”
on page 88.
• WAIT XX MIN (Minutes)
See “Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle”
on page 88.
• MAX # FOBS LEARNED
See “Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle”
on page 88.
279
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Audio System(s)
Determine which radio your vehicle has and then
read the pages following to familiarize yourself
with its features.
{CAUTION:
This system provides you with a far greater
access to audio stations and song listings.
Giving extended attention to entertainment
tasks while driving can cause a crash and
you or others can be injured or killed.
Always keep your eyes on the road and
your mind on the drive — avoid engaging
in extended searching while driving.
Driving without distraction is a necessity for a
page 316. By taking a few moments to read this
manual and get familiar with your vehicle’s
audio system, you can use it with less effort, as
well as take advantage of its features. While your
vehicle is parked, set up your audio system by
presetting your favorite radio stations, setting the
tone and adjusting the speakers. Then, when
driving conditions permit, you can tune to
Keeping your mind on the drive is important for
safe driving. Here are some ways in which you can
help avoid distraction while driving.
your favorite stations using the presets and
steering wheel controls if the vehicle has them.
While your vehicle is parked:
• Familiarize yourself with all of its controls.
• Familiarize yourself with its operation.
• Set up your audio system by presetting your
favorite radio stations, setting the tone, and
adjusting the speakers. Then, when driving
conditions permit, you can tune to your favorite
radio stations using the presets and steering
wheel controls if the vehicle has them.
280
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Before adding any sound equipment
to your vehicle, such as an audio system,
CD player, CB radio, mobile telephone,
or two-way radio, make sure that it can be
added by checking with your dealer. Also,
check federal rules covering mobile radio and
telephone units. If sound equipment can be
added, it is very important to do it properly.
Added sound equipment can interfere with the
operation of your vehicle’s engine, radio, or
other systems, and even damage them.
Your vehicle’s systems can interfere with the
operation of sound equipment that has
been added.
Setting the Time
1. Press the tune/select knob (the right knob) to
enter the main menu.
2. Turn the tune/select knob until SET CLOCK
displays.
3. Press the tune/select knob to select
SET CLOCK.
4. Turn the tune/select knob to adjust the time.
5. Press the tune/select knob to update the time.
VEHICLE TIME UPDATED displays.
If the CLOCK/RADIO DISP is configured into
one of the configurable keys, pressing the
key switches the display back to the clock set
function. The time and date always appears on the
radio display. See “Configurable Radio Display
information on configuring the keys.
Your vehicle has a feature called Retained
Accessory Power (RAP). With RAP, the audio
system can be played even after the ignition
is turned off. See Retained Accessory
information.
281
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting the Date
Radio with CD
1. Press the tune/select knob (the right knob) to
enter the main menu.
2. Turn the tune/select knob until SET DATE
displays.
3. Press the tune/select knob to select
SET DATE.
4. Turn the tune/select knob to adjust the date.
5. Press the tune/select knob to update the
time. VEHICLE DATE UPDATED displays.
Radio with CD shown, Radio with Six-Disc CD similar
If the DATE is configured into one of the
configurable keys, pressing the key switches the
display back to the date set function. The time
and date always appears on the radio display.
See “Configurable Radio Display Keys” under
on configuring the keys.
Radio Data System (RDS)
The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS).
RDS features are available for use only on FM
stations that broadcast RDS information.
With RDS, the radio can do the following:
• Seek to stations broadcasting the selected
type of programming
• Receive announcements concerning local and
national emergencies
• Display messages from radio stations
• Seek to stations with traffic announcements
282
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This system relies upon receiving specific
information, contact XM™; In the U.S. at
www.xmradio.com or call 1-800-852-XMXM (9696)
or in Canada at www.xmradio.ca or call
1-877-GET-XMSR (438-9677).
information from these stations and only works
when the information is available. In rare cases, a
radio station can broadcast incorrect information
that causes the radio features to work improperly.
If this happens, contact the radio station.
4(Information): Press this button while in XM™
mode to display additional text information
related to the current song or channel: Artist, Song
Title, Category or PTY. To view this information,
perform the following:
While the radio is tuned to an RDS station, the
station name or call letters display instead of the
frequency. RDS stations can also provide the
time of day, a program type (PTY) for current
programming, and the name of the program being
broadcast.
1. Press the tune/select knob to enter the
main menu.
2. Turn the tune/select knob until INFO displays.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
3. Press the tune/select knob to select INFO.
The display changes to show the additional
XM™ information.
XM™ is a satellite radio service that is based in
the 48 contiguous United States and Canada.
XM™ offers a large variety of coast-to-coast
channels including music, news, sports, talk,
traffic/weather (U.S. subscribers), and children’s
programming. XM™ provides digital quality
audio and text information that includes song title
and artist name. A service fee is required in
order to receive the XM™ service. For more
4. Press the BACK (F6) button to exit the
display. To return to the original display,
repeatedly press the BACK (F6) button or wait
for the display to time out.
283
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playing the Radio
©¨(Scan): Press the double arrow scan button
to enter scan mode. SCAN displays. Press this
button to scan to the next station. The radio goes to
a station, plays for five seconds, then goes to the
next station. Press this button again to stop
scanning.
O(Power): Press this knob to turn the system
on and off.
n(Volume): Turn this knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or to decrease
the volume.
To scan preset stations, press and hold the double
arrow scan button for more than two seconds until a
beep sounds and PSCAN displays. The radio goes
to the first preset station, plays for five seconds,
then goes to the next preset station. Press this
button again to stop scanning presets.
SRCE (Source): Press this button to select a
source, either radio or CD. The CD must be loaded
to select the source and to play. CD displays if
a CD is loaded. If a CD is not loaded, the display
does not change from the radio source.
The radio only scans stations with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.
Finding a Station
BAND: Press this button to select FM1, FM2, AM,
or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped).
A LOCAL/DISTANT Selection: With this feature
the radio can be set to search for local stations
or stations that are further away for a larger
selection.
w(Tune): Turn this knob to select radio stations.
© ¨(Seek): Press the left single arrow button to
go to the previous station and stay there. Press the
right single arrow button to go to the next station
and stay there. The sound mutes while seeking.
To set this feature to LOCAL or DISTANT,
perform the following steps:
1. Press the tune/select knob to enter the
main menu.
The radio seeks stations only with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.
2. Turn the tune/select knob until SEEK LOCAL
or SEEK DISTANT displays.
284
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Press the tune/select knob to select either
LOCAL or DISTANT.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons for two seconds until a beep
sounds. The set preset station number
displays above the set pushbutton. Whenever
that numbered pushbutton is pressed for
less than two seconds, the station that was
set, returns.
4. Press the BACK (F6) button to exit the
display. To return to the original display,
repeatedly press the BACK (F6) button or wait
for the display to time out.
To search for stations, press the single arrow
buttons. If the system is set to LOCAL, SEEK
displays and seeks to stations only with strong
signals. If the system is set to DISTANT, D-SEEK
displays and seeks to stations with weak and
strong signals.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
To set the preset stations with an equalization
setting, DSP setting, or a PTY (program type)
setting, see each of these features later in this
section. When a preset station is selected,
once one of these additional settings is
selected, the preset station remembers each
setting and it remains active, until the setting is
selected off for that preset station.
This feature does not function with the XM™ radio
stations.
Setting Preset Stations
AUTOSTORE PRESETS: To set the preset
Up to 30 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM,
six XM1 and six XM2 (if equipped)), can be
programmed on the six numbered pushbuttons,
by performing the following steps:
stations automatically, perform the following steps:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, or AM.
1. Turn the radio on.
3. Press the tune/select knob to enter the
main menu.
2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, or AM, or
XM1 or XM2.
4. Turn the tune/select knob until AUTOSTORE
PRESETS displays.
3. Tune in the desired station.
285
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Press the tune/select knob to select.
AUTOSTORE displays. The radio
PRESETS HOME/AWAY: This feature stores
two different kinds of station presets. HOME
can be used for local stations and AWAY for
stations outside of the local broadcasting area.
To set preset stations for home and away perform
the following steps:
automatically searches the band and selects
and stores the six radio stations with the
strongest signal. The stations are stored by
signal strength, not sequential order. The
set preset station number displays above the
set pushbutton. Whenever that numbered
pushbutton is pressed for less than
two seconds, the station that was
1. Press the tune/select knob to enter the
main menu.
2. Turn the tune/select knob until PRESETS
HOME/AWAY displays.
set returns.
3. Press the tune/select knob to select.
HOME or AWAY displays.
6. Press the BACK (F6) button to exit the
display. To return to the original display,
repeatedly press the BACK (F6) button or wait
for the display to time out.
4. Press the BACK (F6) button to exit the
display. To return to the original display,
repeatedly press the BACK (F6) button or wait
for the display to time out.
This feature does not function with the XM™
radio stations.
This feature does not function with the XM™ radio
stations.
The radio presets do not have to be reset when
the vehicle is started, or when the battery power
is removed.
Follow the manual or automatic steps previously
listed for setting the preset pushbuttons for
both home and away.
286
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUDIO EQUALIZER: This feature lets you select
customized equalization settings. To choose an
equalization setting (EQ0 through EQ5), perform
the following steps:
Setting the Tone
(Bass/Midrange/Treble)
To adjust the bass, midrange, and treble, perform
the following steps:
1. Press the tune/select knob to enter the
main menu.
1. Press the tune/select knob to enter the
main menu.
2. Turn the tune/select knob until EQUALIZER
displays.
2. Press the tune/select knob to scroll through
the settings.
3. Press the tune/select knob to set the
equalization setting. The equalization
setting displays.
3. Turn the tune/select knob to increase or to
decrease the bass, midrange, or treble. If a
station is weak or noisy, decrease the treble.
4. Press the BACK (F6) button to exit the
display. To return to the original display,
repeatedly press the BACK (F6) button or wait
for the display to time out.
4. Press the tune/select knob to set the
adjustment.
5. Press the BACK (F6) button to exit the
display. To return to the original display
repeatedly press the BACK (F6) button or wait
for the display to time out.
The equalization settings are preset to
EQ0 (Normal), EQ1 (Pop), EQ2 (Rock),
EQ3 (Jazz), EQ4 (Talk), and EQ5 (Country).
287
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
RDS Messages
To adjust the balance or fade, perform the
following steps:
ALERT: Alert warns of local and national
emergencies. When, an alert announcement comes
on the current radio station or a related network
station, ALERT displays. You will hear the
1. Press the tune/select knob to enter the
main menu.
announcement, even if the volume is low or a CD is
playing. If a CD is playing, play stops during the
announcement. Alert announcements cannot be
turned off. If the radio tunes to a related network
station for the announcement, it returns to the
original station when the announcement is finished.
2. Turn the tune/select knob until
BASS-MID-TREBLE displays.
3. Press the tune/select knob to enter the tone
settings.
4. Press the tune/select knob to scroll to
BALANCE or FADER.
ALERT is not affected by tests of the emergency
broadcast system. This feature is not supported by
all RDS stations.
5. Turn the tune/select knob to adjust the
BALANCE to the right or the left speakers and
the FADER to the front or the rear speakers.
MSG (Message): If the current RDS station has a
message, MSG displays. The message can
display the artist, song title, call in phone numbers,
etc. If the entire message does not display,
parts of the message displays every three seconds
until the message is complete. Once the
completed message has displayed, MSG
disappears from the display until another new
message is received.
6. Press the tune/select knob to set the
adjustment.
7. Press the BACK (F6) button to exit the
display. To return to the original display,
repeatedly press the BACK (F6) button or wait
for the display to time out.
EQ0 does not appear on the display while in
this mode.
288
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To display the last message, perform the
following steps:
If the station does not broadcast traffic
announcements, when TA is turned on it seeks to a
station that does. When a station that broadcasts
traffic announcements is found, the radio stops
seeking and TA displays. If no station is found that
broadcasts traffic announcements, No Traffic
displays.
1. Press the tune/select knob to enter the
main menu.
2. Turn the tune/select knob until RECALL RDS
MESSAGE displays.
3. Press the tune/select knob and the message
displays.
The radio plays traffic announcements if the volume
is low. The radio interrupts the play of a CD if the
last tuned station broadcasts traffic
announcements.
Once the message displays, MSG disappears
from the display until another new message
is received.
To turn TA on or off, perform the following steps:
TP (Traffic Program): TP displays when the
radio detects a signal from an RDS station that has
traffic announcement broadcast capability.
1. Press the tune/select knob to enter the
main menu.
2. Turn the tune/select knob until TRAFFIC
ANNOUNCE displays.
TA (Traffic Announcement): If TA displays, the
tuned radio station broadcasts traffic
announcements, and when a traffic announcement
comes on the tuned station, you will hear it.
3. Press the tune/select knob to select ON or
OFF. An X appears in the box when ON is
selected.
4. Press the BACK (F6) button to exit the
display. To return to the original display,
repeatedly press the BACK (F6) button or wait
for the display to time out.
289
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Once program type is activated the PTYs display
above the pushbuttons, in place of the preset
stations (if programmed). Press the pushbutton for
the desired PTY. Not all stations support PTYs.
The radio might not go to all of the stations with that
music type when pressing the pushbutton.
Activating Program Type (PTY)
Stations (RDS and XM™)
PTY lets you search for stations with specific
types of music. The selectable PTYs are POP,
EASY, TALK, CNTRY (Country), CLASS
(Classical), and JAZZ.
AF (Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequency
lets the radio switch to a stronger station with
the same program type.
To activate program types, perform the
following steps:
1. Press the tune/select knob to enter the
main menu.
To turn AF on or off, perform the following steps:
1. Press the tune/select knob to enter the
main menu.
2. Turn the tune/select knob until PROGRAM
TYPE MODE displays.
2. Turn the tune/select knob until ALTERNATE
FREQ. displays.
3. Press the tune/select knob to select ON or
OFF. An X appears in the box when ON is
selected.
3. Press the tune/select knob to select AF OFF,
AF ON, or AF REG. An X appears in the box
when ON is selected.
4. Press the BACK (F6) button to exit the
display. To return to the original display,
repeatedly press the BACK (F6) button or wait
for the display to time out.
4. Press the BACK (F6) button to exit the
display. To return to the original display,
repeatedly press the BACK (F6) button or wait
for the display to time out.
This feature does not function with the XM™
radio stations.
290
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the CD is inserted, CD displays. As each
new track starts to play, the track number displays.
Radio Message
THEFTLOCK: This message is displayed when
the THEFTLOCK® system has been activated.
Take the vehicle to the dealer for service.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch
(8 cm) single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size
CDs and the smaller CDs are loaded in the
same manner.
Radio Messages for XM™ Only
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can be
reduced due to CD-R quality, the method of
recording, the quality of the music that has been
recorded, and the way the CD-R has been
handled. There can be an increase in skipping,
difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in loading
and ejecting. If these problems occur, check the
bottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CD
is damaged, such as cracked, broken, or
section for further detail.
Using the Single CD Player
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.
The player pulls it in. If the ignition and the
radio are on, the CD begins playing. A CD can be
loaded with the radio off, but it does not start
playing until the radio is on.
scratched, the CD will not play properly. If the
surface of the CD is soiled, see Care of Your CDs
on page 313 for more information.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in
the player, it stays in the player. While the ignition
or radio is turned on, the CD starts to play
where it stopped, if it was the last selected
audio source.
If there is no apparent damage, try a known
good CD.
291
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught
in the CD player. If a CD is recorded on a
personal computer and a description label is
needed, try labeling the top of the recorded CD
with a marking pen.
F2 | (Forward): Press this pushbutton to go to
the next track. Press and hold this pushbutton
to advance quickly within a track. Release
the pushbutton to play the passage. The elapsed
time of the track displays.
Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or more
than one CD is inserted into the slot at a time,
or an attempt is made to play scratched or
damaged CDs, the CD player could be
damaged. While using the CD player, use only
CDs in good condition without any label,
load one CD at a time, and keep the CD player
and the loading slot free of foreign materials,
liquids, and debris.
F3 RDM (Random): Press this pushbutton to
listen to the tracks in random, rather than
sequential, order. RANDOM displays. Press RDM
again to turn off random play. RANDOM
disappears from the display.
F4 RPT (Repeat): Press this pushbutton to hear
a track over again. REPEAT displays. Press
RPT again to turn off repeat play. REPEAT
disappears from the display.
If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later in
this section.
F6 DISP (Display): Press this pushbutton to
display the time of the track. Press this pushbutton
again to remove the time of the track from
the display.
When a CD is inserted, the CD functions display
above the pushbuttons, in place of the preset
stations (if programmed).
© ¨(Seek): Press the left single arrow button to
go to the previous or press the right single
arrow button to go to the next track on the CD.
F1 { (Reverse): Press this pushbutton to go to
the previous track. Press and hold this pushbutton
to reverse quickly within a track. Release the
pushbutton to play the passage. The elapsed time
of the track displays.
292
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in
loading and ejecting. If these problems occur,
check the bottom surface of the CD. If the surface
of the CD is damaged, such as cracked, broken,
or scratched, the CD will not play properly.
If the surface of the CD is soiled, see Care of
©¨(Scan): Press the double arrow button to
listen to each track for 10 seconds. The CD goes
to a track, plays for 10 seconds, then goes to
the next track. Press this button again to stop
scanning.
SRCE (Source): Press this button to select a
source, either radio or CD. The CD must be loaded
to select the source and to play. CD displays if
a CD is loaded. If a CD is not loaded, the display
does not change from the radio source.
If there is no apparent damage, try a known
good CD.
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught
in the CD player. If a CD is recorded on a
personal computer and a description label is
needed, try labeling the top of the recorded CD
with a marking pen.
Z(Eject): Press this button to stop a CD when
it is playing or to eject a CD when it is not
playing. Eject can be activated with the ignition
and the radio off.
Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or more
than one CD is inserted into the slot at a time,
or an attempt is made to play scratched or
damaged CDs, the CD player could be
damaged. While using the CD player, use only
CDs in good condition without any label,
load one CD at a time, and keep the CD player
and the loading slot free of foreign materials,
liquids, and debris.
Using the Six-Disc CD Changer
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)
single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs
and the smaller CDs are loaded in the same
manner.
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can be
reduced due to CD-R quality, the method of
recording, the quality of the music that has been
recorded, and the way the CD-R has been
handled. There can be an increase in skipping,
If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later in
this section.
293
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When a CD is inserted, the CD functions display
above the pushbuttons, in place of the preset
stations (if programmed).
3. Load the CD, when INSERT displays, insert a
CD partway into the slot, label side up.
The player pulls the CD in.
Do not load a CD until INSERT displays.
The CD player takes up to six CDs. If you
want to load less than six CDs, load the
desired amount. The CD player times out
when it does not receive any more CDs and
the last CD loaded begins to play.
M(Load): Press this button to load CDs into the
CD player. This CD player holds up to six CDs.
To insert one CD, do the following:
1. The ignition and the radio can be on or off.
2. Press and release the load button. Please
Wait displays.
If the radio is on, the last CD loaded begins to
play automatically.
3. Load the CD, when INSERT displays, insert a
CD partway into the slot, label side up.
The player pulls the CD in.
F1 DISCn(Down): Press this pushbutton to go
to the previous CD.
F2 DISCm(Up): Press this pushbutton to go to
When a CD is inserted, CD displays and the
number of the CD and the track number displays if
the radio is on.
the next CD.
F3 CD REV { (Reverse): Press this pushbutton
to go to the previous track. Press and hold this
pushbutton to reverse quickly within the track.
Release this pushbutton to play the passage.
The elapsed time of the track displays.
If the radio is on, the CD begins to play
automatically.
To insert multiple CDs, do the following:
1. The ignition and the radio can be on or off.
F4 CD FWD |(Forward): Press this pushbutton
to go to the next track. Press and hold this
pushbutton to advance quickly within the track.
Release this pushbutton to play the passage.
The elapsed time of the track displays.
2. Press and hold the load button for
two seconds. Please Wait displays and
a beep sounds.
294
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
F5 MODE: Press this pushbutton to select from
NORMAL, RPT TRCK (Repeat Track), RPT
DISC (Repeat CD), RDM TRCK (Random Track),
and RDM ALL (Random All CDs).
• NORMAL: Sets the system for normal play of
the CD(s). NORMAL does not display while in
this mode.
F6 DISP (Display): Press this pushbutton to
display the time of the track. Press this pushbutton
again to display CD PLAY MODE.
© ¨(Seek): Press the left single arrow button to
go to the previous or press the right single
arrow button to go to the next track on the CD.
©¨(Scan): Press this double arrow button
to listen to each track for 10 seconds. The CD
goes to a track, play for 10 seconds, then go on to
the next track. Press this button again to stop
scanning.
• RPT TRCK (Repeat Track): Repeats the track
over again. RPT TRCK displays. Press the
MODE pushbutton again to turn off repeat play.
RPT TRCK disappears from the display.
• RPT DISC (Repeat CD): Repeats the CD over
again. RPT DISC displays. Press the MODE
pushbutton again to turn off repeat play.
RPT DISC disappears from the display.
• RDM TRCK (Random Track): Plays the tracks
on the current CD in random, rather than
sequential, order. RDM TRCK appears on the
display. Press the MODE pushbutton again to
turn off random play. RDM TRCK disappears
from the display.
SRCE (Source): Press this button to select a
source, either radio or CD. The CD must be loaded
to select the source and to play. CD displays if
a CD is loaded. If a CD is not loaded, the display
does not change from the radio source.
Z(Eject): Press this button to eject the CD that
is currently playing, or press and hold this
button to eject all of the CDs loaded. A beep
sounds. Eject can be activated with the ignition or
radio off.
• RDM ALL (Random All CDs): Plays all of the
CDs loaded in random, rather than sequential,
order. RDM ALL displays. Press the MODE
pushbutton again to turn off random play. RDM
ALL disappears from the display.
295
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other
reason, try a known good CD.
Playing an MP3 CD-R Disc
The vehicle’s radio system could have the MP3
feature. If it has this feature, it is capable of playing
an MP3 CD-R disc. For more information on how
to play an MP3 CD-R disc, see Using an MP3
on page 297 later in this section.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot
be corrected, contact your dealer. If the radio
displays an error message, write it down and
provide it to your dealer when reporting the
problem.
CD Messages
If the CD comes out, it could be for one of the
following reasons:
• If it is very hot. When the temperature returns
to normal, the CD should play.
• If you are driving on a very rough road.
When the road becomes smoother, the
CD should play.
Configurable Radio Display Keys
The four keys, located on each side of the radio
display, can be configured to make it easier
to adjust the radio features and other non-radio
related features can also be customized.
To program the configurable radio display keys,
perform the following steps:
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or
upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour
and try again.
• The format of the CD might not be compatible.
section.
1. Press the tune/select knob to enter the
main menu.
2. Turn the tune/select knob until
SETUP displays.
3. Press the tune/select knob to enter into
SETUP.
4. Turn the tune/select knob until CONFIGURE
DISPLAY KEYS displays.
• There could have been a problem while burning
the CD.
• The label could be caught in the CD player.
296
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Press the tune/select knob to enter into
CONFIGURE DISPLAY KEYS.
Using an MP3
MP3 CD-R Disc
MP3 Format
6. Turn the tune/select knob to select which of
the four configurable keys you would like to
change. The currently assigned feature
displays.
If you burn your own MP3 disc on a personal
computer:
7. Press the tune/select knob to select the
configurable key to change.
• Make sure the MP3 files are recorded on a
CD-R disc.
8. Turn the tune/select knob to find the feature
that will be stored to the key.
• Do not mix standard audio and MP3 files on
one disc.
9. Press the tune/select knob when you have
found the feature to be stored. The display
updates, by showing the symbol of the feature
selected next to the configurable key.
• Make sure playlists have a .mp3 or .wpl
extension, other file extensions might not work.
• Files can be recorded with a variety of fixed or
variable bit rates. Song title, artist name, and
album are available for display by the radio
when recorded using ID3 tags version 1 and 2.
10. Repeat the previous steps for each
configurable key.
Once a feature is programmed to a key, the
feature does not display when programming the
remaining configurable keys. The configurable
keys can be changed at any time.
• Create a folder structure that makes it easy to
find songs while driving. Organize songs by
albums using one folder for each album.
Each folder or album should contain 18 songs
or less.
• Make sure to finalize the disc when burning an
MP3 disc, using multiple sessions. It is usually
better to burn the disc all at once.
297
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The player is able to read and play a maximum
of 50 folders, 50 playlists, 10 sessions, and
255 files. Long file names, folder names, or playlist
names might use more disc memory space than
necessary. To conserve space on the disc,
minimize the length of the file, folder, or playlist
names. You can also play an MP3 CD that
was recorded using no file folders. The system
can support up to 11 folders in depth, though, keep
the depth of the folders to a minimum in order
to keep down the complexity and confusion
in trying to locate a particular folder during
playback. If a CD contains more than the
maximum of 50 folders, 50 playlists, 10 sessions,
and 255 files the player lets you access and
navigate up to the maximum, but all items over
the maximum are ignored.
Empty Directory or Folder
If a root directory or a folder exists somewhere in
the file structure that contains only folders/
subfolders and no compressed files directly
beneath them, the player advances to the next
folder in the file structure that contains compressed
audio files. The empty folder is not displayed.
No Folder
When the CD contains only compressed files, the
files are located under the root folder. The next
and previous folder functions do not function on a
CD that was recorded without folders or playlists.
When displaying the name of the folder the
radio displays ROOT.
When the CD contains only playlists and
compressed audio files, but no folders, all files are
located under the root folder. The folder down
and the folder up buttons search playlists (Px) first
and then go to the root folder. When the radio
displays the name of the folder the radio
displays ROOT.
Root Directory
The root directory is treated as a folder. If the root
directory has compressed audio files, the
directory is displayed as F1 ROOT. All files
contained directly under the root directory are
accessed prior to any root directory folders.
However, playlists (Px) are always accessed
before root folders or files.
298
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Track names longer than 32 characters or
4 pages are shortened. Parts of words on the
last page of text and the extension of the filename
does not display.
Order of Play
Tracks are played in the following order:
• Play begins from the first track in the first
playlist and continues sequentially through
all tracks in each playlist. When the last track
of the last playlist has played, play continues
from the first track of the first playlist.
Preprogrammed Playlists
Preprogrammed playlists that were created using
WinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™
software can be accessed, however, they cannot
be edited using the radio. These playlists are
treated as special folders containing compressed
audio song files.
• If the CD does not contain any playlists, then
play begins from the first track under the root
directory. When all tracks from the root
directory have played, play continues from
files according to their numerical listing. After
playing the last track from the last folder,
play begins again at the first track of the first
folder or root directory.
Playing an MP3
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.
The player pulls it in, and LOADING CD appears
on the display. The CD should begin playing
and the CD symbol appears on the display. If the
ignition and the radio are on, the CD begins
playing. A CD can be loaded with the radio off,
but it does not start playing until the radio is on.
When play enters a new folder, the display does
not automatically show the new folder name.
The new track name displays.
File System and Naming
If the ignition or radio is turned off while a CD is
in the player, it stays in the player. When the
ignition or radio is turned on, the CD starts to play
where it stopped, if it was the last selected
audio source.
The song name that is displayed is the song name
that is contained in the ID3 tag. If the song
name is not present in the ID3 tag, then the radio
displays the file name without the extension
(such as .mp3) as the track name.
299
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
As each new track starts to play, the track
number displays.
Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or more
than one CD is inserted into the slot at a time,
or an attempt is made to play scratched or
damaged CDs, the CD player could be
damaged. While using the CD player, use only
CDs in good condition without any label,
load one CD at a time, and keep the CD player
and the loading slot free of foreign materials,
liquids, and debris.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)
single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs
and the smaller CDs are loaded in the same
manner.
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can be
reduced due to CD-R quality, the method of
recording, the quality of the music that has been
recorded, and the way the CD-R has been
handled. There can be an increase in skipping,
difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in loading
and ejecting. If these problems occur, check the
bottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CD
is damaged, such as cracked, broken, or
If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later in
this section.
F1 r(Previous Folder): Press this pushbutton
to go to the first track in the previous folder.
Press and hold this pushbutton to reverse quickly
within a track. Release this pushbutton to play
the passage. REV and the elapsed time of
the track displays.
scratched, the CD will not play properly. If the
surface of the CD is soiled, see Care of Your CDs
on page 313 for more information.
If there is no apparent damage, try a known
good CD.
Pressing this button while in folder random mode
goes to the previous folder and plays the tracks
in that folder in random order.
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught
in the CD player. If a CD is recorded on a
personal computer and a description label is
needed, try labeling the top of the recorded CD
with a marking pen.
300
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press and release this pushbutton until NORMAL
displays to turn off random play.
F2 [(Next Folder): Press this pushbutton to go
to the first track in the next folder.
F4 RPT (Repeat): To repeat the current track,
press and release this pushbutton until RPT
TRCK displays.
Press and hold this pushbutton to advance quickly
within a track. Release this pushbutton to play
the passage. FWD and the elapsed time of
the track displays.
To repeat the tracks in the current folder,
press and release this pushbutton until RPT
FLDR displays.
Pressing this button while in folder random mode
takes you to the next folder and plays the
tracks in that folder in random order.
Press and release this pushbutton until NORMAL
displays to turn off repeated play.
F3 RDM (Random): To play the tracks on the CD
in random, rather than sequential order, press
and release this pushbutton until RDM TRCK
displays. Once all of the tracks in the current folder
or playlist have played, the system moves on to
the next folder or playlist and plays all of the tracks
in random order.
F6 DISP (Display): Press this pushbutton to
switch between the elapsed time of the track and
the MP3 playback information.
© ¨(Seek): Press the left arrow to go to the
start of the previous track. Press the right arrow to
go to the start of the next track. Pressing either
arrow for more than two seconds searches
the previous or next tracks at two tracks per
second. Release the button to stop searching and
to play the track.
To play the tracks in the current folder in random,
rather than sequential order, press and release
this pushbutton until RDM FLDR displays.
This feature does not work with playlists.
While in random, pressing and releasing either
single seek arrow goes to the next or previous
random track.
301
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Press one of the following pushbuttons to
view that specific information.
©¨(Scan): Press the double arrow button to
scan the tracks in each folder. The radio goes to
the next track, plays for 10 seconds, then goes
to the next track. Press this button again to
stop scanning.
• F1 TTLE (Title): To display the title name.
• F2 ATST (Artist): To display the
artist name.
w(Tune): Turning the tune knob will fast track
reverse or advance through the tracks in all
folders or playlists. The track number and file
name displays for each track. Turning this knob
while in random fast tracks reverse or advances
the tracks in sequential order.
• F3 ALBM (Album): To display the
album name.
• F4 FLDR (Folder): To display the
folder name.
5. Press the BACK (F6) button to exit the
display. To return to the original display,
repeatedly press the BACK (F6) button or wait
for the display to time out.
4(Information): Press this button, while an MP3
CD is loaded, to view the Title, Artist, Album,
or Folder names. To view this information, perform
the following:
SRCE (Source): Press this button to select a
source, either radio or CD. The CD must be loaded
to select the source and to play. CD displays if
a CD is loaded. If a CD is not loaded, the display
does not change from the radio source.
1. Press the tune/select knob to enter the
main menu.
2. Turn the tune/select knob until INFO displays.
3. Press the tune/select knob to select INFO.
The display changes to show the additional
MP3 information.
Z(Eject): Press this button to stop a CD when
it is playing or to eject a CD when it is not
playing. Eject can be activated with the ignition
and the radio off.
302
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
XM Radio Messages
Radio Display Message
Condition
Action Required
XL (Explicit Language
Channels)
XL on the radio display,
after the channel name,
indicates content with
explicit language.
These channels, or any others, can be blocked at a
customer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
XM Updating
No XM Signal
Loading XM
Updating encryption code The encryption code in the receiver is being updated, and no
action is required. This process should take no longer than
30 seconds.
Loss of signal
The system is functioning correctly, but the vehicle is in a
location that is blocking the XM™ signal. When the vehicle is
moved into an open area, the signal should return.
Acquiring channel audio
(after 4 second delay)
The audio system is acquiring and processing audio and text
data. No action is needed. This message should disappear
shortly.
Channel Off Air
Channel Unavail
Channel not in service
This channel is not currently in service. Tune in to
another channel.
Channel no
longer available
This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned.
Tune to another station. If this station was one of the presets,
choose another station for that preset button.
No Artist Info
Artist Name/Feature
not available
No artist information is available at this time on this channel.
The system is working properly.
303
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Radio Display Message
Condition
Action Required
No Title Info
Song/Program Title
not available
No song title information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
No CAT Info
Category Name
not available
No category information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
CAT Not Found
No Information
XM Theftlocked
No channel available for
the chosen category
There are no channels available for the selected category.
The system is working properly.
No Text/Informational
message available
No text or informational messages are available at this time
on this channel. The system is working properly.
Theft lock active
The XM™ receiver in your vehicle could have previously
been in another vehicle. For security purposes, XM™
receivers cannot be swapped between vehicles. If this
message is received after having your vehicle serviced,
check with your dealer.
XM Radio ID
Unknown
Radio ID label (channel 0) If tuned to channel 0, this message alternates with the XM™
Radio 8 digit radio ID label. This label is needed to activate
the service.
Radio ID not known
(should only be if
hardware failure)
If this message is received when tuned to channel 0,
there could be a receiver fault. Consult with your dealer.
Check XM Receivr
Hardware failure
If this message does not clear within a short period of time,
the receiver could have a fault. Consult with your dealer.
304
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To access the main menu of the radio, do one of
the following:
Navigation/Radio System
Your vehicle could have a navigation radio
system.
• Using the Base audio system, press the
CNFG button located on the radio or press the
tune/select knob located on the right side of
the radio. Then turn the tune/select knob
clockwise or counterclockwise to scroll through
the menu items.
The navigation system has built-in features
intended to minimize driver distraction. Technology
alone, no matter how advanced, can never
replace your own judgment. See the Navigation
System manual for some tips to help you
reduce distractions while driving.
• If your vehicle has the Navigation system, see
the Navigation System manual supplied with
your vehicle for more information on accessing
the main menu and for descriptions of the
menu items for the Navigation system.
Radio Personalization
Accessing the Radio’s Main Menu
(Base Audio System)
There are two different procedures for accessing
the radio’s main menu depending upon whether
or not your vehicle has the Navigation system.
305
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The main menu for the Base audio system
consists of the following menu items:
Radio Main Menu Item Descriptions
(Base Audio System)
• e BASS - MID - TREBLE
• x BALANCE - FADER
• e EQ EQUALIZER
The following descriptions are for the Base audio
system. For information pertaining to the
Navigation audio system, see “Audio System” in
the Index of the Navigation System manual
supplied with your vehicle.
• H/A (HOME/AWAY) PRESETS
• AUTOSTORE PRESETS
• CAT CATEGORY
• TA TRAFFIC ANNOUNCE
• RECALL RDS (Radio Data System)
MESSAGE
e BASS - MID (Midrange) - TREBLE: This
menu item lets you adjust the levels for the bass,
midrange and treble features of the audio
system. See “Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)”
information.
• AF ALTERNATE FREQ. (Frequency)
• A SEEK LOCAL/DISTANT
• 8 SET CLOCK
x BALANCE - FADER: This menu item lets you
adjust the levels for the balance and fader
features of the audio system. See “Adjusting the
page 282 for more information.
• B SET DATE
• 4 INFO (Information)
• LANG LANGUAGE
• SETUP
e EQ (Equalizer): This menu item lets you
choose among five preset equalizations for the
audio system. See “Audio Equalizer” under Radio
306
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
H/A (Home/Away) PRESETS: This menu item
lets you switch back and forth between your home
and away preset radio stations. See “Presets
for more information.
AF (Alternate Frequency): This menu item lets
you turn the AF feature on and off. See “Activating
Program Type (PTY) Stations (RDS and XM™)”
information.
AUTOSTORE PRESETS: This menu item lets
you automatically store radio stations with
the strongest signals as presets. See “Autostore
for more information.
ASEEK LOCAL/DISTANT: This feature instructs
the audio system to seek only local radio
stations with the strongest signal or to seek all
radio stations with a strong signal in a large area.
Use LOCAL while in urban areas where there
are several strong radio station signals and you
want to limit the number of stations to those
with the strongest signals only. Use DISTANT
while in rural areas where there are fewer
radio station signals available.
CAT (Category): This menu item lets you select
radio stations based on preset categories. See
“Activating Program Type (PTY) Stations”
information.
See “Local/Distant Selection” under Radio with CD
on page 282 for more information.
TA (Traffic Announcement): This menu item lets
you turn the TA feature on and off. See “TA
page 282 for more information.
8 SET CLOCK: Use this menu item to set
the time.
RECALL RDS MESSAGE: This menu item lets
you view an RDS radio station message broadcast
by a radio station. See “MSG (Message)” under
information.
307
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SETUP: When you select this menu item, the
following submenu is available:
B SET DATE: Use this menu item to set
the date.
• PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU
• DRIVER SELECTION
information.
• DRIVER EXIT SETTINGS
• CONFIGURE DISPLAY KEYS
4(Information): This menu item is used to
display XM™ satellite radio service and CD MP3
playback information. See “4(Information)”
information.
SETUP Submenu Items
The following choices are available for
programming using the Base audio system.
LANG (Language): To change the language
displayed on the radio, select LANGUAGE
by pressing the tune/select knob. Turn the
tune/select knob to scroll through the following
available languages:
PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU
This item turns the entire list of personalization
features on or off. This item allows you to program
certain features to a preferred setting for up to
two people. The number of available features
varies depending upon which options are
purchased. While this item is on, a check mark
appears after it. For more information on the
PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU item, see Vehicle
• ENGLISH
• GERMAN
• FRENCH
• SPANISH
• JAPANESE
To make your selection, press the tune/select
knob. If you accidentally select a language that you
did not want, ENGLISH is always at the top of
the language list.
308
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DRIVER SELECTION
CONFIGURE DISPLAY KEYS
(Base Audio System)
When you select this item, the following submenu
displays:
This item lets you customize the functions of the
four configurable keys located to the left and
right of the audio display. See “Configurable Radio
for programming information.
• DRIVER 1
• DRIVER 2
• RECALL DRIVER SETTINGS
• STORE DRIVER SETTINGS
Theft-Deterrent Feature
For more information on the DRIVER SELECTION
submenu item, see “Recalling Driver Settings”
and “Storing Driver Settings” under Memory Seat,
THEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft
of your vehicle’s radio. The feature works
automatically by learning a portion of the Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN). If the radio is
moved to a different vehicle, it does not operate.
If the radio is removed from your vehicle, the
original VIN in the radio can be used to trace the
radio back to your vehicle.
DRIVER EXIT SETTINGS
When you select this item, the following
submenu displays:
• RECALL EXIT SETTINGS
• STORE EXIT SETTINGS
With THEFTLOCK® activated, the radio will not
operate if stolen.
For more information on the DRIVER EXIT
SETTINGS submenu item, see “Recalling Exit
Settings” and “Storing Exit Settings” under Memory
309
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Some audio controls
can be adjusted at the
steering wheel. They
include the following:
Audio Steering Wheel Controls
Right Side Controls
For STS-V
Left Side Controls For
Both STS and STS-V
Right Side Controls
For STS
0 (Mute): Press this button to silence the system.
Press this button again, or any other radio
button, to turn the sound on.
SRCE (Source): Press this button to switch
between FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1 or XM2
(if equipped) radio or CD.
g(OnStar®/Voice Recognition): If your vehicle
has the Radio with CD or Radio with Six-Disc
CD audio system, press this button to interact with
the OnStar® system.
310
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your vehicle has the navigation system, press
this button to initiate voice recognition. See “Voice
Recognition” in the Navigation System manual
for more information. While in Voice Recognition,
say “OnStar” to interact with the OnStar® system.
manual for more information.
¨ (Seek) (STS-V Only): Press the seek arrow
to go to the next radio station and stay there.
The system will only seek radio stations with
strong frequencies.
While the seek arrow is pressed and held for
two seconds, the system will scan the radio
stations that are in the selected band. If listening
to a CD, the system will advance to the next
track of that particular CD.
+ u — (Volume): Press this button to increase
or to decrease the volume.
+ t u − (Seek) (STS Only): Press either arrow
to go to the next or the previous radio station
and stay there. The radio seeks stations only with
a strong signal that are in the selected band.
While a CD is playing in the six-disc CD changer,
press this arrow to go to the next available CD,
if multiple CDs are loaded.
1-6 (Preset Stations): Press this button to play
stations that are programmed on the radio
preset pushbuttons. The radio only seeks preset
stations with a strong signal that are in the
selected band.
When a CD is playing, press the minus sign to go
to the start of the current track, if more than
10 seconds have played. Press the plus sign to go
to the next track. If either the minus or the plus
button are pressed more than once, the player
continues moving backward or forward through
the CD.
While a CD is playing, press this button to go to
the next track.
Press and hold the SEEK plus or minus button,
until a beep sounds. The CD fast forwards or fast
reverses through the CD. Press either button
again to play the passage.
While a CD is playing in the six-disc CD changer,
press this button to go to the next available
CD, if multiple CDs are loaded.
311
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FM Stereo
Radio Reception
FM stereo gives the best sound, but FM signals
reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km).
Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals,
causing the sound to fade in and out.
Frequency interference and static can occur
during normal radio reception if items such as
cellphone chargers, vehicle convenience
accessories, and external electronic devices are
plugged into the accessory power outlet. If there is
interference or static, unplug the item from the
accessory power outlet.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
XM™ Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio
reception from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguous
United States, and in Canada. Just as with FM,
tall buildings or hills can interfere with satellite
radio signals, causing the sound to fade in and out.
In addition, traveling or standing under heavy
foliage, bridges, garages, or tunnels may cause
the loss of XM™ signal for a period of time.
The radio might display NO XM SIGNAL to
indicate interference.
AM
The range for most AM stations is greater than for
FM, especially at night. The longer range can
cause station frequencies to interfere with each
other. For better radio reception, most AM radio
stations boost the power levels during the day, and
then reduces these levels during the night.
Static can also occur when things like storms and
power lines interfere with radio reception. When
this happens, try reducing the treble on the radio.
312
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
a mild, neutral detergent solution mixed with
water, and clean it. Make sure the wiping process
starts from the center to the edge.
Cellular Phone Usage
Cellular phone usage could cause interference
with your vehicle’s radio. This interference
could occur when making or receiving phone calls,
charging the phone’s battery, or simply having
the phone on. This interference is an increased
level of static while listening to the radio. If static is
received while listening to the radio, unplug the
cellular phone and turn it off.
Do not touch the bottom side of a CD while
handling it; this could damage the surface.
Pick up CDs by grasping the outer edges or the
edge of the hole and the outer edge.
Care of the CD Player
Do not use CD lens cleaners for CD players
because the lens of the CD optics can become
contaminated by lubricants.
Care of Your CDs
Handle CDs carefully. Store them in their original
cases or other protective cases and away from
direct sunlight and dust. The CD player scans the
bottom surface of the disc. If the surface of a
CD is damaged, such as cracked, broken,
or scratched, the CD will not play properly or not
at all. If the surface of a CD is soiled, take a
soft, lint free cloth or dampen a clean, soft cloth in
313
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If static is heard on the radio, when the rear
window defogger is turned on, it could mean that
a defogger grid line has been damaged. If this
is true, the grid line must be repaired.
Diversity Antenna System
The AM-FM antenna is integrated with the rear
window defogger, located in the rear window.
Make sure that the inside surface of the rear
window is not scratched and that the grid lines on
the glass are not damaged. If the inside surface
is damaged, it could interfere with radio reception.
If adding an aftermarket cellular telephone to your
vehicle, and the antenna needs to be attached
to the glass, make sure that the grid lines for the
AM-FM antennas are not damaged. Make sure
the cellular telephone antenna does not touch a
grid line.
Notice: Do not apply aftermarket glass tinting
with metallic film. The metallic film in some
tinting materials will interfere with or distort the
incoming radio reception. Any damage caused
to your antenna due to metallic tinting materials
will not be covered by your warranty.
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna
System
The XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is located on
the roof of your vehicle. Keep this antenna clear of
snow and ice build up for clear radio reception.
Notice: Do not try to clear frost or other
material from the inside of the rear window
with a razor blade or anything else that
is sharp, as this may damage the rear window
defogger grid and affect your radio’s ability
to pick up stations clearly. The repairs would
not be covered by your warranty.
A vehicle with a sunroof might not get the
best performance from the XM™ system if the
sunroof is open.
Loading items onto the roof of your vehicle can
interfere with the performance of the XM™ system.
Make sure the XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is
not obstructed.
314
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your Driving, the Road, and
Your Vehicle
{CAUTION:
Defensive driving really means “Be ready
for anything.” On city streets, rural roads,
or expressways, it means “Always expect
the unexpected.” Assume that pedestrians
or other drivers are going to be careless
and make mistakes. Anticipate what they
might do and be ready. Rear-end collisions
are about the most preventable of
Defensive Driving
The best advice anyone can give about driving is:
Drive defensively.
Please start with a very important safety device in
your vehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: They
accidents. Yet they are common. Allow
enough following distance. Defensive
driving requires that a driver concentrate
on the driving task. Anything that distracts
from the driving task makes proper
defensive driving more difficult and can
even cause a collision, with resulting
injury. Ask a passenger to help do these
things, or pull off the road in a safe place to
do them. These simple defensive driving
techniques could save your life.
316
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Many adults — by some estimates, nearly half
the adult population — choose never to drink
alcohol, so they never drive after drinking.
For persons under 21, it is against the law in
every U.S. state to drink alcohol. There are good
medical, psychological, and developmental
reasons for these laws.
Drunken Driving
Death and injury associated with drinking and
driving is a national tragedy. It is the number
one contributor to the highway death toll, claiming
thousands of victims every year.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to
drive a vehicle:
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway
safety problem is for people never to drink
alcohol and then drive. But what if people do?
How much is “too much” if someone plans
to drive? It is a lot less than many might think.
Although it depends on each person and situation,
here is some general information on the problem.
• Judgment
• Muscular Coordination
• Vision
• Attentiveness
Police records show that almost half of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most
cases, these deaths are the result of someone who
was drinking and driving. In recent years, more
than 16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths
have been associated with the use of alcohol, with
more than 300,000 people injured.
The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of
someone who is drinking depends upon
four things:
• The amount of alcohol consumed
• The drinker’s body weight
• The amount of food that is consumed before
and during drinking
• The length of time it has taken the drinker to
consume the alcohol
317
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
According to the American Medical Association,
a 180 lb (82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce
(355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end up
with a BAC of about 0.06 percent. The person
would reach the same BAC by drinking
three 4 ounce (120 ml) glasses of wine or
three mixed drinks if each had 1-1/2 ounces
(45 ml) of liquors like whiskey, gin, or vodka.
It is the amount of alcohol that counts. For example,
if the same person drank three double martinis
(3 ounces or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour,
the person’s BAC would be close to 0.12 percent.
A person who consumes food just before or during
drinking will have a somewhat lower BAC level.
There is a gender difference, too. Women
generally have a lower relative percentage of
body water than men. Since alcohol is carried in
body water, this means that a woman generally
will reach a higher BAC level than a man of
her same body weight will when each has the
same number of drinks.
The law in most U.S. states, and throughout
Canada, sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent.
In some other countries, the limit is even lower.
For example, it is 0.05 percent in both France
and Germany. The BAC limit for all commercial
drivers in the United States is 0.04 percent.
The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three to
six drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we have
seen, it depends on how much alcohol is in the
drinks, and how quickly the person drinks them.
318
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC
of 0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving
skills of many people are impaired at a BAC
There is something else about drinking and driving
that many people do not know. Medical research
shows that alcohol in a person’s system can make
crash injuries worse, especially injuries to the
brain, spinal cord, or heart. This means that when
anyone who has been drinking — driver or
passenger — is in a crash, that person’s chance
of being killed or permanently disabled is
higher than if the person had not been drinking.
approaching 0.05 percent, and that the effects are
worse at night. All drivers are impaired at BAC
levels above 0.05 percent. Statistics show that the
chance of being in a collision increases sharply for
drivers who have a BAC of 0.05 percent or above.
A driver with a BAC level of 0.06 percent has
doubled his or her chance of having a collision. At a
BAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance of this driver
having a collision is 12 times greater; at a level of
0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater!
{CAUTION:
Drinking and then driving is very
dangerous. Your reflexes, perceptions,
attentiveness, and judgment can be
affected by even a small amount of
alcohol. You can have a serious — or
even fatal — collision if you drive after
drinking. Please do not drink and drive
or ride with a driver who has been
drinking. Ride home in a cab; or if you
are with a group, designate a driver
who will not drink.
The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the
alcohol in one drink. No amount of coffee or number
of cold showers will speed that up. “I will be careful”
is not the right answer. What if there is an
emergency, a need to take sudden action, as when
a child darts into the street? A person with even a
moderate BAC might not be able to react quickly
enough to avoid the collision.
319
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Control of a Vehicle
Braking
You have three systems that make your vehicle go
where you want it to go. They are the brakes, the
steering, and the accelerator. All three systems
have to do their work at the places where the tires
meet the road.
Braking action involves perception time and
reaction time.
First, you have to decide to push on the brake
pedal. That is perception time. Then you have to
bring up your foot and do it. That is reaction time.
Sometimes, as when you are driving on snow or
ice, it is easy to ask more of those control systems
than the tires and road can provide. That means
you can lose control of your vehicle. See Traction
Average reaction time is about three-fourths of a
second. But that is only an average. It might be less
with one driver and as long as two or three seconds
or more with another. Age, physical condition,
alertness, coordination, and eyesight all play a part.
So do alcohol, drugs, and frustration. But even in
three-fourths of a second, a vehicle moving at
60 mph (100 km/h) travels 66 feet (20 m). That
could be a lot of distance in an emergency, so
keeping enough space between your vehicle and
others is important.
Adding non-GM accessories can affect your
vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary
greatly with the surface of the road, whether it is
pavement or gravel; the condition of the road,
whether it is wet, dry, or icy; tire tread; the
condition of the brakes; the weight of the vehicle;
and the amount of brake force applied.
320
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive
in spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking — rather than keeping pace with traffic.
This is a mistake. The brakes may not have time to
cool between hard stops. The brakes will wear out
much faster if you do a lot of heavy braking. If you
keep pace with the traffic and allow realistic
following distances, you will eliminate a lot of
unnecessary braking. That means better braking
and longer brake life.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
Your vehicle has the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS), an advanced electronic braking
system that will help prevent a braking skid.
When you start the engine and begin to drive
away, ABS will check itself. You may hear
a momentary motor or clicking noise while this test
is going on, and you may even notice that the
brake pedal moves a little. This is normal.
If your vehicle’s engine ever stops while you are
driving, brake normally but do not pump the
brakes. If you do, the pedal may get harder to
push down. If the engine stops, you will still have
some power brake assist. But you will use it
when you brake. Once the power assist is used
up, it may take longer to stop and the brake pedal
will be harder to push.
If there is a problem
with ABS, this warning
light will stay on.
See Anti-Lock Brake
Adding non-GM accessories can affect your
vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
321
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ABS can change the brake pressure faster than
any driver could. The computer is programmed
to make the most of available tire and road
conditions. This can help you steer around the
obstacle while braking hard.
Let us say the road is wet and you are driving
safely. Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of
you. You slam on the brakes and continue braking.
Here is what happens with ABS:
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down.
If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the
computer will separately work the brakes at
each wheel.
As you brake, the computer keeps receiving
updates on wheel speed and controls braking
pressure accordingly.
322
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remember: ABS does not change the time you
need to get your foot up to the brake pedal
or always decrease stopping distance. If you get
too close to the vehicle in front of you, you will not
have time to apply the brakes if that vehicle
suddenly slows or stops. Always leave enough
room up ahead to stop, even though you
have ABS.
Traction Control System (TCS)
Your vehicle has a traction control system that
limits wheel spin. This is especially useful in
slippery road conditions. On a rear-wheel-drive
vehicle, the system operates if it senses that
one or both of the rear wheels are spinning or
beginning to lose traction. On an All-Wheel-Drive
(AWD) vehicle, the system will operate if it
senses that any of the wheels are spinning or
beginning to lose traction. When this happens, the
system brakes the spinning wheel(s) and/or
reduces engine power to limit wheel spin.
Using ABS
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal
down firmly and let anti-lock work for you. You may
hear the anti-lock pump or motor operate, and feel
the brake pedal pulsate, but this is normal.
You may feel or hear the system working, but this
is normal.
Braking in Emergencies
This warning light will
come on to let you
know if there’s a
problem with your
traction control system.
With ABS, you can steer and brake at the same
time. In many emergencies, steering can help you
more than even the very best braking.
on page 250. When this warning light is on, the
system will not limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving
accordingly.
323
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The traction control system automatically comes
on whenever you start your vehicle. To limit wheel
spin, especially in slippery road conditions, you
should always leave the system on. But you
can turn the traction control system off if you
ever need to.
To turn the system off,
press the TC (traction
control) button
located near the
shift lever.
Notice: Do not repeatedly brake or accelerate
heavily when the TCS is off. You could
damage your vehicle’s driveline.
If you press the TC button once, the traction
control system will turn off and the traction control
system warning light will come on. Press the
TC button again to turn the system back on. If you
press and hold the TC button for five seconds,
the StabiliTrak® system and the traction control
system will turn off. Press the TC button again to
turn StabiliTrak® back on. For more information,
When the TCS is switched off on AWD and STS-V
vehicles, you may still feel the system working.
This is normal and necessary with the hardware on
your vehicle.
You should turn the system off if your vehicle ever
gets stuck in sand, mud or snow and rocking
the vehicle is required. See Rocking Your Vehicle
is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 348
for more information. See also Winter Driving
on page 344 for information on using TCS when
driving in snowy or icy conditions.
Adding non-GM accessories can affect your
vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
324
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Competitive Driving Mode (STS-V)
Magnetic Ride Control
The driver can select this optional handling mode
by pressing the Traction Control button, located
near the shift lever, twice within five seconds.
Competitive driving mode allows the driver to have
control of the power applied to the rear wheels,
while the StabiliTrak® system helps steer the
vehicle by selective brake application. In
Your vehicle may have Magnetic Ride Control that
automatically adjusts the ride of your vehicle.
Automatic ride control is achieved through
a computer used to control and monitor the
suspension system. The controller receives input
from various sensors to determine the proper
system response. If the controller detects a
problem within the system, the DIC will display a
SERVICE SUSPENSION SYS message. See
DIC Warnings and Messages on page 264
for more information. See your dealer for service.
competitive mode, the levels at which StabiliTrak®
is engaged have been modified to better suit a
performance driving environment. When the
traction control warning light is on, the Traction
Control System will not be operating. Adjust your
driving accordingly.
Limited-Slip Rear Axle
When you press the Traction Control button again,
the Traction Control System will be on. The
traction engaged symbol will be displayed
temporarily in the DIC and a chime will be heard.
for more information.
Your limited-slip rear axle can give you additional
traction on snow, mud, ice, sand or gravel. It
works like a standard axle most of the time, but
when one of the rear wheels has no traction
and the other does, this feature will allow
the wheel with traction to move the vehicle.
325
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If there is a problem detected with StabiliTrak®, a
SERVICE STABILITY SYS message will be
displayed on the Driver Information Center. See
this message is displayed, the system is not
operational. Driving should be adjusted
accordingly.
StabiliTrak® comes on automatically whenever you
start your vehicle. To help assist you with
directional control of the vehicle, you should
always leave the system on. You can turn
StabiliTrak® off if you ever need to through the
TC (traction control) on/off button. See Traction
StabiliTrak® System
Your vehicle is equipped with a vehicle stability
enhancement system called StabiliTrak®. It
is an advanced computer controlled system that
assists you with directional control of the vehicle in
difficult driving conditions.
StabiliTrak® activates when the computer senses a
discrepancy between your intended path and the
direction the vehicle is actually traveling.
StabiliTrak® selectively applies braking pressure at
any one of the vehicle’s brakes to help steer the
vehicle in the direction which you are steering.
When the system activates, a STABILITY SYS
ACTIVE message will be displayed on the Driver
Information Center. See DIC Warnings and
noise or feel vibration in the brake pedal. This is
normal. Continue to steer the vehicle in the
direction you want it to go.
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the
StabiliTrak® activates, the cruise control will
automatically disengage. When road conditions
allow you to safely use it again, you may reengage
for more information.
326
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Panic Brake Assist
Steering
Your vehicle has a panic brake assist system that
monitors the intention of the driver while braking. If
the system senses that the driver has applied
hard/fast pressure to the brake pedal, the system
will generate additional pressure, making it easier
for the driver to maintain brake application. When
this happens the brake pedal will feel easier to
push. Just hold the brake pedal down firmly and let
the system work for you. You may feel the brakes
vibrate, or you may notice some noise but this is
normal. The brakes will return to normal operation
after the brake pedal has been released.
Power Steering
If you lose power steering assist because the
engine stops or the system is not functioning, you
can steer but it will take much more effort.
Speed Variable Assist Steering
Your vehicle has a steering system that
continuously adjusts the effort you feel when
steering at all vehicle speeds. It provides ease
when parking, yet a firm, solid feel at highway
speeds.
Steering Tips
It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) System
If your vehicle is equipped with this feature, engine
power is sent to all four wheels all the time.
A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned
on the news happen on curves. Here is why:
Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is
subject to the same laws of physics when driving on
curves. The traction of the tires against the road
surface makes it possible for the vehicle to change
its path when you turn the front wheels. If there is
no traction, inertia will keep the vehicle going in the
same direction. If you have ever tried to steer a
vehicle on wet ice, you will understand this.
This is like four-wheel drive, but it is fully
automatic.
327
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The traction you can get in a curve depends on
the condition of your tires and the road surface, the
angle at which the curve is banked, and your
speed. While you are in a curve, speed is the
one factor you can control.
If you need to reduce your speed as you approach
a curve, do it before you enter the curve, while
your front wheels are straight ahead.
Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive”
through the curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady
speed. Wait to accelerate until you are out of
the curve, and then accelerate gently into
the straightaway.
Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.
Then you suddenly accelerate. Both control
systems — steering and acceleration — have to
do their work where the tires meet the road.
Adding the sudden acceleration can demand too
much of those places. You can lose control.
To help you steer in the direction you want to go,
during certain sharp or sudden cornering
maneuvers, gear selection is controlled. This will
maximize the available drive wheel torque and
minimize the transmission response time and shift
activity. During this kind of maneuver, the
transmission shifts automatically as vehicle
speed changes.
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up
on the accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the
way you want it to go, and slow down.
Since your vehicle is equipped with StabiliTrak®,
the system may be active. See DIC Warnings and
on page 326.
Adding non-GM accessories can affect your
vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you
should adjust your speed. Of course, the posted
speeds are based on good weather and road
conditions. Under less favorable conditions you will
want to go slower.
328
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more
effective than braking. For example, you come
over a hill and find a truck stopped in your lane, or
a car suddenly pulls out from nowhere, or a
child darts out from between parked cars and
stops right in front of you. You can avoid these
problems by braking — if you can stop in time. But
sometimes you cannot; there is not room. That
is the time for evasive action — steering around
the problem.
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies
like these. First apply your brakes.
An emergency like this requires close attention and
a quick decision. If you are holding the steering
wheel at the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock
positions, you can turn it a full 180 degrees very
quickly without removing either hand. But you
have to act fast, steer quickly, and just as quickly
straighten the wheel once you have avoided
the object.
much speed as you can from a possible collision.
Then steer around the problem, to the left or
right depending on the space available.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive
driving at all times and wear safety belts properly.
329
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Off-Road Recovery
Passing
You may find that your vehicle’s right wheels have
dropped off the edge of a road onto the shoulder
while you are driving.
The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a
two-lane highway waits for just the right moment,
accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then
goes back into the right lane again. A simple
maneuver?
Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a
two-lane highway is a potentially dangerous move,
since the passing vehicle occupies the same
lane as oncoming traffic for several seconds.
A miscalculation, an error in judgment, or a brief
surrender to frustration or anger can suddenly
put the passing driver face to face with the worst
of all traffic accidents — the head-on collision.
So here are some tips for passing:
• Drive ahead. Look down the road, to the
sides, and to crossroads for situations
that might affect your passing patterns. If you
have any doubt whatsoever about making
a successful pass, wait for a better time.
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off
the accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the
way, steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge
of the pavement. You can turn the steering wheel
up to one-quarter turn until the right front tire
contacts the pavement edge. Then turn your
steering wheel to go straight down the roadway.
330
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings, and
lines. If you can see a sign up ahead that might
indicate a turn or an intersection, delay your
pass. A broken center line usually indicates it is
all right to pass, providing the road ahead is
clear. Never cross a solid line on your side of
the lane or a double solid line, even if the road
seems empty of approaching traffic.
• If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slow
vehicle, wait your turn. But take care that
someone is not trying to pass you as you pull
out to pass the slow vehicle. Remember to
glance over your shoulder and check the
blind spot.
• Check your vehicle’s mirrors, glance over your
shoulder, and start your left lane change signal
before moving out of the right lane to pass.
When you are far enough ahead of the passed
vehicle to see its front in your vehicle’s inside
mirror, activate the right lane change signal and
move back into the right lane. Remember that
your vehicle’s passenger side outside mirror is
convex. The vehicle you just passed may seem
to be farther away from you than it really is.
• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to
pass while you are awaiting an opportunity. For
one thing, following too closely reduces your
area of vision, especially if you are following a
larger vehicle. Also, you will not have adequate
space if the vehicle ahead suddenly slows or
stops. Keep back a reasonable distance.
• When it looks like a chance to pass is coming
up, start to accelerate but stay in the right lane
and do not get too close. Time your move so
you will be increasing speed as the time comes
to move into the other lane. If the way is clear to
pass, you will have a running start that more
than makes up for the distance you would lose
by dropping back. And if something happens to
cause you to cancel your pass, you need only
slow down and drop back again and wait for
another opportunity.
• Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time
on two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing
the next vehicle.
• Do not overtake a slowly moving vehicle too
rapidly. Even though the brake lamps are not
flashing, it may be slowing down or starting
to turn.
• If you are being passed, make it easy for the
following driver to get ahead of you. Perhaps
you can ease a little to the right.
331
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A cornering skid is best handled by easing your
foot off the accelerator pedal.
Loss of Control
Let us review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems — brakes,
steering, and acceleration — do not have enough
friction where the tires meet the road to do what the
driver has asked.
Remember: Any traction control system helps
avoid only the acceleration skid. If your traction
control system is off, then an acceleration
skid is also best handled by easing your foot off
the accelerator pedal.
In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to
steer and constantly seek an escape route or
area of less danger.
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off
the accelerator pedal and quickly steer the
way you want the vehicle to go. If you start
steering quickly enough, your vehicle may
straighten out. Always be ready for a second skid
if it occurs.
With StabiliTrak®, you may see the STABILITY
SYS ACTIVE message on the Driver Information
page 264.
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking
reasonable care suited to existing conditions, and
by not overdriving those conditions. But skids
are always possible.
The three types of skids correspond to your
vehicle’s three control systems. In the braking skid,
your wheels are not rolling. In the steering or
cornering skid, too much speed or steering in a
curve causes tires to slip and lose cornering force.
And in the acceleration skid, too much throttle
causes the driving wheels to spin.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow,
ice, gravel, or other material is on the road.
For safety, you will want to slow down and adjust
your driving to these conditions. It is important
to slow down on slippery surfaces because
stopping distance will be longer and vehicle control
more limited.
332
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try
your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration, or
braking, including reducing vehicle speed by
shifting to a lower gear. Any sudden changes could
cause the tires to slide. You may not realize the
surface is slippery until your vehicle is skidding.
Learn to recognize warning clues — such as
enough water, ice, or packed snow on the road to
make a mirrored surface — and slow down when
you have any doubt.
Driving at Night
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving.
One reason is that some drivers are likely to
be impaired — by alcohol or drugs, with night
vision problems, or by fatigue.
Here are some tips on night driving.
• Drive defensively.
• Do not drink and drive.
• Adjust the inside rearview mirror to reduce the
glare from headlamps behind you.
Remember: Any Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
helps avoid only the braking skid.
• Since you cannot see as well, you may need
to slow down and keep more space between
you and other vehicles.
Competitive Driving
See your warranty book before using your vehicle
for competitive driving.
• Slow down, especially on higher speed roads.
Your vehicle’s headlamps can light up only so
much road ahead.
Notice: If you use your vehicle for competitive
driving, the engine may use more oil than it
would with normal use. Low oil levels can
damage the engine. Be sure to check the oil
level often during competitive driving and keep
the level at or near the upper mark that
shows the proper operating range on the
engine oil dipstick. For information on how to
• In remote areas, watch for animals.
• If you are tired, pull off the road in a safe
place and rest.
333
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.
But as we get older these differences increase.
A 50-year-old driver may require at least twice as
much light to see the same thing at night as a
20-year-old.
Keep the windshield and all the glass on your
vehicle clean — inside and out. Glare at night is
made much worse by dirt on the glass. Even
the inside of the glass can build up a film caused
by dust. Dirty glass makes lights dazzle and
flash more than clean glass would, making the
pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.
What you do in the daytime can also affect your
night vision. For example, if you spend the
day in bright sunshine you are wise to wear
sunglasses. Your eyes will have less trouble
adjusting to night. But if you are driving, do not
wear sunglasses at night. They may cut down on
glare from headlamps, but they also make a
lot of things invisible.
Remember that the headlamps light up far less of a
roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep your
eyes moving; that way, it is easier to pick out dimly
lighted objects. Just as the headlamps should be
checked regularly for proper aim, so should your
eyes be examined regularly. Some drivers suffer
from night blindness — the inability to see in dim
light — and are not even aware of it.
You can be temporarily blinded by approaching
headlamps. It can take a second or two, or
even several seconds, for your eyes to re-adjust
to the dark. When you are faced with severe glare,
as from a driver who does not lower the high
beams, or a vehicle with misaimed headlamps,
slow down a little. Avoid staring directly into
the approaching headlamps.
334
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
It is always wise to go slower and be cautious if rain
starts to fall while you are driving. The surface may
get wet suddenly when your reflexes are tuned for
driving on dry pavement.
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even if
your windshield wiper blades are in good shape, a
heavy rain can make it harder to see road signs and
traffic signals, pavement markings, the edge of the
road, and even people walking.
It is wise to keep your windshield wiping equipment
in good shape and keep your windshield washer
fluid reservoir filled with washer fluid. Replace your
windshield wiper inserts when they show signs of
streaking or missing areas on the windshield,
or when strips of rubber start to separate from
the inserts.
Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a
wet road, you cannot stop, accelerate, or turn as
well because your tire-to-road traction is not as
good as on dry roads. And, if your tires do not have
much tread left, you will get even less traction.
335
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hydroplaning
{CAUTION:
Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can
build up under your tires that they can actually ride
on the water. This can happen if the road is wet
enough and you are going fast enough. When your
vehicle is hydroplaning, it has little or no contact
with the road.
Wet brakes can cause accidents. They
may not work as well in a quick stop and
may cause pulling to one side. You could
lose control of the vehicle.
Hydroplaning does not happen often. But it can if
your tires do not have much tread or if the
pressure in one or more is low. It can happen if a
lot of water is standing on the road. If you can
see reflections from trees, telephone poles,
or other vehicles, and raindrops dimple the water’s
surface, there could be hydroplaning.
After driving through a large puddle of
water or a car wash, apply the brake pedal
lightly until the brakes work normally.
Driving too fast through large water puddles or
even going through some car washes can cause
problems, too. The water may affect your
brakes. Try to avoid puddles. But if you cannot,
try to slow down before you hit them.
Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds.
There just is not a hard and fast rule about
hydroplaning. The best advice is to slow down
when it is raining.
336
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Through Deep Standing Water
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips
• Besides slowing down, allow some extra
following distance. And be especially careful
when you pass another vehicle. Allow yourself
more clear room ahead, and be prepared to
have your view restricted by road spray.
Notice: If you drive too quickly through deep
puddles or standing water, water can come in
through the engine’s air intake and badly
damage the engine. Never drive through water
that is slightly lower than the underbody of your
vehicle. If you cannot avoid deep puddles or
standing water, drive through them very slowly.
• Have good tires with proper tread depth. See
Driving Through Flowing Water
{CAUTION:
Flowing or rushing water creates strong
forces. If you try to drive through flowing
water, as you might at a low water
crossing, your vehicle can be carried away.
As little as six inches of flowing water can
carry away a smaller vehicle. If this
happens, you and other vehicle occupants
could drown. Do not ignore police warning
signs, and otherwise be very cautious
about trying to drive through flowing water.
337
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here are ways to increase your safety in city
driving:
City Driving
• Know the best way to get to where you are
going. Get a city map and plan your trip
into an unknown part of the city just as you
would for a cross-country trip.
• Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross
most large cities. You will save time and
• Treat a green light as a warning signal. A
traffic light is there because the corner is
busy enough to need it. When a light turns
green, and just before you start to move,
check both ways for vehicles that have not
cleared the intersection or may be running
the red light.
One of the biggest problems with city streets is
the amount of traffic on them. You will want
to watch out for what the other drivers are doing
and pay attention to traffic signals.
338
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The most important advice on freeway driving is:
Keep up with traffic and keep to the right.
Drive at the same speed most of the other drivers
are driving. Too-fast or too-slow driving breaks
a smooth traffic flow. Treat the left lane on
a freeway as a passing lane.
Freeway Driving
At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads
to the freeway. If you have a clear view of the
freeway as you drive along the entrance ramp, you
should begin to check traffic. Try to determine
where you expect to blend with the flow. Try to
merge into the gap at close to the prevailing speed.
Switch on your turn signal, check your mirrors, and
glance over your shoulder as often as necessary.
Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow.
Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed
to the posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it is
slower. Stay in the right lane unless you want
to pass.
Mile for mile, freeways — also called thruways,
parkways, expressways, turnpikes, or
superhighways — are the safest of all roads. But
they have their own special rules.
339
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before changing lanes, check your mirrors.
Then use your turn signal.
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Make sure you are ready. Try to be well rested.
If you must start when you are not fresh — such as
after a day’s work — do not plan to make too
many miles that first part of the journey. Wear
comfortable clothing and shoes you can easily
drive in.
Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly
over your shoulder to make sure there is not
another vehicle in your blind spot.
Once you are moving on the freeway, make
certain you allow a reasonable following distance.
Expect to move slightly slower at night.
Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep it
serviced and maintained, it is ready to go. If it needs
service, have it done before starting out. Of course,
you will find experienced and able service experts
in GM dealerships all across North America. They
will be ready and willing to help if you need it.
When you want to leave the freeway, move to the
proper lane well in advance. If you miss your
exit, do not, under any circumstances, stop and
back up. Drive on to the next exit.
The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite
sharply. The exit speed is usually posted. Reduce
your speed according to your speedometer, not
to your sense of motion. After driving for any
distance at higher speeds, you may tend to think
you are going slower than you actually are.
340
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here are some things you can check before a trip:
Highway Hypnosis
• Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir
Is there actually such a condition as highway
hypnosis? Or is it just plain falling asleep at the
wheel? Call it highway hypnosis, lack of
awareness, or whatever.
full? Are all windows clean inside and outside?
• Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?
• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you
checked all levels?
There is something about an easy stretch of road
with the same scenery, along with the hum of the
tires on the road, the drone of the engine, and the
rush of the wind against the vehicle that can make
you sleepy. Do not let it happen to you! If it does,
your vehicle can leave the road in less than a
second, and you could crash and be injured.
• Lamps: Are they all working? Are the
lenses clean?
• Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,
trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough
for long-distance driving? Are the tires
all inflated to the recommended pressure?
What can you do about highway hypnosis?
First, be aware that it can happen.
• Weather Forecasts: What is the weather
outlook along your route? Should you
delay your trip a short time to avoid a major
storm system?
Then here are some tips:
• Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with
a comfortably cool interior.
• Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?
• Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead
and to the sides. Check your rearview mirrors
and your instruments frequently.
• If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest,
service, or parking area and take a nap, get
some exercise, or both. For safety, treat
drowsiness on the highway as an emergency.
341
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you are
planning to visit there, here are some tips that
can make your trips safer and more enjoyable.
Hill and Mountain Roads
• Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check
all fluid levels and also the brakes, tires,
cooling system, and transmission. These parts
can work hard on mountain roads.
{CAUTION:
If you do not shift down, the brakes could
get so hot that they would not work well.
You would then have poor braking or
even none going down a hill. You could
crash. Shift down to let the engine assist
the brakes on a steep downhill slope.
Driving on steep hills or mountains is different
from driving in flat or rolling terrain.
342
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift
down to a lower gear. The lower gears help
cool the engine and transmission, and you can
climb the hill better.
{CAUTION:
Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with
the ignition off is dangerous. The brakes
will have to do all the work of slowing
down. They could get so hot that they
would not work well. You would then have
poor braking or even none going down a
hill. You could crash. Always have the
engine running and your vehicle in gear
when you go downhill.
• Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane
roads in hills or mountains. Do not swing wide
or cut across the center of the road. Drive at
speeds that let you stay in your own lane.
• As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. There
could be something in your lane, like a stalled
car or an accident.
• You may see highway signs on mountains that
warn of special problems. Examples are long
grades, passing or no-passing zones, a falling
rocks area, or winding roads. Be alert to these
and take appropriate action.
• Know how to go down hills. The most important
thing to know is this: let the engine do some of
the slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when
you go down a steep or long hill.
343
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Winter Driving
Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a
supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some
winter outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a
red cloth, and a couple of reflective warning
triangles. And, if you will be driving under severe
conditions, include a small bag of sand, a
piece of old carpet, or a couple of burlap bags to
help provide traction. Be sure you properly
secure these items in your vehicle.
Here are some tips for winter driving:
• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
• You may want to put winter emergency
supplies in your trunk.
344
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
What is the worst time for this? Wet ice. Very cold
snow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on.
But wet ice can be even more trouble because it
may offer the least traction of all. You can get
wet ice when it is about freezing, 32°F (0°C), and
freezing rain begins to fall. Try to avoid driving
on wet ice until salt and sand crews can get there.
Driving on Snow or Ice
Most of the time, those places where the tires
meet the road probably have good traction.
However, if there is snow or ice between the tires
and the road, you can have a very slippery
situation. You will have a lot less traction, or grip,
and will need to be very careful.
Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed,
blowing, or loose snow — drive with caution.
Traction control improves your ability to accelerate
when driving on a slippery road. Even though your
vehicle has the Traction Control System (TCS), you
will want to slow down and adjust your driving to the
road conditions. Under certain conditions, you may
want to turn the TCS off, such as when driving
through deep snow and loose gravel, to help
maintain vehicle motion at lower speeds. See
345
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) improves your
vehicle’s stability when you make a hard stop
on a slippery road. Even though you have ABS,
you will want to begin stopping sooner than
you would on dry pavement. See Anti-Lock Brake
If You Are Caught in a Blizzard
If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in
a serious situation. You should probably stay
with your vehicle unless you know for sure that you
are near help and you can hike through the
snow. Here are some things to do to summon
help and keep yourself and your passengers safe:
• Allow greater following distance on any
slippery road.
• Turn on your hazard flashers.
• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police
that you have been stopped by the snow.
• Watch for slippery spots. The road might be
fine until you hit a spot that is covered with
ice. On an otherwise clear road, ice patches
may appear in shaded areas where the
sun cannot reach, such as around clumps of
trees, behind buildings, or under bridges.
Sometimes the surface of a curve or an
overpass may remain icy when the
• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around
you. If you do not have blankets or extra
clothing, make body insulators from
newspapers, burlap bags, rags, floor
mats — anything you can wrap around
yourself or tuck under your clothing to
keep warm.
surrounding roads are clear. If you see a
patch of ice ahead of you, brake before you
are on it. Try not to brake while you are
actually on the ice, and avoid sudden
steering maneuvers.
346
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your
vehicle. This can cause deadly CO
(carbon monoxide) gas to get inside. CO
could overcome you and kill you. You
cannot see it or smell it, so you might not
know it is in your vehicle. Clear away
snow from around the base of your
vehicle, especially any that is blocking the
exhaust pipe. And check around again
from time to time to be sure snow does
not collect there.
Open a window just a little on the side of
the vehicle that is away from the wind.
This will help keep CO out.
You can run the engine to keep warm, but be
careful.
Run your engine only as long as you must. This
saves fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a
little faster than just idle. That is, push the
accelerator slightly. This uses less fuel for the
heat that you get and it keeps the battery charged.
347
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You will need a well-charged battery to restart the
vehicle, and possibly for signaling later on with
your headlamps. Let the heater run for a while.
{CAUTION:
Then, shut the engine off and close the window
almost all the way to preserve the heat. Start
the engine again and repeat this only when you
feel really uncomfortable from the cold. But do it as
little as possible. Preserve the fuel as long as
you can. To help keep warm, you can get out of
the vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercises
every half hour or so until help comes.
If you let your vehicle’s tires spin at high
speed, they can explode, and you or
others could be injured. And, the
transmission or other parts of the vehicle
can overheat. That could cause an engine
compartment fire or other damage. When
you are stuck, spin the wheels as little as
possible. Do not spin the wheels above
35 mph (55 km/h) as shown on the
speedometer.
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,
Mud, Ice, or Snow
In order to free your vehicle when it is stuck,
you need to spin the wheels, but you do not
want to spin the wheels too fast. The method
known as rocking can help you get out when you
are stuck, but you must use caution.
Notice: Spinning the wheels can destroy
parts of your vehicle as well as the tires. If you
spin the wheels too fast while shifting the
transmission back and forth, you can destroy
the transmission.
For information about using tire chains on your
348
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out
Loading Your Vehicle
First, turn the steering wheel left and right.
That will clear the area around the front wheels.
You should turn the traction control system
page 323. Then shift back and forth between
REVERSE (R) and a forward gear, spinning the
wheels as little as possible. Release the
It is very important to know how much weight your
vehicle can carry. This weight is called the vehicle
capacity weight and includes the weight of all
occupants, cargo, and all nonfactory-installed
options. Two labels on your vehicle show how much
weight it may properly carry, the Tire and Loading
Information label, and the Certification label.
accelerator pedal while you shift, and press lightly
on the accelerator pedal when the transmission
is in gear. By slowly spinning the wheels in
the forward and reverse directions, you will cause
a rocking motion that may free your vehicle. If
that does not get your vehicle out after a few tries,
it may need to be towed out. If your vehicle
does need to be towed out, see Towing Your
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),
or either the maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,
parts on your vehicle can break, and it
can change the way your vehicle handles.
These could cause you to lose control
and crash. Also, overloading can shorten
the life of your vehicle.
349
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information
label is attached to the vehicle’s center pillar
(B-pillar). With the driver’s door open, you will find
the label attached below the door lock post (striker).
The Tire and Loading Information label shows the
number of occupant seating positions (A), and the
maximum vehicle capacity weight (B) in kilograms
and pounds.
Tire and Loading Information Label
The Tire and Loading Information label also shows
the tire size of the original equipment tires (C) and
the recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D).
For more information on tires and inflation see Tires
page 431.
There is also important loading information on the
Certification label. It tells you the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear axle; see
“Certification Label” later in this section.
Example Label
350
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity calculated
in Step 4.
Steps for Determining Correct
Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight
of occupants and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle’s
placard.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load
from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how
this reduces the available cargo and luggage
load capacity of your vehicle.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver
and passengers that will be riding in your
vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
Your vehicle is not designed nor intended to
tow any trailer.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX” amount equals
1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lb
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
351
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Example 1
Description
Example 2
Description
Item
Total
Item
Total
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for Example 1 =
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for Example 2 =
A
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
A
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
Subtract
Subtract
B
C
Occupant Weight
300 lbs (136 kg)
700 lbs (317 kg)
B
C
Occupant Weight
750 lbs (340 kg)
250 lbs (113 kg)
150 lbs (68 kg) × 2 =
Available Occupant
and Cargo Weight =
150 lbs (68 kg) × 5 =
Available Cargo
Weight =
352
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Certification Label
Example 3
Description
Item
Total
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for Example 3 =
A
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
Subtract Occupant
Weight 200 lbs
(91 kg) × 5 =
Available Cargo
Weight =
A vehicle specific Certification label is attached to
either the driver’s door edge or the lower center
pillar on the driver’s side of the vehicle. This label
shows the gross weight capacity of your vehicle,
called the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR).
B
C
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
0 lbs (0 kg)
Refer to your vehicle’s Tire and Loading
Information label for specific information about
your vehicle’s capacity weight and seating
positions. The combined weight of the driver,
passengers, and cargo should never exceed your
vehicle’s capacity weight.
353
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle, all
occupants, fuel, and cargo. The Certification
label also shows the maximum weights for the
front and rear axles, called the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR). Never exceed the GVWR or
the GAWR for either the front or rear axle.
If you put things inside your vehicle, like suitcases,
tools, packages, or anything else, they will go
as fast as the vehicle goes. If you have to stop or
turn quickly, or if there is a crash, they will
keep going.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Things you put inside your vehicle can
strike and injure people in a sudden stop
or turn, or in a crash.
• Put things in the trunk of your vehicle.
In a trunk, put them as far forward as
you can. Try to spread the weight
evenly.
• Never stack heavier things, like
suitcases, inside the vehicle so that
some of them are above the tops of
the seats.
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),
or either the maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,
parts on your vehicle can break, and it
can change the way your vehicle handles.
These could cause you to lose control
and crash. Also, overloading can shorten
the life of your vehicle.
• Do not leave an unsecured child
restraint in your vehicle.
Notice: Overloading your vehicle may cause
damage. Repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Do not overload your vehicle.
• When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
• Do not leave a seat folded down unless
you need to.
354
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
With the proper preparation and equipment, many
vehicles can be towed in these ways. See
“Dinghy Towing” and “Dolly Towing,” following.
Towing
Towing Your Vehicle
Here are some important things to consider before
you do recreational vehicle towing:
Consult your dealer or a professional towing
service if you need to have your disabled vehicle
• What is the towing capacity of the towing
vehicle? Be sure you read the tow vehicle
manufacturer’s recommendations.
If you want to tow your vehicle behind another
vehicle for recreational purposes (such as behind
a motorhome), see Recreational Vehicle Towing
following.
• How far will you tow? Some vehicles have
restrictions on how far and how long they
can tow.
• Do you have the proper towing equipment?
See your dealer or trailering professional
for additional advice and equipment
recommendations.
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Recreational vehicle towing means towing your
vehicle behind another vehicle – such as behind a
motorhome. The two most common types of
recreational vehicle towing are known as “dinghy
towing” (towing your vehicle with all four wheels
on the ground) and “dolly towing” (towing
• Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just as
you would prepare your vehicle for a long
trip, you will want to make sure your vehicle is
prepared to be towed. See Before Leaving
your vehicle with two wheels on the ground and
two wheels up on a device known as a “dolly”).
355
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dinghy Towing
Notice: If you tow your vehicle with all
four wheels on the ground, the drivetrain
components could be damaged. The repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Do not
tow your vehicle with all four wheels on the
ground.
Your vehicle was not designed to be towed with
all four wheels on the ground. If your vehicle must
be towed, you should use a dolly. See “Dolly
Towing” later in this section for more information.
Dolly Towing (Rear-Wheel-Drive
Vehicles) (STS Only)
Notice: Dolly towing or dinghy towing your
vehicle may cause damage because of reduced
ground clearance. Always tow your vehicle
using the dolly towing or dinghy towing
procedure listed in this section or put your
vehicle on a flatbed truck.
If your vehicle is a rear-wheel drive, it can be towed
using a dolly. To tow your vehicle using a dolly,
follow these steps:
1. Put the rear wheels on the dolly.
2. Put the vehicle in PARK (P).
356
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Set the parking brake and then remove the key.
Dolly Towing (All-Wheel-Drive Vehicles)
4. Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-ahead
position with a clamping device designed for
towing.
Notice: Towing an all-wheel-drive vehicle
with all four wheels on the ground, or even
with only two of its wheels on the ground, will
damage drivetrain components. Do not tow
an all-wheel-drive vehicle if any of its wheels
will be on the ground.
5. Release the parking brake.
Dolly Towing (STS-V)
Notice: Dolly towing or dinghy towing your
vehicle may cause damage because of reduced
ground clearance. Always put your vehicle
on a flatbed truck.
If you have an All-Wheel Drive (AWD) vehicle, it
can only be towed on a flat-bed trailer.
Towing a Trailer
If you have an STS-V, it can only be towed on a
flat-bed trailer.
Your vehicle is neither designed nor intended to
tow a trailer.
357
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
358
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
360
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
361
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
We hope you will want to keep your GM vehicle all
GM. Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:
Service
Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants
you to be happy with it. We hope you will go
to your dealer for all your service needs. You will
get genuine GM parts and GM-trained and
supported service people.
362
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Accessories and Modifications
California Proposition 65 Warning
When you add non-GM accessories to your vehicle
they can affect your vehicle’s performance and
safety, including such things as, airbags, braking,
stability, ride and handling, emissions systems,
aerodynamics, durability, and electronic systems
like anti-lock brakes, traction control and stability
control. Some of these accessories may even
cause malfunction or damage not covered by
warranty.
Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain
and/or emit chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm. Engine exhaust, many parts and
systems (including some inside the vehicle), many
fluids, and some component wear by-products
contain and/or emit these chemicals.
GM Accessories are designed to complement and
function with other systems on your vehicle.
Your GM dealer can accessorize your vehicle
using genuine GM Accessories. When you go to
your GM dealer and ask for GM Accessories,
you will know that GM-trained and supported
service technicians will perform the work using
genuine GM Accessories.
363
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you want to do some of your own service work,
you should use the proper service manual. It
tells you much more about how to service your
vehicle than this manual can. To order the proper
service manual, see Service Publications
Doing Your Own Service Work
{CAUTION:
You can be injured and your vehicle could
be damaged if you try to do service work
on a vehicle without knowing enough
about it.
• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement
parts, and tools before you attempt any
vehicle maintenance task.
• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts,
and other fasteners. English and metric
fasteners can be easily confused. If you
use the wrong fasteners, parts can later
break or fall off. You could be hurt.
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before
attempting to do your own service work, see
page 78.
You should keep a record with all parts receipts
and list the mileage and the date of any service
work you perform. See Maintenance Record
on page 521.
364
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adding Equipment to the Outside
of Your Vehicle
Gasoline Octane
If your vehicle has the 3.6L V6 engine
(VIN Code 7), use regular unleaded gasoline with
a posted octane rating of 87 or higher. For
best performance or trailer towing, you may
choose to use middle grade 89 octane unleaded
gasoline. If the octane rating is less than 87,
you may notice an audible knocking noise when
you drive, commonly referred to as spark knock. If
this occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane
or higher as soon as possible. If you are using
gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher and you hear
heavy knocking, your engine needs service.
Things you might add to the outside of your
vehicle can affect the airflow around it. This may
cause wind noise and affect windshield washer
performance. Check with your dealer before
adding equipment to the outside of your vehicle.
Fuel
Use of the recommended fuel is an important part
of the proper maintenance of your vehicle. To
help keep your engine clean and maintain optimum
vehicle performance, GM recommends the use
of gasoline advertised as TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline.
If your vehicle has the 4.6L V8 engine
(VIN Code A), use premium unleaded gasoline with
a posted octane rating of 91 or higher. You may
also use regular unleaded gasoline rated at
87 octane or higher, but your vehicle’s acceleration
may be slightly reduced, and you may notice a
slight audible knocking noise, commonly referred to
as spark knock.
The 8th digit of your Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) shows the code letter or number
that identifies your engine. You will find the VIN at
the top left of the instrument panel. See Vehicle
365
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the octane is less than 87, you may notice a
heavy knocking noise when you drive. If this occurs,
use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as soon
as possible. Otherwise, you might damage your
engine. If you are using gasoline rated at 87 octane
or higher and you hear heavy knocking, your engine
needs service.
Gasoline Specifications
At a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTM
specification D 4814 in the United States or
CAN/CGSB-3.5 in Canada. Some gasolines may
contain an octane-enhancing additive called
methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
(MMT). General Motors recommends against the
use of gasolines containing MMT. See Additives
on page 367 for additional information.
If your vehicle has the 4.4L V8 engine
(VIN Code D), use premium unleaded gasoline with
a posted octane rating of 91 or higher. For best
performance, use premium unleaded gasoline with
a posted octane rating of 93. In an emergency, you
can use regular unleaded gasoline with an octane
rating of 87 or higher. If 87 octane fuel is used, do
not perform any aggressive driving maneuvers such
as wide open throttle applications. You may also
hear audible spark knock during acceleration. Refill
your tank with premium fuel as soon as possible to
avoid damaging your engine. If you are using
gasoline rated at 91 octane or higher and you hear
heavy knocking, your engine needs service.
California Fuel
If your vehicle is certified to meet California
Emissions Standards, it is designed to operate on
fuels that meet California specifications. See the
underhood emission control label. If this fuel is not
available in states adopting California emissions
standards, your vehicle will operate satisfactorily on
fuels meeting federal specifications, but emission
control system performance may be affected.
366
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The malfunction indicator lamp may turn on and
your vehicle may fail a smog-check test. See
occurs, return to your authorized GM dealer for
diagnosis. If it is determined that the condition is
caused by the type of fuel used, repairs may not be
covered by your warranty.
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers
and ethanol, and reformulated gasolines may
be available in your area. General Motors
recommends that you use these gasolines if they
comply with the specifications described earlier.
However, E85 (85% ethanol) and other fuels
containing more than 10% ethanol must not be
used in vehicles that were not designed for
those fuels.
Additives
Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for
fuel that contains methanol. Do not use
fuel containing methanol. It can corrode metal
parts in the fuel system and also damage
plastic and rubber parts. That damage would
not be covered under your warranty.
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United
States are now required to contain additives
that will help prevent engine and fuel system
deposits from forming, allowing your emission
control system to work properly. In most cases,
you should not have to add anything to your fuel.
However, some gasolines contain only the
minimum amount of additive required to meet U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency regulations.
To help keep fuel injectors and intake valves clean,
or if your vehicle experiences problems due to
dirty injectors or valves, look for gasoline that is
advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline. Also,
your dealer has additives that will help correct
and prevent most deposit-related problems.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions may contain an octane-enhancing
additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
tricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant where you
buy gasoline whether the fuel contains MMT.
General Motors recommends against the use of
such gasolines. Fuels containing MMT can reduce
the life of spark plugs and the performance of
the emission control system may be affected. The
malfunction indicator lamp may turn on. If this
occurs, return to your dealer for service.
367
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
Filling the Tank
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel might be
hard to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other
fuel not recommended in the previous text on fuel.
Costly repairs caused by use of improper fuel would
not be covered by your warranty.
{CAUTION:
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire
can cause bad injuries. To help avoid
injuries to you and others, read and follow
all the instructions on the pump island.
Turn off your engine when you are
refueling. Do not smoke if you are near
fuel or refueling your vehicle. Do not use
cellular phones. Keep sparks, flames, and
smoking materials away from fuel. Do not
leave the fuel pump unattended when
refueling your vehicle. This is against the
law in some places. Do not re-enter
vehicle while pumping fuel. Keep children
away from the fuel pump; never let
children pump fuel.
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business
in the country where you will be driving.
368
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The tethered fuel cap
is located behind a
hinged fuel door on the
passenger’s side of
the vehicle.
{CAUTION:
If you spill fuel and then something
ignites it, you could be badly burned. Fuel
can spray out on you if you open the fuel
cap too quickly. This spray can happen if
your tank is nearly full, and is more likely
in hot weather. Open the fuel cap slowly
and wait for any hiss noise to stop. Then
unscrew the cap all the way.
To open the fuel door, apply pressure in the
center of the rear edge of the fuel door and it will
pop open.
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill
the tank, and wait a few seconds after you have
finished pumping before removing the nozzle.
Clean fuel from painted surfaces as soon as
To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly
counterclockwise. The fuel cap has a spring in it;
if the cap is released too soon, it will spring back to
the right.
While refueling, hang the tethered fuel cap from
the hook on the fuel door.
369
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwise until
it clicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed.
The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel
cap has been left off or improperly installed.
This would allow fuel to evaporate into the
page 252.
{CAUTION:
If a fire starts while you are refueling, do
not remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of
fuel by shutting off the pump or by
notifying the station attendant. Leave the
area immediately.
The CHECK GAS CAP message will appear on
the Driver Information Center (DIC) display if
the fuel cap is not reinstalled properly. See DIC
more information.
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to
get the right type. Your dealer can get one
for you. If you get the wrong type, it may not
fit properly. This may cause your malfunction
indicator lamp to light and may damage
your fuel tank and emissions system. See
370
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
CAUTION: (Continued)
• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the
inside of the fill opening before
operating the nozzle. Contact should
be maintained until the filling is
complete.
• Do not smoke while pumping
gasoline.
{CAUTION:
Never fill a portable fuel container while it
is in your vehicle. Static electricity
discharge from the container can ignite the
gasoline vapor. You can be badly burned
and your vehicle damaged if this occurs.
To help avoid injury to you and others:
• Dispense gasoline only into approved
containers.
• Do not use a cellular phone while
pumping gasoline.
• Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup
bed, or on any surface other than the
ground.
CAUTION: (Continued)
371
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hood Release
Checking Things Under
the Hood
To open the hood, do the following:
1. Pull the hood
release lever with
this symbol on
it. It is located inside
the vehicle on the
lower left side of the
instrument panel.
{CAUTION:
An electric fan under the hood can start up
and injure you even when the engine is not
running. Keep hands, clothing, and tools
away from any underhood electric fan.
{CAUTION:
Things that burn can get on hot engine
parts and start a fire. These include
liquids like fuel, oil, coolant, brake fluid,
windshield washer and other fluids, and
plastic or rubber. You or others could be
burned. Be careful not to drop or spill
things that will burn onto a hot engine.
372
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Compartment Overview
Your vehicle may be equipped with front
compartment underhood sight shields, which
surround the vehicle’s engine cover. These sight
shields will need to be removed in order to access
some of the underhood components in your vehicle.
To remove the sight shields, turn the fasteners on
each shield to the left until they pop out. Then
remove the fasteners and lift the shields up and
away from the tower to tower brace.
2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and find
the secondary hood release lever. The lever
is located under the front edge of the
grille near the center. Move the release lever
to the side and raise the hood.
Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps
are on properly. Then pull the hood down and
close it firmly.
373
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.6L V6 Engine
374
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
After you have removed the sight shields (if equipped) on the 3.6L V6 engine, here is what you will see:
B. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See
“Adding Washer Fluid” under Windshield
G. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out of View). See
page 380.
H. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake
D. Passenger Compartment Air Filter. See
I. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap.
F. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine
375
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.6L V8 Engine
376
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
After you have removed the sight shields (if equipped) on the 4.6L V8 engine, here is what you will see:
G. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out of View). See
page 380.
H. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake
C. Passenger Compartment Air Filter. See
I. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap.
D. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See
“Adding Washer Fluid” under Windshield
F. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine
377
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.4L V8 STS-V Engine
378
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
After you have removed the sight shields (if equipped) on the 4.4L V8 STS-V engine, here is what
you will see:
I. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake
J. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap.
C. Passenger Compartment Air Filter. See
D. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See
“Adding Washer Fluid” under Windshield
G. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine
If your vehicle is equipped with front compartment
underhood sight shields, before closing the
hood be sure to reinstall the sight shields. To
reinstall the shields, locate the tabs on the left and
right sides and insert them into the openings in
the tower to tower brace. Then insert the fasteners
into the top of the shield and push the fasteners
back into place.
H. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out of View). See
page 380.
379
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When to Add Engine Oil
Engine Oil
Checking Engine Oil
It is a good idea to check the engine oil every time
you get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading,
the oil must be warm and the vehicle must be
on level ground.
The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop.
for the location of the engine oil dipstick.
1. Turn off the engine and give the oil several
minutes to drain back into the oil pan. If you
do not do this, the oil dipstick might not
show the actual level.
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper
towel or cloth, then push it back in all the
way. Remove it again, keeping the tip down,
and check the level.
V8 Engine
380
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the oil is below the cross-hatched area at the
tip of the dipstick, you need to add at least
one quart/liter of oil. But you must use the right
kind. This section explains what kind of oil to use.
For engine oil crankcase capacity, see Capacities
See Engine
on page 373 for the
location of the engine oil
fill cap.
Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the engine
has so much oil that the oil level gets above
the cross-hatched area that shows the
proper operating range, the engine could be
damaged.
Be sure to add enough oil to put the level
somewhere in the proper operating range. Push
the dipstick all the way back in when you are
through.
381
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If you use oils that do not have the
GM4718M Standard designation, you can cause
engine damage not covered by your warranty.
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
• SAE 5W-30
As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 is
best for your vehicle.
These numbers on an oil container show its
viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other
viscosity oils such as SAE 20W-50.
Oils meeting these
requirements should
also have the starburst
symbol on the
container. This symbol
indicates that the oil
has been certified by the
American Petroleum
Institute (API).
• GM4718M
Your vehicle’s engine requires a special oil
meeting GM Standard GM4718M. Oils meeting
this standard may be identified as synthetic.
However, not all synthetic oils will meet
this GM standard. Look for and use only an oil
that meets GM Standard GM4718M.
Look for this on the oil container, and use only
those oils that are identified as meeting GM
Standard GM4718M and have the starburst symbol
on the front of the oil container.
382
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your vehicle’s engine is filled at the factory with a
Mobil 1® synthetic oil, which meets all
requirements for your vehicle.
Engine Oil Life System
When to Change Engine Oil
Substitute Engine Oil: When adding oil to maintain
engine oil level, oil meeting GM Standard
GM4718M may not be available. You can add
substitute oil designated SAE 5W-30 with
the starburst symbol at all temperatures. Substitute
oil not meeting GM Standard GM4718M should
not be used for an oil change.
Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you
know when to change the engine oil and filter.
This is based on engine revolutions and engine
temperature, and not on mileage. Based on driving
conditions, the mileage at which an oil change
will be indicated can vary considerably. For the oil
life system to work properly, you must reset the
system every time the oil is changed.
Engine Oil Additives
Notice: If your vehicle is an STS-V model, the
engine uses a special oil filter. The use of
any other engine oil filter could lead to filter
failure and result in severe engine damage.
Damage caused by use of the wrong engine oil
filter would not be covered by your new
vehicle warranty.
Do not add anything to the oil. The recommended
oils with the starburst symbol that meet GM
standards are all you need for good performance
and engine protection.
383
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the system has calculated that oil life has
been diminished, it will indicate that an oil change is
necessary. A CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
message in the DIC will come on. See DIC
your oil as soon as possible within the next
600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible that, if you are
driving under the best conditions, the oil life system
may not indicate that an oil change is necessary for
over a year. However, your engine oil and filter
must be changed at least once a year and at this
time the system must be reset. Your dealer has
GM-trained service people who will perform this
work using genuine GM parts and reset the system.
It is also important to check your oil regularly and
keep it at the proper level.
How to Reset the Engine Oil Life
System
The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to
change your engine oil and filter based on vehicle
use. Anytime your oil is changed, reset the
system so it can calculate when the next oil
change is required. If a situation occurs where you
change your oil prior to a CHANGE ENGINE
OIL SOON message in the DIC being turned on,
reset the system.
After the oil has been changed, the CHANGE
ENGINE OIL SOON message must be reset. To
reset the message use the following procedure:
1. Press the up or down arrow to scroll the DIC
to show OIL LIFE.
If the system is ever reset accidentally, you must
change your oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km)
since your last oil change. Remember to reset the
oil life system whenever the oil is changed.
2. Once the XXX% ENGINE OIL LIFE menu item
is highlighted, press and hold the RESET
button until the percentage shows 100%.
If the percentage does not return to 100% or if
the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message
comes back on when you start your
vehicle, the engine oil life system has not
reset. Repeat the procedure.
384
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
What to Do with Used Oil
Supercharger Oil
Used engine oil contains certain elements that may
be unhealthy for your skin and could even cause
cancer. Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very
long. Clean your skin and nails with soap and
water, or a good hand cleaner. Wash or properly
dispose of clothing or rags containing used engine
oil. See the manufacturer’s warnings about the use
and disposal of oil products.
Because they are technically qualified and have
the proper tools, you should have your dealer
perform this maintenance.
When to Check
when the oil level should be checked.
What Kind of Oil to Use
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from
the filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by
putting it in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into
sewers, or into streams or bodies of water. Instead,
recycle it by taking it to a place that collects used
oil. If you have a problem properly disposing of your
used oil, ask your dealer, a service station, or a
local recycling center for help.
Use only the recommended supercharger oil. See
page 516.
385
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance II
intervals and replace it at the first oil change
after each 50,000 mile (83 000 km) interval. See
information. If you are driving in dusty/dirty
conditions, inspect the filter at each engine
oil change.
How to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
To inspect the air cleaner/filter remove the filter
from the vehicle and lightly shake the filter to
release loose dust and dirt. If the filter remains
caked with dirt, a new filter is required.
4.6L V8 Engine shown, 3.6L V6 Engine similar
The engine air cleaner/filter is in the engine
compartment on the driver’s side of the vehicle,
near the front. See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 373 for more information on locating
the air cleaner/filter.
To inspect or replace the filter in the 3.6L V6 or
4.6L V8 engines, do the following:
1. Remove the two screws located on the top of
the cover.
2. Disconnect the coolant recovery hose so that
it is not going across the top of the engine air
cleaner/filter.
386
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Loosen the clamp and remove the duct from
the passenger’s side of the engine air
cleaner/filter.
{CAUTION:
4. The two sides of the airbox are hinged at the
bottom. Open the airbox by pushing the top of
the airbox cover toward the engine.
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/
filter off can cause you or others to be
burned. The air cleaner not only cleans the
air; it helps to stop flames if the engine
backfires. If it is not there and the engine
backfires, you could be burned. Do not
drive with it off, and be careful working on
the engine with the air cleaner/filter off.
5. Remove the air filter by lifting it straight up
through the opening in the airbox.
6. Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter.
on page 518 for the correct part number
for the filter.
7. Reinstall the cover by reversing
Steps 1 through 4.
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire
can cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt
can easily get into your engine, which will
damage it. Always have the air cleaner/filter in
place when you are driving.
If your vehicle has the 4.4L V8 STS-V engine,
there is a special procedure for checking
and changing the air cleaner/filter. Because this
procedure is difficult, you should have this done at
the dealership service department. Contact your
dealer for additional information or the procedure
can be found in the service manual. To purchase
a service manual, see Service Publications
387
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contact your dealer for additional information or
the procedure can be found in the service manual.
To purchase a service manual, see Service
Automatic Transmission Fluid
How to Check Automatic
Transmission Fluid
Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic
transmission fluid may damage your vehicle,
and the damages may not be covered by
your warranty. Always use the automatic
transmission fluid listed in Recommended
Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed in
be sure to use the fluid listed in Recommended
It is not necessary to check the transmission fluid
level. A transmission fluid leak is the only
reason for fluid loss. If a leak occurs, take the
vehicle to the dealership service department and
have it repaired as soon as possible.
There is a special procedure for checking and
changing the transmission fluid. Because
this procedure is difficult, you should have this
done at the dealership service department.
388
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Protect against rust and corrosion.
• Help keep the proper engine temperature.
• Let the warning lights and gages work as
they should.
Engine Coolant
The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with
DEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is
designed to remain in your vehicle for five years or
150,000 miles (240 000 km), whichever occurs
first, if you add only DEX-COOL® extended
life coolant.
Notice: Using coolant other than
DEX-COOL® may cause premature engine,
heater core, or radiator corrosion. In addition,
the engine coolant may require changing
sooner, at the first maintenance service after
each 30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,
whichever occurs first. Any repairs
The following explains your cooling system and
how to add coolant when it is low. If you have
a problem with engine overheating, see Engine
would not be covered by your warranty.
Always use DEX-COOL® (silicate-free)
coolant in your vehicle.
A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant will:
• Give freezing protection down to
−34°F (−37°C).
• Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).
389
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If you use an improper coolant
mixture, your engine could overheat and be
badly damaged. The repair cost would not be
covered by your warranty. Too much water
in the mixture can freeze and crack the engine,
radiator, heater core, and other parts.
What to Use
Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water
and one-half DEX-COOL® coolant which will
not damage aluminum parts. If you use this coolant
mixture, you do not need to add anything else.
If you have to add coolant more than once or
twice a year, have your dealer check your cooling
system.
{CAUTION:
Notice: If you use extra inhibitors and/or
additives in your vehicle’s cooling system, you
could damage your vehicle. Use only the
proper mixture of the engine coolant listed in
this manual for the cooling system. See
page 516 for more information.
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can
boil before the proper coolant mixture will.
Your vehicle’s coolant warning system is
set for the proper coolant mixture. With
plain water or the wrong mixture, your
engine could get too hot but you would
not get the overheat warning. Your engine
could catch fire and you or others could
be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
390
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Checking Coolant
{CAUTION:
Turning the surge tank pressure cap when
the engine and radiator are hot can allow
steam and scalding liquids to blow out
and burn you badly. Never turn the surge
tank pressure cap — even a little — when
the engine and radiator are hot.
The vehicle must be on a level surface. When
your engine is cold, the coolant level should be at
the FULL COLD/FROID line on the side of the
surge tank. Follow the arrow from the top of
the tank down the side to the horizontal mark.
The coolant surge tank and pressure cap are
located on the driver’s side of the vehicle, toward
the rear of the engine compartment. See
more information on location.
391
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: This vehicle has a specific coolant fill
procedure. Failure to follow this procedure
could cause your engine to overheat and
be severely damaged.
Checking Intercooler System Coolant
(4.4L V8 STS-V Engine Only)
Park the vehicle on a level surface and turn off the
engine. When the engine is cold, the coolant
level should be visible in the intercooler fill neck.
Adding Coolant
If you need more coolant, add the proper
DEX-COOL® coolant mixture at the intercooler fill
neck, but only when the engine is cool. See
how to add coolant to the intercooler fill neck.
for the location of the intercooler system
pressure cap.
392
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Overheating
{CAUTION:
There are two engine hot messages that could be
displayed in the Driver Information Center (DIC).
more information.
You can be burned if you spill coolant on
hot engine parts. Coolant contains
ethylene glycol, and it will burn if the
engine parts are hot enough. Do not spill
coolant on a hot engine.
If the engine is overheating, then you will find a
coolant temperature gage and a coolant warning
light on the instrument panel. See Engine
page 251 for more information.
When replacing a pressure cap, make sure it is
hand-tight and fully seated.
Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly
installed, coolant loss and possible engine
damage may occur. Be sure the cap is properly
and tightly secured.
The coolant surge tank pressure cap must be fully
installed on the coolant surge tank. See Engine
information on location.
393
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If your engine catches fire because
you keep driving with no coolant, your vehicle
can be badly damaged. The costly repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. See
on page 395 for information on driving to a
safe place in an emergency.
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
{CAUTION:
Steam from an overheated engine can
burn you badly, even if you just open the
hood. Stay away from the engine if you
see or hear steam coming from it. Turn it
off and get everyone away from the
vehicle until it cools down. Wait until
there is no sign of steam or coolant
before you open the hood.
If No Steam Is Coming From
Your Engine
An overheat warning, can indicate a serious
problem.
If you get an engine overheat warning but see or
hear no steam, the problem might not be too
serious. Sometimes the engine can get a little too
hot when you:
If you keep driving when the vehicles
engine is overheated, the liquids in it can
catch fire. You or others could be badly
burned. Stop your engine if it overheats,
and get out of the vehicle until the engine
is cool.
• Climb a long hill on a hot day.
• Stop after high-speed driving.
• Idle for long periods in traffic.
• Tow a trailer.
information on driving to a safe place in
an emergency.
394
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you get the overheat warning with no sign of
steam, try this for a minute or so:
Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode
1. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in
NEUTRAL (N) while stopped. If it is safe to do
so, pull off the road, shift to PARK (P) or
NEUTRAL (N) and let the engine idle.
This operating mode allows your vehicle to be
driven to a safe place in an emergency. Should an
overheated engine condition exist, an overheat
protection mode which alternates firing groups of
cylinders helps prevent engine damage. In this
mode, you will notice a loss in power and engine
performance. An engine overheat warning will
indicate that an overheat condition exists. Driving
extended miles (km) and/or towing a trailer in
the overheat protection mode should be avoided.
2. Set the climate controls to the highest heat
setting and fan speed and open the windows,
as necessary.
If the coolant warning light is not on or the coolant
temperature gage does not indicate the engine
is overheating, you can drive. Just to be safe, drive
slower for about 10 minutes. If the warnings do
not come back on, drive normally.
Notice: After driving in the overheated
engine protection operating mode, to avoid
engine damage, allow the engine to cool before
attempting any repair. The engine oil will be
severely degraded. Repair the cause of coolant
page 380.
If the warnings continue and you have not stopped,
pull over, stop, and park the vehicle right away.
If there is still no sign of steam, idle the engine for
three minutes while parked. If the warnings are
still indicated, turn off the engine and get everyone
out of the vehicle until it cools down. Also, see
“Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode”
later in this section.
You might decide not to lift the hood but to get
service help right away.
395
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Some vehicles may have an engine driven fan, as
well as the electric pusher fans which are
located behind the vehicle’s grille.
Cooling System
When you decide it is safe to lift the hood, this is
what you will see:
{CAUTION:
An electric engine cooling fan under the
hood can start up even when the engine
is not running and can injure you. Keep
hands, clothing, and tools away from any
underhood electric fan.
If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is
boiling, do not do anything else until it cools down.
The vehicle should be parked on a level surface.
When the engine is cold, the coolant level
should be at or slightly above the FULL
COLD/FROID line on the side of the coolant surge
tank. If it is not, you may have a leak at the
pressure cap or in the radiator hoses, heater
hoses, radiator, water pump, or somewhere else
in the cooling system.
3.6L V6 Engine shown, 4.6L V8 and 4.4L V8 STS-V
Engines similar
A. Engine Cooling Fans
B. Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap
396
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Engine damage from running your
engine without coolant is not covered by your
warranty. See Overheated Engine Protection
driving to a safe place in an emergency.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL®
may cause premature engine, heater core,
or radiator corrosion. In addition, the engine
coolant could require changing sooner, at
30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,
whichever occurs first. Any repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your
vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Heater and radiator hoses, and other
engine parts, can be very hot. Do not
touch them. If you do, you can be burned.
Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If
you run the engine, it could lose all
coolant. That could cause an engine fire,
and you could be burned. Get any leak
fixed before you drive the vehicle.
If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on,
check to see if the electric engine cooling fans
are running. If the engine is overheating, both fans
should be running. If they are not, your vehicle
needs service.
397
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Surge Tank
CAUTION: (Continued)
If you have not found a problem yet, check to see
if coolant is visible in the surge tank. If coolant
is visible but the coolant level is not at the FULL
COLD/FROID line on the side of the coolant
surge tank, add a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and DEX-COOL® coolant at the coolant
surge tank, but be sure the cooling system,
including the coolant surge tank pressure cap, is
page 389 for more information.
surge tank pressure cap, is hot. Wait for
the cooling system and coolant surge
tank pressure cap to cool if you ever have
to turn the pressure cap.
{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can
boil before the proper coolant mixture will.
Your vehicle’s coolant warning system is
set for the proper coolant mixture. With
plain water or the wrong mixture, your
engine could get too hot but you would
not get the overheat warning. Your engine
could catch fire and you or others could
be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
{CAUTION:
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot
cooling system can blow out and burn
you badly. They are under pressure, and if
you turn the coolant surge tank pressure
cap — even a little — they can come out at
high speed. Never turn the cap when the
cooling system, including the coolant
CAUTION: (Continued)
398
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and
crack the engine, radiator, heater core and
other parts. Use the recommended coolant and
the proper coolant mixture.
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on
hot engine parts. Coolant contains
ethylene glycol and it will burn if the
engine parts are hot enough. Do not spill
coolant on a hot engine.
2. Then keep turning the pressure cap slowly,
and remove it.
If no coolant is visible in the surge tank, add
coolant as follows:
1. Remove the coolant surge tank pressure cap
when the cooling system, including the
coolant surge tank pressure cap and upper
radiator hose, is no longer hot. Turn the
pressure cap slowly counterclockwise about
one-quarter of a turn. If you hear a hiss,
wait for that to stop. A hiss means there is still
some pressure left.
399
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
By this time, the coolant level inside the
coolant surge tank may be lower. If the level
is lower, add more of the proper mixture
to the coolant surge tank until the level
reaches the FULL COLD/FROID line on the
side of the coolant surge tank.
5. Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure the
pressure cap is hand-tight and fully seated.
Start the engine and allow it to warm up.
How to Add Coolant to the Intercooler
System Fill Neck (4.4L V8 STS-V
Engine Only)
3. Fill the coolant surge tank with the proper
DEX-COOL® coolant mixture, to slightly
above the FULL COLD/FROID line on the
side of the coolant surge tank.
If you have not found a problem yet, turn the
engine off and allow it to cool down, then check to
see if coolant is visible within the horizontal
tube section of the fill neck. If coolant is not visible,
add a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water
and DEX-COOL® coolant to the fill neck. Be sure
the Intercooler System, including the Intercooler
System pressure cap, is cool before doing so. See
4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off,
start the engine and let it run until you can
feel the upper radiator hose getting hot. The
upper radiator hose is the largest of the
hoses which comes out of the radiator, on the
passenger side of the vehicle. Watch out
for the engine cooling fans.
400
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CAUTION: (Continued)
{CAUTION:
engine could get too hot but you would
not get the overheat warning. Your engine
could catch fire and you or others could
be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
Turning the Intercooler System pressure
cap when the engine and intercooler are
hot can allow steam and scalding liquids
to blow out and burn you badly. Never
turn the Intercooler System pressure cap,
even a little, when the engine and
intercooler are hot.
Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and
crack the engine, radiator, heater core and
other parts. Use the recommended coolant and
the proper coolant mixture.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can
boil before the proper coolant mixture will.
Your vehicle’s coolant warning system is
set for the proper coolant mixture. With
plain water or the wrong mixture, your
You can be burned if you spill coolant on
hot engine parts. Coolant contains
ethylene glycol and it will burn if the
engine parts are hot enough. Do not spill
coolant on a hot engine.
CAUTION: (Continued)
401
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Add the proper DEX-COOL® coolant mixture
to the fill neck, until the coolant reaches the
COLD FILL line on the fill neck.
4. With the Intercooler System pressure cap off,
start the engine and let it run for a couple of
minutes. Then turn the engine off. By this time,
the coolant level inside the fill neck may be
lower. If the level drops to where coolant is no
longer visible in the horizontal tube section
of the fill neck, with the engine off add more of
the DEX-COOL® coolant mixture to the fill
neck until the level is again visible in the
horizontal tube section.
5. Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure the
pressure cap is hand-tight and fully seated.
1. Remove the Intercooler System pressure cap
when the Intercooler System, including the
upper intercooler hoses, are no longer
hot. Turn the pressure cap slowly
If the coolant is not at the proper level
when the system cools down again, see
your dealer.
counterclockwise about one-quarter of a turn.
If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop.
This allows any pressure still left to be vented.
2. Then keep turning the pressure cap slowly,
and remove it.
402
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Check Power Steering Fluid
Power Steering Fluid
To check the power steering fluid, do the following:
See Engine
on page 373 for
1. Turn the ignition off and let the engine
compartment cool down.
reservoir location.
2. Wipe the cap and the top of the
reservoir clean.
3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a
clean rag.
4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it.
5. Remove the cap again and look at the
fluid level on the dipstick.
The level should be within the HOT mark. If
necessary, add only enough fluid to bring the
level within the mark.
When to Check Power Steering Fluid
It is not necessary to regularly check power
steering fluid unless you suspect there is a leak in
the system or you hear an unusual noise. A
fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem.
Have the system inspected and repaired.
What to Use
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see
Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use the
proper fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses
and seals.
403
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice:
Windshield Washer Fluid
What to Use
• When using concentrated washer fluid,
follow the manufacturer’s instructions
for adding water.
When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure
to read the manufacturer’s instructions before
use. If you will be operating your vehicle in an area
where the temperature may fall below freezing,
use a fluid that has sufficient protection against
freezing.
• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer
fluid. Water can cause the solution to
freeze and damage your washer fluid tank
and other parts of the washer system.
Also, water does not clean as well
as washer fluid.
Adding Washer Fluid
• Fill your washer fluid tank only
three-quarters full when it is very cold.
This allows for expansion if freezing
occurs, which could damage the tank if it
is completely full.
The CHECK WASHER FLUID message will
appear on the Driver Information Center (DIC)
when the fluid level is low. See DIC Warnings and
• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in
your windshield washer. It can damage
your washer system and paint.
Open the cap with the
washer symbol on it.
Add washer fluid
until the tank is full. See
Overview on page 373
for reservoir location.
404
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
So, it is not a good idea to top off your brake fluid.
Adding brake fluid will not correct a leak. If you
add fluid when your linings are worn, then you will
have too much fluid when you get new brake
linings. You should add or remove brake fluid, as
necessary, only when work is done on the
brake hydraulic system.
Brakes
Brake Fluid
Your brake master
cylinder reservoir is
filled with DOT-3 brake
fluid. See Engine
on page 373 for
{CAUTION:
reservoir location
and access.
If your vehicle has too much brake fluid, it
can spill on the engine. The fluid will burn
if the engine is hot enough. You or others
could be burned, and your vehicle could
be damaged. Add brake fluid only when
work is done on the brake hydraulic
system.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid
level in the reservoir might go down. The first
is that the brake fluid goes down to an acceptable
level during normal brake lining wear. When
new linings are put in, the fluid level goes back
up. The other reason is that fluid is leaking out of
the brake system. If it is, you should have your
brake system fixed, since a leak means that
sooner or later your brakes will not work well, or
will not work at all.
If the ignition is on and the brake fluid is low, the
CHECK BRAKE FLUID message will be
displayed in the Driver Information Center (DIC).
405
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice:
What to Add
• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage
brake system parts. For example, just a
few drops of mineral-based oil, such
as engine oil, in the brake system can
damage brake system parts so badly that
they will have to be replaced. Do not
let someone put in the wrong kind of fluid.
When you do need brake fluid, DOT-3 brake fluid
is recommended for use. DOT-4 brake fluid is
also compatible with your vehicle’s brake system
parts. However, if you choose to use DOT-4
fluid, it is recommended that you flush your brake
hydraulic system and refill it with new DOT-4
fluid at a regular maintenance service every
page 508. Use new brake fluid from a sealed
container only. See Recommended Fluids
• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s
painted surfaces, the paint finish can
be damaged. Be careful not to spill brake
fluid on your vehicle. If you do, wash it
off immediately. See Washing Your Vehicle
on page 480.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the
area around the cap before removing it. This
will help keep dirt from entering the reservoir.
Brake Wear
Your vehicle has four-wheel disc brakes.
{CAUTION:
Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that
make a high-pitched warning sound when the
brake pads are worn and new pads are needed.
The sound may come and go or be heard all
the time your vehicle is moving, except when you
are pushing on the brake pedal firmly.
With the wrong kind of fluid in the brake
system, the brakes may not work well, or
they may not even work at all. This could
cause a crash. Always use the proper
brake fluid.
406
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Brake Pedal Travel
{CAUTION:
See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return
to normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in
pedal travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.
The brake wear warning sound means that
soon the brakes will not work well. That
could lead to an accident. When you hear
the brake wear warning sound, have your
vehicle serviced.
Brake Adjustment
Every time you apply the brakes, with or without
the vehicle moving, your brakes adjust for wear.
Replacing Brake System Parts
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its
many parts have to be of top quality and work well
together if the vehicle is to have really good
braking. Your vehicle was designed and tested with
top-quality GM brake parts. When you replace parts
of your braking system — for example, when your
brake linings wear down and you need new ones
put in — be sure you get new approved
replacement parts. If you do not, your brakes may
no longer work properly. For example, if someone
puts in brake linings that are wrong for your vehicle,
the balance between your front and rear brakes can
change — for the worse. The braking performance
you have come to expect can change in many other
ways if someone puts in the wrong replacement
brake parts.
brake pads could result in costly brake repair.
Some driving conditions or climates may cause
a brake squeal when the brakes are first applied or
lightly applied. This does not mean something is
wrong with your brakes.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated,
inspect brake pads for wear and evenly tighten
wheel nuts in the proper sequence to GM torque
specifications.
Brake linings should always be replaced as
complete axle sets.
407
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Battery
{CAUTION:
Your vehicle has a maintenance free battery.
When it is time for a new battery, get one that has
the replacement number shown on the original
battery’s label. We recommend an ACDelco®
replacement battery. See Engine Compartment
and access.
Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California
to cause cancer and reproductive harm. Wash
hands after handling.
Batteries have acid that can burn you and
gas that can explode. You can be badly
hurt if you are not careful. See Jump
around a battery without getting hurt.
Jump Starting
If your vehicle’s battery has run down, you may
want to use another vehicle and some jumper
cables to start your vehicle. Be sure to use
the following steps to do it safely.
Vehicle Storage
If you are not going to drive your vehicle for
25 days or more, remove the black, negative (−)
cable from the battery. This will help keep
your battery from running down.
408
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a
12-volt system with a negative ground,
both vehicles can be damaged. Only use
vehicles with 12-volt systems with negative
grounds to jump start your vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Batteries can hurt you. They can be
dangerous because:
• They contain acid that can burn you.
• They contain gas that can explode
or ignite.
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper
cables can reach, but be sure the vehicles are
not touching each other. If they are, it could
cause a ground connection you do not
want. You would not be able to start your
vehicle and the bad grounding could damage
the electrical systems.
• They contain enough electricity to
burn you.
If you do not follow these steps exactly,
some or all of these things can hurt you.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling,
set the parking brake firmly on both vehicles
involved in the jump start procedure. Put
an automatic transmission in PARK (P) or a
manual transmission in NEUTRAL before
setting the parking brake.
Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in
costly damage to your vehicle that would
not be covered by your warranty.
Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or
pulling it will not work, and it could damage
your vehicle.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a
12-volt battery with a negative ground system.
409
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If you leave your radio or other
accessories on during the jump starting
procedure, they could be damaged. The repairs
would not be covered by your warranty.
Always turn off your radio and other
4. Open the hoods and locate the positive (+)
and negative (−) terminal locations of the
other vehicle, as well as the positive (+)
terminal location on your vehicle’s battery.
page 373 for more information on the location
of the battery.
accessories when jump starting your vehicle.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles.
Unplug unnecessary accessories plugged into
the cigarette lighter or the accessory power
outlets. Turn off the radio and all lamps
that are not needed. This will avoid sparks
and help save both batteries. And it could
save the radio.
Your vehicle has a remote negative (−)
ground location, as shown in the illustration.
410
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
It is located between the battery and the
underhood fuse block. You should always use
this remote ground location, instead of the
terminal on the battery.
{CAUTION:
Using a match near a battery can cause
battery gas to explode. People have been
hurt doing this, and some have been
blinded. Use a flashlight if you need more
light. Be sure the battery has enough
water. You do not need to add water to the
battery installed in your new vehicle. But if
a battery has filler caps, be sure the right
amount of fluid is there. If it is low, add
water to take care of that first. If you do not,
explosive gas could be present.
Notice: If you connect a negative cable to the
ECM, ECM mounting bracket, or any cables
that attach to the ECM bracket, you may
damage the ECM. Always attach the negative
cable to your vehicle’s remote negative ground
location, instead of the ECM, ECM bracket,
or any cables attached to the ECM bracket.
{CAUTION:
An electric fan can start up even when the
engine is not running and can injure you.
Keep hands, clothing and tools away from
any underhood electric fan.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn
you. Do not get it on you. If you
accidentally get it in your eyes or on your
skin, flush the place with water and get
medical help immediately.
411
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−) or
you will get a short that would damage
the battery and maybe other parts too. And do
not connect the negative (−) cable to the
negative (−) terminal on the dead battery
because this can cause sparks.
{CAUTION:
Fans or other moving engine parts can
injure you badly. Keep your hands away
from moving parts once the engine is
running.
5. Check that the jumper cables do not have
loose or missing insulation. If they do, you
could get a shock. The vehicles could
be damaged too.
Before you connect the cables, here are some
basic things you should know. Positive (+)
will go to positive (+) or to a remote
positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Negative (−) will go to a heavy, unpainted
metal engine part or to a remote negative (−)
terminal if the vehicle has one.
6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the
positive (+) terminal of the dead battery.
Use a remote positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one.
412
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect
it to the positive (+) terminal of the good
battery. Use a remote positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one.
9. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cable
at least 18 inches (45 cm) away from the dead
battery, but not near engine parts that move.
The electrical connection is just as good there,
and the chance of sparks getting back to the
battery is much less.
8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable to
the negative terminal of the good battery. Use
a remote negative (−) terminal if the vehicle
has one.
Use a remote negative (−) terminal if the
vehicle has one. Your vehicle’s remote
negative (−) ground location is for this purpose.
Do not let the other end touch anything until the
next step. The other end of the negative (−)
cable does not go to the dead battery. It goes to
a heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a
remote negative (−) terminal on the vehicle with
the dead battery.
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery
and run the engine for a while.
11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead
battery. If it will not start after a few tries, it
probably needs service.
413
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If the jumper cables are connected or
removed in the wrong order, electrical shorting
may occur and damage the vehicle. The repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Always
connect and remove the jumper cables in the
correct order, making sure that the cables do
not touch each other or other metal.
To disconnect the jumper cables from both
vehicles, do the following:
1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from
the vehicle that had the dead battery.
2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from
the vehicle with the good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
other vehicle.
All-Wheel Drive
If your vehicle is equipped with all-wheel-drive,
this is an additional system that needs lubrication.
Jumper Cable Removal
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or
Remote Negative (−) Terminal
B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and
Remote Negative (−) Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal
414
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be
on a level surface.
Transfer Case
When to Check Lubricant
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug
hole, located on the transfer case, you’ll need to
add some lubricant. Add enough lubricant to
raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole.
Use care not to overtighten the plug.
It is not necessary to regularly check the transfer
case fluid unless you suspect there is a leak
or you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss could
indicate a problem. Have it inspected and repaired.
How to Check Lubricant
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine
what kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended
A. Drain Plug
B. Fill Plug
415
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug
hole, located on the rear axle, you’ll need to add
some lubricant. Add enough lubricant to raise
the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole.
Rear Axle
When to Check Lubricant
It is not necessary to regularly check rear axle
fluid unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear
an unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a
problem. Have it inspected and repaired.
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine
what kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended
How to Check Lubricant
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be
on a level surface.
416
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be
on a level surface.
Front Axle
When to Check and Change Lubricant
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug
hole, located on the front axle, you may need
to add some lubricant.
It is not necessary to regularly check the front axle
fluid unless you suspect there is a leak or you
hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate
a problem. Have it inspected and repaired.
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine
what kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended
How to Check Lubricant
Bulb Replacement
For the proper type of replacement bulbs, see
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this
section, contact your dealer.
A. Drain Plug
B. Filler Plug
417
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
High Intensity Discharge (HID)
Lighting
Halogen Bulbs
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas
inside and can burst if you drop or
scratch the bulb. You or others could be
injured. Be sure to read and follow the
instructions on the bulb package.
The low beam high intensity discharge
lighting system operates at a very high
voltage. If you try to service any of the
system components, you could be
seriously injured. Have your dealer or a
qualified technician service them.
Back-Up Lamps
Your vehicle has HID headlamps. After your
vehicle’s HID headlamp bulb has been replaced,
you may notice that the beam is a slightly different
shade than it was originally. This is normal.
To replace a back-up lamp bulb, do the following:
for more information.
418
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Replacement Bulbs
Exterior Lamp
Bulb Number
Back-up
3157K
For replacement bulbs not listed here, contact
your dealer.
Windshield Replacement
Keep in mind that your windshield is part of the
Head-Up Display (HUD) system. If you ever have
to get your windshield replaced, be sure to get
one that is designed for HUD or your HUD image
may look blurred or out of focus.
2. Pull out the push pins holding down the top
portion of the cloth cover.
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected for
wear or cracking. See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 505.
3. Fold the cover down slightly and locate the
lamp assembly.
4. Turn the socket counterclockwise and pull it
straight out to remove it from the lamp
assembly.
5. Pull the old bulb straight out and reinstall the
new bulb.
It’s a good idea to clean or replace the wiper
blade assembly on a regular basis or when worn.
For proper windshield wiper blade length and
type, see Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
on page 518.
6. Reverse the steps to reinstall.
419
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STS-V models will automatically move the
windshield wipers to the park position if the hood
is open. Make sure the hood is closed before
replacing your windshield wiper blades.
To replace the wiper blade assembly, do the
following:
1. Pull the windshield wiper assembly away from
the windshield.
3. Replace the blade assembly with a new one.
Allowing the wiper blade arm to touch the
windshield when no wiper blade is installed
could damage the windshield. Any damage
that occurs would not be covered by your
warranty. Do not allow the wiper blade arm to
touch the windshield.
4. Repeat the steps for the other wiper.
2. Squeeze the tabs on each side of the wiper
blade assembly and slide the assembly off
the end of the wiper arm.
420
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires
CAUTION: (Continued)
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires
made by a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever
have questions about your tire warranty and where
to obtain service, see your GM Warranty booklet for
details. For additional information refer to the tire
manufacturer’s booklet included with your vehicle.
• Underinflated tires pose the same
danger as overloaded tires. The
resulting accident could cause serious
injury. Check all tires frequently to
maintain the recommended pressure.
Tire pressure should be checked when
your tires are cold. See Inflation - Tire
{CAUTION:
• Overinflated tires are more likely to be
cut, punctured, or broken by a sudden
impact — such as when you hit a
pothole. Keep tires at the
• Poorly maintained and improperly
used tires are dangerous.
• Overloading your tires can cause
overheating as a result of too much
friction. You could have an air-out and
a serious accident. See Loading Your
recommended pressure.
• Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If
your tread is badly worn, or if your tires
have been damaged, replace them.
inflation pressure adjustment for high
speed driving.
CAUTION: (Continued)
421
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
performance on most surfaces but they may not
offer the traction you would like or the same
level of performance as winter tires on snow or ice
covered roads.
Low-Profile Performance Tires
If your vehicle has 255/45ZR18, P255/45R18 or
P275/40R19 100Y size tires, they are classified as
low-profile performance tires. These tires are
designed for very responsive driving on wet or dry
pavement. You may also notice more road noise
with low-profile performance tires and that they tend
to wear faster. These performance tires are not
rated as all-season tires. Winter tires are
Winter tires, in general, are designed for increased
traction on snow and ice covered roads. With
winter tires, there may be decreased dry
road traction, increased road noise, and shorter
tread life. After switching to winter tires, be alert for
changes in vehicle handling and braking.
recommended for snow or ice covered roads.
See your dealer for details regarding winter tire
availability and proper tire selection. Also,
Notice: If your vehicle has low-profile tires,
they are more susceptible to damage from road
hazards or curb impact than standard profile
tires. Tire and/or wheel assembly damage
can occur when coming into contact with road
hazards like, potholes, or sharp edged
If you choose to use winter tires:
• Use tires of the same brand and tread type on
all four wheel positions.
objects, or when sliding into a curb. Your GM
warranty does not cover this type of damage.
Keep tires set to the correct inflation pressure
and, when possible avoid contact with
• Use only radial ply tires of the same size, load
range, and speed rating as the original
equipment tires.
curbs, potholes, and other road hazards.
Winter tires with the same speed rating as your
original equipment tires may not be available for H,
V, W, Y, and ZR speed rated tires. If you choose
winter tires with a lower speed rating, never
exceed the tire’s maximum speed capability.
Winter Tires
If you expect to drive on snow or ice covered
roads often, you may want to get winter tires for
your vehicle. All season tires provide good overall
422
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(A) Tire Size: The tire size is a combination of
letters and numbers used to define a particular
tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction type,
and service description. See the “Tire Size”
illustration later in this section for more detail.
Tire Sidewall Labeling
Useful information about a tire is molded into its
sidewall. The examples below show a typical
passenger vehicle tire and a compact spare tire
sidewall.
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed
to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have
a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all
federal safety guidelines.
(C) DOT (Department of Transportation): The
Department of Transportation (DOT) code
indicates that the tire is in compliance with the
U.S. Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards.
(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters
and numbers following DOT (Department of
Transportation) code is the Tire Identification
Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer
and plant code, tire size, and date the tire
was manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both
sides of the tire, although only one side may have
the date of manufacture.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example
423
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and
number of plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tire
manufacturers are required to grade tires
based on three performance factors: treadwear,
traction, and temperature resistance. For more
page 444.
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:
Maximum load that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to support that load.
Compact Spare Tire Example
(A) Temporary Use Only: The compact spare
tire or temporary use tire has a tread life of
approximately 3,000 miles (5 000 km) and should
not be driven at speeds over 65 mph (105 km/h).
The compact spare tire is for emergency use when
a regular road tire has lost air and gone flat. If
your vehicle has a compact spare tire, see
424
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(B) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and
(G) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed
to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have
a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all
federal safety guidelines.
number of plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
(C) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters
and numbers following the DOT (Department of
Transportation) code is the Tire Identification
Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer
and plant code, tire size, and date the tire
was manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both
sides of the tire, although only one side may have
the date of manufacture.
Tire Size
The following illustration shows an example of a
typical passenger vehicle tire size.
(D) Maximum Cold Inflation Load
Limit: Maximum load that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to support that load.
(E) Tire Inflation: The temporary use tire or
compact spare tire should be inflated to 60 psi
(420 kPa). For more information on tire pressure
page 431.
(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United States
version of a metric tire sizing system. The letter P
as the first character in the tire size means a
passenger vehicle tire engineered to standards set
by the U.S. Tire and Rim Association.
(F) Tire Size: A combination of letters and
numbers define a tire’s width, height, aspect ratio,
construction type, and service description. The
letter T as the first character in the tire size means
the tire is for temporary use only.
(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates
the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall
to sidewall.
425
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that
indicates the tire height-to-width measurements.
For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is
60, as shown in item C of the illustration, it would
mean that the tire’s sidewall is 60 percent as
high as it is wide.
Tire Terminology and Definitions
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tire
pressing outward on each square inch of the
tire. Air pressure is expressed in pounds
per square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).
(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used to
indicate the type of ply construction in the tire.
The letter R means radial ply construction;
the letter D means diagonal or bias ply
construction; and the letter B means belted-bias
ply construction.
Accessory Weight: This means the combined
weight of optional accessories. Some examples of
optional accessories are, automatic
transmission/transaxle, power steering, power
brakes, power windows, power seats, and
air conditioning.
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel
in inches.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height
to its width.
(F) Service Description: These characters
represent the load range and speed rating of the
tire. The load index represents the load carry
capacity a tire is certified to carry. The load index
can range from 1 to 279. The speed rating is
the maximum speed a tire is certified to carry a
load. Speed ratings range from A to Z.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is
located between the plies and the tread. Cords
may be made from steel or other reinforcing
materials.
Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped
by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies
are laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees
to the centerline of the tread.
426
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressure
in a tire, measured in pounds per square inch
(psi) or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up
heat from driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 431.
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of
an asymmetrical tire, that must always face
outward when mounted on a vehicle.
Curb Weight: This means the weight of a motor
vehicle with standard and optional equipment
including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and
coolant, but without passengers and cargo.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on
light duty trucks and some multipurpose passenger
vehicles.
DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall
of a tire signifying that the tire is in compliance
with the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT)
motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT code
includes the Tire Identification Number (TIN),
an alphanumeric designator which can also identify
the tire manufacturer, production plant, brand,
and date of production.
Load Index: An assigned number ranging from
1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying
capacity of a tire.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum air
pressure to which a cold tire may be inflated.
The maximum air pressure is molded onto
the sidewall.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. See
Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire
at the maximum permissible inflation pressure
for that tire.
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the
427
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of
curb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacity
weight, and production options weight.
Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle
manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation
pressure as shown on the tire placard. See
Normal Occupant Weight: The number of
occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied
by 150 lbs (68 kg). See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 349.
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the ply
cords that extend to the beads are laid at 90
degrees to the centerline of the tread.
Occupant Distribution: Designated seating
positions.
Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which
the tire beads are seated.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that
faces outward when mounted on a vehicle.
The side of the tire that contains a whitewall, bears
white lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand,
and/or model name molding that is higher
or deeper than the same moldings on the other
sidewall of the tire.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread
and the bead.
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned
to a tire indicating the maximum speed at
which a tire can operate.
Traction: The friction between the tire and the
road surface. The amount of grip provided.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on
passenger cars and some light duty trucks and
multipurpose vehicles.
Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into
contact with the road.
428
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes
called wear bars, that show across the tread of a
tire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread remains.
Run-Flat Tires (STS-V)
If your vehicle has run-flat tires, there is no spare
tire and no tire changing equipment. Your
vehicle also has a Tire Pressure Monitor
System (TPMS) which will alert you if there is a
loss of tire pressure in any of the tires. See
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards): A tire information system that
provides consumers with ratings for a tire’s
traction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratings are
determined by tire manufacturers using
government testing procedures. The ratings are
molded into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform
{CAUTION:
When the low tire warning light is
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of
designated seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs
(68 kg) plus the rated cargo load. See Loading
displayed on the instrument panel cluster,
your vehicle’s handling capabilities will be
reduced during severe maneuvers. If you
drive too fast, you could lose control of
your vehicle. You or others could be
injured. Do not drive over 55 mph
(90 km/h) when the low tire warning light
is displayed. Drive cautiously and check
your tire pressures as soon as you can.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on an
individual tire due to curb weight, accessory
weight, occupant weight, and cargo weight.
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached to
a vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity weight
and the original equipment tire size and
recommended inflation pressure. See “Tire and
Loading Information Label” under Loading
429
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If a tire goes flat, you will not need to stop on the
side of the road to change the tire. You can
just keep on driving. The vehicle’s run-flat tires
can operate effectively with no air pressure for up
to 50 miles (80 km) at speeds up to 55 mph
(90 km/h). The shorter the distance you drive and
the slower the speed, the greater the chance
that the tire will not have to be replaced. When a
tire is filled with air, it provides a cushion
between the road and the wheel. Because you will
not have this cushion when driving on a deflated
run-flat tire, try to avoid potholes that could
damage your wheel and require replacement of it.
{CAUTION:
Run-flat tires are constructed differently
than other tires and could explode during
improper service. You or others could be
injured or killed if you attempt to repair,
replace, dismount, or mount a run-flat tire.
Let only an authorized run-flat service
center repair, replace, dismount, and
mount run-flat tires.
Some road hazards can damage a tire beyond
repair. This damage could occur even before you
have driven on the tire in a deflated condition.
When a tire has been damaged, or if you have
driven any distance on a deflated run-flat tire, check
with an authorized run-flat tire service center, as
soon as possible, to determine whether the tire can
be repaired or should be replaced. To maintain your
vehicle’s run-flat feature, all replacement tires must
be self-supporting tires. To locate the nearest GM
or authorized run-flat servicing facility, call
page 531 for details.
The valve stems on your vehicle’s run-flat tires
have sensors that are part of the Tire Pressure
Monitor System (TPMS). These sensors contain
batteries which are designed to last for 10 years
under normal driving conditions. See your GM
dealer, if the TPMS sensors or a wheel ever need
replacement.
Notice: Using liquid sealants can damage the
tire valves and tire pressure monitor sensors in
your vehicle’s run-flat tires. This damage would
not be covered by warranty. Do not use liquid
sealants in your vehicle’s run-flat tires.
430
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A Tire and Loading Information label is attached to
the vehicle’s center pillar, below the driver’s
door latch. This label lists your vehicle’s original
equipment tires and shows the correct inflation
pressures for your tires when they are cold. The
recommended cold tire inflation pressure,
shown on the label, is the minimum amount of air
pressure needed to support your vehicle’s
maximum load carrying capacity.
Inflation - Tire Pressure
Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to
operate effectively.
Notice: Do not let anyone tell you that
under-inflation or over-inflation is all right. It is
not. If your tires do not have enough air
(under-inflation), you can get the following:
• Too much flexing
• Too much heat
• Tire overloading
• Premature or irregular wear
• Poor handling
• Reduced fuel economy
For additional information regarding how much
weight your vehicle can carry, and an example of
the tire and loading information label, see
your vehicle affects vehicle handling and ride
comfort, never load your vehicle with more weight
than it was designed to carry.
If your tires have too much air (over-inflation),
you can get the following:
When to Check
Check your tires once a month or more. Do not
forget to check the compact spare tire, if your
vehicle has one. The compact spare should be at
60 psi (420 kPa). For additional information
regarding the compact spare tire, see Compact
• Unusual wear
• Poor handling
• Rough ride
• Needless damage from road hazards
431
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Check
High-Speed Operation
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire
pressure. You cannot tell if your tires are
{CAUTION:
properly inflated simply by looking at them. Radial
tires may look properly inflated even when they
are underinflated. Check the tire’s inflation
pressure when the tires are cold. Cold means your
vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours
or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Driving at high speeds, 100 mph
(160 km/h) or higher, puts an additional
strain on tires. Sustained high-speed
driving causes excessive heat build up
and can cause sudden tire failure. You
could have a crash and you or others
could be killed. Some high-speed rated
tires require inflation pressure adjustment
for high speed operation. When speed
limits and road conditions are such that a
vehicle can be driven at high speeds,
make sure the tires are rated for high
speed operation, in excellent condition,
and set to the correct cold tire inflation
pressure for the vehicle load.
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem.
Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve to
get a pressure measurement. If the cold tire
inflation pressure matches the recommended
pressure on the Tire and Loading Information
label, no further adjustment is necessary. If the
inflation pressure is low, add air until you reach the
recommended amount.
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on
the metal stem in the center of the tire valve.
Re-check the tire pressure with the tire gage.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve
stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt
and moisture.
432
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you will be driving at high speeds, speeds of
100 mph (160 km/h) or higher, where it is legal, set
the cold inflation pressure to the maximum inflation
pressure shown on the tire sidewall, or 38 psi
(265 kPa), whichever is lower. See the example
following. When you end this high-speed driving,
return the tires to the cold inflation pressure shown
on the Tire and Loading Information label. See
Tire Pressure Monitor System
Your vehicle has a Tire Pressure Monitor
System (TPMS). This system uses radio and
sensor technology to check tire pressure levels.
Sensors are mounted onto each tire and
wheel assembly, except the compact spare tire
and wheel. The TPMS sensors monitor the
air pressure in your vehicle’s tires and transmits
the tire pressure readings to a receiver located in
the vehicle.
Example:
You will find the maximum load and inflation
pressure molded on the tire’s sidewall, in small
letters, near the rim flange. It will read something
like this: Maximum load 690 kg (1521 lbs)
300 kPa (44 psi) Max. Press.
Using the Driver Information Center (DIC), tire
pressure levels may be viewed by the driver. For
additional information and details about the
DIC operation and displays see DIC Controls and
For this example, you would set the inflation
pressure for high-speed driving at
38 psi (265 kPa).
If a low tire pressure condition is detected, the
TPMS will display the CHECK TIRE PRESSURE
warning message on the DIC display and, at
the same time, illuminate the low tire pressure
warning symbol, on the instrument panel cluster.
433
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The tire pressure warning light may come on in
cool weather when the vehicle is first started, and
then turn off as you start to drive. This could
be an early indicator that the tire pressures are
getting low and need to be inflated to the
proper pressure.
As an added safety
feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a
tire pressure monitoring
system (TPMS) that
illuminates a low tire
pressure telltale when
one or more of your tires
is significantly
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should
be checked monthly when cold and inflated to
the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle
manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire
inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of
a different size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires.)
under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale
illuminates, you should stop and check your tires
as soon as possible, and inflate them to the
proper pressure. Driving on a significantly
under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and
can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
434
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the
system is not operating properly. The TPMS
malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire
pressure telltale. When the system detects a
malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately
one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the
malfunction exists.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s
responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
even if under-inflation has not reached the level to
trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure
telltale.
A Tire and Loading Information label, attached to
your vehicle, shows the size of your vehicle’s
original equipment tires and the correct inflation
pressure for your vehicle’s tires when they
for an example of the Tire and Loading
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the
system may not be able to detect or signal low
tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may
occur for a variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or alternate tires or
wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly. Always check the TPMS
malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow
the TPMS to continue to function properly.
Information label and its location on your vehicle.
Your vehicle’s TPMS can warn you about a low tire
pressure condition but it does not replace normal
tire maintenance. See Tire Inspection and
Notice: Your vehicle has a Tire Pressure
Monitor System (TPMS). Use only the
GM-provided tire sealant. Other liquid tire
sealants may damage the tire pressure
sensors.
435
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You will have one minute to match the first
tire/wheel position, and five minutes overall, to
match all four tire/wheel positions. If it takes longer
than one minute to match the first tire and
wheel, or more than five minutes to match all
four tire/wheel positions, the matching process
stops and you will need to start over.
TPMS Sensor Identification Codes
Each TPMS sensor has a unique identification
code. Any time you replace one or more of
the TPMS sensors or rotate your vehicle’s tires,
the identification codes will need to be matched to
the new tire/wheel position. The sensors are
matched to the tire/wheel positions in the following
order: driver side front tire, passenger side front
tire, passenger side rear tire, and driver side
rear tire using a TPMS diagnostic tool. See your
GM dealer for service.
The TPM matching process is outlined below:
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Press the push-button ignition switch to Acc.
(Off/Accessory).
The TPMS sensors may also be matched to each
tire/wheel position by increasing or decreasing
the tire’s air pressure. When increasing the tire’s
pressure, do not exceed the maximum inflation
pressure indicated on the tire’s sidewall. If
using this method to match TPMS sensors, the
complete procedure outlined below must be
performed within 15 minutes of the vehicle being
stationary.
3. Using the Keyless Access transmitter, lock
and unlock the vehicle’s doors.
4. Press the lock and unlock buttons, at the
same time, on the Keyless Access
transmitter. A single horn chirp will sound,
indicating that the TPMS is ready, and
the sensor matching process can begin.
5. Start with the driver’s side front tire.
436
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Remove the valve cap from the valve stem.
Activate the TPMS sensor by increasing
or decreasing the tire’s air pressure for
five seconds, or until a horn chirp sounds. The
horn chirp, which may take up to 30 seconds to
sound, confirms that the sensor identification
code has been matched to this tire position. To
decrease the tire’s air-pressure use the pointed
end of the valve cap, a pencil-style air pressure
gauge, or a key.
11. Set all four tires to the recommended air
pressure level as indicated on the tire and
loading information label.
12. Put the valve caps back on the valve stems.
The spare tire does not have a TPMS sensor.
If you replace one of the road tires with the spare,
the SERVICE TIRE MONITOR message will be
displayed on the DIC screen. This message should
go off once you re-install the road tire containing
the TPM sensor.
7. Proceed to the passenger’s side front tire, and
repeat the procedure in Step 6.
Federal Communications Commission
(FCC) and Industry and Science Canada
8. Proceed to the passenger’s side rear tire, and
repeat the procedure in Step 6.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
9. Proceed to the driver’s side rear tire, and
repeat the procedure in Step 6.
10. After hearing the confirming single horn chirp
for the driver’s side rear tire, a double horn
chirp will sound to signal the tire matching
mode is no longer active. Press the
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference.
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
push-button ignition switch to Acc.
437
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
Different tire sizes should not be rotated front to
rear. Each tire and wheel should only be used
in the original front or rear position it is in.
1. This device may not cause interference.
Tire rotation is recommended if your vehicle is
equipped with P235/50R17 size tires on all
four wheel positions or 255/45ZR18 size tires on
all four wheel positions. These tires should be
rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles (8 000 to
13 000 km)
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other
than an authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your
tires as soon as possible and check wheel
alignment. Also check for damaged tires or wheels.
more information.
Tire Inspection and Rotation
Tire rotation is not recommended if your vehicle
has the following performance tire combinations:
The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve more
uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. The
first rotation is the most important. See Scheduled
• P235/50R17 size tires on the front wheels
and P255/45R17 size tires on the rear
wheels.
• P235/50R18 size tires on the front wheels and
P255/45R18 size tires on the rear wheels.
• P255/45R18 size tires on the front wheels and
P275/40R19 size tires on the rear wheels.
438
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly
tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” under
{CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When
you change a wheel, remove any rust or
dirt from places where the wheel attaches
to the vehicle. In an emergency, you can
use a cloth or a paper towel to do this;
but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush
later, if needed, to get all the rust or dirt
When rotating P235/50R17 size tires or
255/45ZR18 size tires, always use the correct
rotation pattern shown here.
If your vehicle has a compact spare tire, do not
include the compact spare tire in the tire rotation.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the
front and rear inflation pressures as shown on the
Tire and Loading Information label.
Vehicles that have the Tire Pressure Monitor
System (TPMS) will need to have the TPMS
sensors reset after a tire rotation, see Tire
439
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You need a new tire if any of the following
statements are true:
When It Is Time for New Tires
One way to tell when it
• You can see the indicators at three or more
places around the tire.
is time for new tires is
to check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when your tires
have only 1/16 inch
(1.6 mm) or less of tread
remaining.
• You can see cord or fabric showing through
the tire’s rubber.
• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, or
snagged deep enough to show cord or fabric.
• The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.
• The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damage
that cannot be repaired well because of the
size or location of the damage.
440
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
onto the tire’s sidewall by the tire manufacturer. If
the tires have an all-season tread design, the
TPC Spec number will be followed by an MS for
page 423 for additional information.
Buying New Tires
GM has developed and matched specific tires for
your vehicle. The original equipment tires
installed on your vehicle, when it was new, were
designed to meet General Motors Tire
The optional 18-inch performance tires, size
255/45ZR18 99Y, used on some vehicles, meet
the General Motors Tire Performance Criteria
Specification (TPC Spec) rating but the TPC Spec
code has not been molded onto the tire’s
sidewall. If your vehicle has these tires, and you
need to replace them, you can still get these TPC
Spec rated tires by asking your GM dealer.
Your GM dealer can order these tires by part
number. This way, your vehicle will continue to
give the proper endurance, handling, traction, and
ride as the original tires.
Performance Criteria Specification (TPC Spec)
system rating. If you need replacement tires, GM
strongly recommends that you get tires with
the same TPC Spec rating. This way, your vehicle
will continue to have tires that are designed to
give the same performance and vehicle safety,
during normal use, as the original tires.
GM’s exclusive TPC Spec system considers over
a dozen critical specifications that impact the
overall performance of your vehicle, including
brake system performance, ride and handling,
traction control, and tire pressure monitoring
performance. GM’s TPC Spec number is molded
441
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Winter tires with the same speed rating as your
original equipment tires may not be available for H,
V, W, Y and ZR speed rated tires. If you choose
snow tires with a lower speed rating, never exceed
the tire’s maximum speed capability.
{CAUTION:
If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle,
the wheel rim flanges could develop
cracks after many miles of driving. A tire
and/or wheel could fail suddenly, causing
a crash. Use only radial-ply tires with the
wheels on your vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Mixing tires could cause you to lose
control while driving. If you mix tires of
different sizes (other than those originally
installed on your vehicle), brands, or
types (radial and bias-belted tires), the
vehicle may not handle properly, and you
could have a crash. Using tires of
different sizes (other than those originally
installed on your vehicle), brands, or
types may also cause damage to your
vehicle. Be sure to use the correct size,
brand, and type of tires on all wheels. It is
all right to drive with your vehicle’s
compact spare temporarily, it was
If you must replace your vehicle’s tires with those
that do not have a TPC Spec number, make
sure they are the same size, load range, speed
rating, and construction type (radial and
bias-belted tires) as your vehicle’s original tires.
Vehicles that have a tire pressure monitoring
system may give an inaccurate low-pressure
warning if non-TPC Spec rated tires are installed
on it. Non-TPC Spec rated tires may give a
low-pressure warning that is higher or lower than
the proper warning level you would get with
TPC Spec rated tires. See Tire Pressure Monitor
developed for use on your vehicle. See
442
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listed
on the Tire and Loading Information label.
This label is attached to the vehicle’s center pillar
for more information about the Tire and Loading
Information label and its location on your vehicle.
Additionally, if your vehicle has electronic systems
such as, anti-lock brakes, traction control, and
electronic stability control, the performance
of these systems can be affected.
{CAUTION:
Vehicles that have performance tires
P235/50R17 95V (front axle) and P255/45R17 98V
(rear axle) are mounted on wheels with different
rim widths. The front axle tires are mounted
on rims 7.5 inches (19.05 cm) wide and the rear
axle tires require wheels with a minimum rim width
of 8 inches (20.32 cm). The original equipment
wheels designed for P255/45R17 98V size
tires are etched with the words REAR ONLY.
When replacing P255/45R17 98V size tires have
them mounted on wheels with a minimum width of
8 inches (20.32 cm) and marked REAR ONLY.
If you add different sized wheels, your
vehicle may not provide an acceptable
level of performance and safety if tires not
recommended for those wheels are
selected. You may increase the chance
that you will crash and suffer serious
injury. Only use GM specific wheel and
tire systems developed for your vehicle,
and have them properly installed by a GM
certified technician.
Different Size Tires and Wheels
additional information.
If you add wheels or tires that are a different size
than your original equipment wheels and tires,
this may affect the way your vehicle performs,
including its braking, ride and handling
characteristics, stability, and resistance to rollover.
443
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Treadwear
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based
on the wear rate of the tire when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified government
test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would
wear one and a half (1.5) times as well on the
government course as a tire graded 100. The
relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the norm due to variations
in driving habits, service practices, and differences
in road characteristics and climate.
Quality grades can be found where applicable on
the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), which
grades tires by treadwear, traction, and
temperature performance. This applies only to
vehicles sold in the United States. The grades are
molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car
tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type
snow tires, space-saver, or temporary use
spare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of
10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to some
limited-production tires.
Traction – AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s
ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked
C may have poor traction performance.
While the tires available on General Motors
Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire
is based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
passenger cars and light trucks may vary with
respect to these grades, they must also conform to
federal safety requirements and additional General
Motors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC) standards.
444
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Temperature – A, B, C
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The temperature grades are A (the highest),
B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained
high temperature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
The grade C corresponds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must meet under
the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels
of performance on the laboratory test wheel
than the minimum required by law.
The tires and wheels on your vehicle were aligned
and balanced carefully at the factory to give you
the longest tire life and best overall performance.
Adjustments to wheel alignment and tire
balancing will not be necessary on a regular basis.
However, if you notice unusual tire wear or your
vehicle pulling to one side or the other, the
alignment may need to be checked. If you notice
your vehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth
road, your tires and wheels may need to be
rebalanced. See your dealer for proper diagnosis.
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly
rusted or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming
loose, the wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel
nuts should be replaced. If the wheel leaks air,
replace it (except some aluminum wheels,
which can sometimes be repaired). See your
dealer if any of these conditions exist.
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated
and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading, either
separately or in combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.
445
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Each new wheel should have the same
load-carrying capacity, diameter, width, offset and
be mounted the same way as the one it
replaces.
Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause
problems with bearing life, brake cooling,
speedometer or odometer calibration,
headlamp aim, bumper height, vehicle ground
clearance, and tire or tire chain clearance
to the body and chassis.
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel
bolts, or wheel nuts, replace them only with
new GM original equipment parts. This way, you
will be sure to have the right wheel, wheel
bolts, and wheel nuts for your vehicle.
information.
Used Replacement Wheels
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Using the wrong replacement wheels,
wheel bolts, or wheel nuts on your vehicle
can be dangerous. It could affect the
braking and handling of your vehicle,
make your tires lose air and make you
lose control. You could have a collision in
which you or others could be injured.
Always use the correct wheel, wheel bolts,
and wheel nuts for replacement.
Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is
dangerous. You cannot know how it has
been used or how far it has been driven. It
could fail suddenly and cause a crash. If
you have to replace a wheel, use a new
GM original equipment wheel.
446
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tire Chains
CAUTION: (Continued)
To help avoid damage to your vehicle,
drive slowly, readjust, or remove the
device if it is contacting your vehicle, and
do not spin your vehicle’s wheels.
{CAUTION:
If your vehicle has P255/45R17,
P255/45R18, P275/40R19, or 255/45ZR18
size tires, do not use tire chains, as there
is not enough clearance.
If you do find traction devices that will fit,
install them on the rear tires only.
Tire chains used on a vehicle without the
proper amount of clearance can cause
damage to the brakes, suspension, or
other vehicle parts. The area damaged by
the tire chains could cause you to lose
control of your vehicle and you or others
may be injured in a crash.
Notice: If your vehicle has P235/50R17 95S
size tires, use tire chains only where legal and
only when you must. Use only SAE Class
S-type chains that are the proper size for your
tires. Install them on the rear tires and
tighten them as tightly as possible with the
ends securely fastened. Drive slowly and follow
the chain manufacturer’s instructions. If you
can hear the chains contacting your vehicle,
stop and retighten them. If the contact
Use another type of traction device only if
its manufacturer recommends it for use
on your vehicle and tire size combination
and road conditions. Follow that
continues, slow down until it stops. Driving
too fast or spinning the wheels with chains on
will damage your vehicle.
manufacturer’s instructions.
CAUTION: (Continued)
447
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lifting Your Vehicle (STS-V)
CAUTION: (Continued)
{CAUTION:
To be even more certain the vehicle will
not move, you can put blocks in front of
and behind the wheels. Also, see Shifting
information.
Lifting a vehicle can cause an injury. The
vehicle can slip off the jack and roll over
you or other people. You and they could
be badly injured. Find a level place to lift
your vehicle. To help prevent the vehicle
from moving:
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your
right foot.
{CAUTION:
2. Move the shift lever in PARK (P) by
pressing the button on the front of
the shift lever while pushing the lever
all the way toward the front of the
vehicle. Release the button.
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked
up is dangerous. If the vehicle slips off
the jack, you could be badly injured or
killed. Never get under a vehicle when it is
supported only by a jack.
3. With your right foot still holding the
brake pedal down, set the parking
brake with your left foot.
4. Turn off the engine.
CAUTION: (Continued)
448
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Lifting your vehicle improperly can
damage your vehicle and result in costly repairs
not covered by your warranty. To lift your
vehicle properly, follow the advice in this part.
{CAUTION:
Raising your vehicle with the jack
To help prevent vehicle damage:
improperly positioned can damage the
vehicle and even make the vehicle fall. To
help avoid personal injury and vehicle
damage, be sure to place the jack in the
proper location before raising the vehicle.
• Be sure the jack you are using meets the
weight standards for your vehicle and is
in good working order.
• Be sure to place a block or pad between
the jack and the vehicle.
• Make sure the jack you are using only
contacts the jacking location lift points and
is not leaning on any other vehicle
If you ever use a jack to lift your vehicle, follow
the instructions that came with the jack, and
be sure to use the correct lifting points to avoid
damaging your vehicle.
components such as the rocker panels, the
floor pan, or the stone guard moldings.
• Lift only in the areas shown in the following
pictures.
449
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lifting From the Front
Lifting From the Rear
The front lifting points can be accessed from
either side of your vehicle, behind the front tires.
The rear lifting points can be accessed from either
side of your vehicle, in front of the rear tires.
1. Locate the front lifting points using the
diagram above. The front lifting location
is about 15 inches (37 cm) from the rear edge
of the front wheel well.
1. Locate the rear lifting points using the
diagram above. The rear lifting location
is about 7 inches (17 cm) from the front edge
of the rear wheel well.
2. Be sure to place a block or pad between the
jack and the vehicle.
2. Be sure to place a block or pad between the
jack and the vehicle.
3. Lift the vehicle with the jack, making sure the
jack is centered on the rear lifting point.
3. Lift the vehicle with the jack, making sure the
jack is centered on the front lifting point.
450
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If a tire goes flat, and your vehicle has a compact
This information shows you how to use your
vehicle’s tire changing equipment and how
to change a flat tire safely.
If a Tire Goes Flat
It is unusual for a tire to blowout while you are
driving, especially if you maintain your tires
a tire, It is much more likely to leak out slowly.
But if you should ever have a blowout, here are a
few tips about what to expect and what to do:
{CAUTION:
If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag that
pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your
foot off the accelerator pedal and grip the steering
wheel firmly. Steer to maintain lane position,
and then gently brake to a stop well out of the
traffic lane.
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do
maintenance or repairs is dangerous
without the appropriate safety equipment
and training. The jack provided with your
vehicle is designed only for changing a
flat tire. If it is used for anything else, you
or others could be badly injured or killed
if the vehicle slips off the jack. Use the
jack provided with your vehicle only for
changing a flat tire.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much
like a skid and may require the same correction
you would use in a skid. In any rear blowout,
remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Get
the vehicle under control by steering the way
you want the vehicle to go. It may be very bumpy
and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently brake
to a stop, well off the road if possible.
If your vehicle has 255/45ZR18 size tires, there is
no spare tire, jack, or tire changing equipment.
A tire inflator kit, included with your vehicle, may
be used to seal small punctures in the tread
451
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
additional information.
Run-Flat Tires (STS-V)
If your vehicle has run-flat tires, there is no spare
tire and no tire changing equipment. Run-flat
tires can operate effectively with no air pressure
for a limited distance and speed. These tires
perform so well without any air pressure that a Tire
Pressure Monitor (TPM) is used to alert you
when there is a low tire condition.
{CAUTION:
Special tools and procedures are required
to service a run-flat tire. If these special
tools and procedures are not used you or
others could be injured and your vehicle
could be damaged. Always be sure the
proper tools and procedures, as described
in the service manual, are used.
{CAUTION:
When the low tire warning light is
displayed on the instrument panel cluster,
your vehicle’s handling capabilities will be
reduced during severe maneuvers. If you
drive too fast, you could lose control of
your vehicle. You or others could be
injured. Do not drive over 55 mph
(90 km/h) when the low tire warning light
is displayed. Drive cautiously and check
your tire pressures as soon as you can.
To order a service manual see Service
Tire Inflator Kit
Your vehicle has a tire inflator kit. There is no jack
or spare tire. The kit uses a liquid tire sealant
and air at the same time to seal small punctures
in the tread area of the tire. Be sure to read
and follow all of the tire inflator kit instructions.
452
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The kit includes the following:
If the flat tire is due to a slow leak caused by a nail
or other similar road hazard, the tire inflator kit may
be used to temporarily repair the damaged tire.
After temporarily repairing the tire inflator kit,
it is recommended to take your vehicle to
an authorized GM dealer within 100 miles
(161 kilometers) of driving to have the tire
inspected and repaired. If the sealant is
not removed from the tire within 100 miles
(161 kilometers) of driving, it is more likely that the
tire may get damaged and have to be replaced.
A. Air Compressor
E. Air Pressure Gage
B. Tire Sealant Canister F. Air Compressor
C. Air Compressor
Accessory Plug
D. On/Off Switch
Inflator Hose
G. Sealant
Filling Hose
453
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Remove the tire
inflator kit strap
Accessing the Tire Inflator Kit
To access the tire inflator kit, do the following:
by squeezing the
two tabs of the quick
release buckle.
for more information.
4. Remove the inflator kit from its foam container.
2. Locate the tire inflator kit on the driver’s side of
the vehicle, near the back corner of the trunk.
454
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tire Sealant
Using the Tire Inflator Kit
The kit contains a liquid sealant that when injected
into a flat tire, may temporarily repair nail holes
or cuts in the tread area of the tire. The tire sealant
cannot repair tire damage caused while driving
on a flat tire or a tire that has had a “blow out” or
a tire that has punctures in the sidewall areas.
The tire sealant solution is to be used for a single
tire and can only be used once.
To use the tire inflator kit, do the following:
1. Place the inflator kit on the ground and unwrap
the sealant filling hose from the compressor.
2. Remove the air compressor accessory plug
from the unit. To do this, pull the top portion
of the wrapped cord out first, then the bottom,
and then unsnap the plug. Do not insert the
plug into an accessory outlet yet.
3. Remove the valve stem cap from the flat tire
by turning it counterclockwise.
Check the tire sealant expiration date on the
sealant canister. The sealant may not be
as effective beyond the expiration date. If needed,
see your GM dealer for a replacement canister.
If an object, such as a nail, has penetrated
the tire, do not remove it.
455
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Plug the air compressor accessory plug (C)
into an accessory power outlet in the vehicle.
for more information.
{CAUTION:
Idling the engine in a closed-in place or
with the climate control system off can
cause deadly carbon monoxide (CO). See
page 113 for more information. The vehicle
must be running while using the air
compressor.
4. Attach the sealant filling hose (A) onto the tire
valve stem. Turn it clockwise until it is tight.
Make sure the inflator kit on/off switch (B) is in
the O (off) position.
456
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. Make sure there is a proper connection
between the tire valve stem and the
sealant filling hose by looking at the air
pressure gage. If there is not a pressure
reading while the compressor is running, the
connection between the inflator kit and
the tire is bad.
{CAUTION:
Inflating something too much can make it
explode, and you or others could be
injured. Be sure to read the inflator
instructions, and inflate the tire to its
recommended pressure. Do not exceed
36 psi (248 kPa).
Check the attachment between the sealant
filling hose and the tire valve stem.
7. Move the inflator kit switch to the I (on)
position.
The inflator kit will force sealant and air into
the tire. Sealant may leak from the puncture
hole until the vehicle is driven and the
hole has sealed.
457
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9. Inflate the tire up to the recommended
inflation pressure, found on the Tire and
Loading Information label located on
the vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar) below the
vehicle’s door latch, using the air pressure
gage on the top of the unit.
11. Turn off the engine.
12. Unplug the air compressor accessory plug
from the accessory power outlet in the
vehicle.
13. Disconnect the sealant filling hose from the
tire valve stem, by turning it counterclockwise,
and replace the tire valve stem cap.
The pressure gage reading is slightly high
while the compressor is on. Turn the
compressor off to get an accurate pressure
reading.
Be careful when handling the tire inflator
components as they may be hot after usage.
14. Wrap the sealant filling hose around the air
compressor channel to stow it in its original
location.
Notice: If the recommended pressure cannot
be reached after 15 minutes, the vehicle
should not be driven farther. Damage to the
tire is severe and the sealant will not be
effective. Remove the air compressor plug
from the accessory power outlet and unscrew
the inflating hose from the tire valve. See
15. Stow the air compressor accessory plug back
in the air compressor. To do this, wrap the air
compressor accessory plug, snap in the
plug, and then push in the bottom and then
the top of the wrapped air compressor
accessory plug.
10. Move the inflator kit switch to the O (off)
position once the correct tire pressure is
obtained.
458
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
16. If the flat tire was
able to inflate to the
recommended
{CAUTION:
inflation pressure,
remove the
maximum speed
label from the
Storing the tire inflator kit or other
equipment in the passenger compartment
of the vehicle could cause injury. In a
sudden stop or collision, loose equipment
could strike someone. Store the tire
inflator kit in the proper place.
sealant canister.
Place it in a highly visible location such as the
inside of the upper left corner of the
windshield or to the face of the radio/clock.
The maximum speed label reminds you
to drive cautiously and not to exceed 55 mph
(90 km/h) until you have the damaged tire
inspected and repaired.
17. Return the equipment to the proper storage
location in the trunk of your vehicle. You may
need to loosen the retention strap to wrap
it around the inflator kit and foam container. To
do this, pull apart the strap and loosen the
strap at the quick release buckle. Then snap
the buckle together, pull the strap tight,
and secure the loose end of the strap by
mating the ends.
459
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
18. Immediately drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km)
to distribute the sealant evenly in the tire.
Stop at a safe location and check the
tire pressure, refer to Steps 1 through 8 under
“Using the Air Compressor without Sealant”
next in this section. If the tire pressure
has fallen more then 10 psi (68 kPa), below
the recommended inflation pressure, stop
driving the vehicle. The tire is too damaged for
the sealant to work. See Roadside Service
on page 531.
Using the Air Compressor without
Sealant
To use the air compressor by itself to inflate a tire,
do the following:
1. Remove the air compressor accessory plug
from the air compressor.
If the tire pressure has not dropped more than
10 psi (68 kPa) from the recommended
inflation pressure, you can inflate the tire back
up to the recommended inflation pressure.
19. Dispose of the sealant canister at a local GM
dealer or in accordance with your local state
codes and practices.
After using the sealant canister, replace it with
a new canister from a GM dealer.
20. After temporarily repairing a tire with the
emergency flat tire repair kit, take your
vehicle to an authorized GM dealer to have
the tire inspected and repaired.
2. Unlock the air compressor hose from the
sealant canister by pulling up on the lever.
3. Pull the air compressor inflator hose from the
sealant canister.
460
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Push the air compressor inflator hose onto the
tire valve stem and push the lever down to
secure in place.
{CAUTION:
5. Plug the air compressor accessory plug into
an accessory power outlet in the vehicle. See
more information.
Inflating something too much can make it
explode, and you or others could be
injured. Be sure to read the inflator
instructions, and inflate the tire to its
recommended pressure. Do not exceed
36 psi (248 kPa).
{CAUTION:
Idling the engine in a closed-in place or
with the climate control system off can
cause deadly carbon monoxide (CO). See
7. Move the inflator kit switch to the I (on)
position.
8. Make sure there is a proper connection
between the tire valve stem and the air
compressor hose by looking at the air
pressure gage. If there is not a pressure
reading while the compressor is running, the
connection between the inflator kit and
the tire is bad.
page 113 for more information. The vehicle
must be running while using the air
compressor.
Check the attachment between the air
compressor hose and the tire valve stem.
461
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9. Inflate the tire up to the recommended
inflation pressure using the air pressure gage
on the top of the unit.
Removal and Installation of the Sealant
Canister
To remove the sealant canister, do the following:
10. Turn off the air compressor by moving the
switch to the O (off) position.
{CAUTION:
Storing the tire inflator kit or other
equipment in the passenger compartment
of the vehicle could cause injury. In a
sudden stop or collision, loose equipment
could strike someone. Store the tire
inflator kit in the proper place.
11. Disconnect the compressor inflator hose and
wrap the hose in the bottom of the inflator kit.
1. Unlock the air compressor inflator hose from
the sealant canister by pulling the lever up.
12. Place the equipment in the original location in
the trunk of your vehicle.
2. Disconnect the air compressor inflator hose
from the sealant canister.
3. Unwrap the sealant filling hose from the
compressor.
462
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To install a new sealant canister, do the following:
1. Align the sealant filling hose with the slot in
the air compressor.
2. Push the sealant canister down and turn it
clockwise.
3. Wrap the sealant filling hose around the air
compressor channel to stow it in its original
location.
4. Push the air compressor inflator hose onto the
sealant canister inlet and push the lever down.
4. Turn the sealant canister so the inflator filling
hose is aligned with the slot in the
compressor.
5. Lift the sealant canister from the compressor
and replace with a new sealant canister. See
your GM dealer for more information.
463
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing a Flat Tire
{CAUTION:
If you have an STS-V model, there is no spare tire
and no tire changing equipment. Your vehicle is
equipped with run-flat tires. See Run-Flat
you have an STS model, your vehicle may be
equipped with a tire inflator kit. See Tire Inflator Kit
on page 452 for more information. If your vehicle
is not equipped with a tire inflator kit, follow
Changing a tire can be dangerous. The
vehicle can slip off the jack and roll over
or fall on you or other people. You and
they could be badly injured or even killed.
Find a level place to change your tire. To
help prevent the vehicle from moving:
the directions for changing a flat tire in this section.
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put the shift lever in PARK (P).
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel
damage by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on
your vehicle’s hazard warning flashers. See
information.
3. Turn off the engine and do not restart
while the vehicle is raised.
4. Do not allow passengers to remain in
the vehicle.
To be even more certain the vehicle will
not move, you should put blocks at the
front and rear of the tire farthest away
from the one being changed. That would
be the tire, on the other side, at the
opposite end of the vehicle.
464
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When your vehicle has a flat tire, use the following
example as a guide to assist you in the placement
of wheel blocks.
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
The equipment you will need is located in the
trunk. To gain access to the compact spare tire
and jacking equipment, do the following:
more information.
2. Remove the compact spare tire cover.
The following information will tell you next how to
use the jack and change a tire.
3. Turn the nut holding the jack package
container counterclockwise and remove
it. Then remove the jack and wheel wrench.
465
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
about the compact spare tire.
Removing the Flat Tire and
Installing the Spare Tire
1. Loosen the wheel nuts, but do not remove
them yet, using the wheel wrench. Turn the
handle about 180 degrees, then flip the handle
back to the starting position. This avoids
The tools you will be using include the jack (A)
and the wheel wrench (B).
taking the wrench off the lug nut for each turn.
466
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked
up is dangerous. If the vehicle slips off
the jack you could be badly injured or
killed. Never get under a vehicle when it is
supported only by a jack.
{CAUTION:
2. Find the vehicle’s jacking location using the
diagram above and corresponding hoisting
notches located in the plastic molding on the
vehicle’s frame. The notches in the plastic
molding are marked with a triangle shape to
help you find them.
Raising your vehicle with the jack
improperly positioned can damage the
vehicle and even make the vehicle fall. To
help avoid personal injury and vehicle
damage, be sure to fit the jack lift head into
the proper location before raising the
vehicle.
3. Attach the wheel wrench to the jack.
467
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If you position the jack under the
rocker molding and attempt to raise the
vehicle, you could break the molding and/or
cause other damage to your vehicle. Always
position the jack so that when the jack head is
raised, it will fit firmly in the notch located
inboard from the rocker molding.
{CAUTION:
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do
maintenance or repairs is dangerous
without the appropriate safety equipment
and training. The jack provided with your
vehicle is designed only for changing a
flat tire. If it is used for anything else, you
or others could be badly injured or killed
if the vehicle slips off the jack. Use the
jack provided with your vehicle only for
changing a flat tire.
4. Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to
lower the jack lift head until the jack fits
under the vehicle.
468
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Raise the jack by turning the wheel wrench
clockwise until the slots in the jack head fit
into the metal flange located behind the
triangle on the plastic molding as shown.
7. Raise the vehicle by turning the wheel wrench
clockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough off
the ground for the compact spare tire to
fit under the vehicle.
6. Put the compact spare tire near you.
469
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. Remove all the
wheel nuts and take
off the flat tire.
CAUTION: (Continued)
remove any rust or dirt from the places
where the wheel attaches to the vehicle. In
an emergency, you can use a cloth or a
paper towel to do this; but be sure to use
a scraper or wire brush later, if needed, to
get all the rust or dirt off.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the parts
to which it is fastened, can make the
wheel nuts become loose after time. The
wheel could come off and cause an
accident. When you change a wheel,
Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts.
If you do, the nuts might come loose.
Your wheel could fall off, causing a
serious accident.
CAUTION: (Continued)
470
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9. Remove any rust or
dirt from the wheel
bolts, mounting
surfaces, and
spare wheel.
10. Install the spare tire.
11. Put the wheel nuts back on with the rounded
end of the nuts toward the wheel.
13. Lower the vehicle by turning the wheel
wrench counterclockwise. Lower the jack
completely.
12. Tighten each wheel nut by turning it clockwise
with your hand until the wheel is held against
the hub.
471
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
14. Tighten the wheel
nuts firmly in a
{CAUTION:
crisscross sequence
as shown.
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly
tightened wheel nuts can cause the wheel
to come loose and even come off. This
could lead to an accident. Be sure to use
the correct wheel nuts. If you have to
replace them, be sure to get new GM
original equipment wheel nuts. Stop
somewhere as soon as you can and have
the nuts tightened with a torque wrench to
the proper torque specification. See
Capacities and Specifications on page 498
for wheel nut torque specification.
Notice: Wheel covers will not fit on your
compact spare. If you try to put a wheel cover
on the compact spare, you could damage
the cover or the spare.
Do not try to put a wheel cover on your compact
spare tire. It will not fit. Store the wheel cover
in the trunk until you have the flat tire repaired or
replaced.
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can
lead to brake pulsation and rotor damage.
To avoid expensive brake repairs, evenly
tighten the wheel nuts in the proper sequence
and to the proper torque specification. See
the wheel nut torque specification.
472
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Full-Size Tire and Tools
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire
and Tools
After you have put the compact spare tire on your
vehicle, you will need to do the following to
store the flat tire in your trunk.
{CAUTION:
2. Store the jack and wheel wrench in the jack
container in the trunk.
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment
in the passenger compartment of the
vehicle could cause injury. In a sudden
stop or collision, loose equipment could
strike someone. Store all these in the
proper place.
When storing the jack, in the container, it
must be raised until the screw end is flush with
the edge of the jack.
3. Store the flat tire as far forward in the trunk as
possible.
The compact spare is for temporary use only.
Replace the compact spare tire with a full-size tire
as soon as you can.
473
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Compact Spare Tire and Tools
2. Make sure the foam support (F) is in place in
the trunk area.
Use the following diagram as a guide for storing
the compact spare tire and tools in the trunk:
3. Reinstall the compact spare tire (E) making
sure to line up the wheel center hole with the
bolt (G) and place on the compartment floor.
4. Insert the jack container (J) with wheel
wrench (H) and jack (I) into the center of
the compact spare tire making sure to line up
the wheel nut hole with the bolt (G) on the
compartment floor.
5. Secure the tire and wheel with the retainer (C)
and wing nut (B).
6. Reinstall the compact spare tire cover (A).
A. Compact Spare Tire E. Compact Spare
Cover
Tire
B. Plastic Wing Nut
C. Retainer
F. Foam Support
G. Bolt
D. Jack Container
Package (With
Wheel Wrench
and Jack)
474
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: When the compact spare is installed,
do not take your vehicle through an automatic
car wash with guide rails. The compact
spare can get caught on the rails. That can
damage the tire and wheel, and maybe
other parts of your vehicle.
Compact Spare Tire
Although the compact spare tire was fully inflated
when the vehicle was new, it can lose air after
a time. Check the inflation pressure regularly. It
should be 60 psi (420 kPa).
After installing the compact spare on the vehicle,
you should stop as soon as possible and make
sure the spare tire is correctly inflated. The
compact spare is made to perform well at speeds
up to 65 mph (105 km/h) for distances up to
3,000 miles (5 000 km), so you can finish your trip
and have the full-size tire repaired or replaced
where you want. You must calibrate the tire
inflation monitor system after installing or removing
the compact spare. See Tire Pressure Monitor
work correctly when the compact spare is installed
on the vehicle. Of course, it’s best to replace
the spare with a full-size tire as soon as you can.
The spare will last longer and be in good shape
in case you need it again.
Do not use the compact spare on other vehicles.
And do not mix the compact spare tire or
wheel with other wheels or tires. They will not fit.
Keep the spare tire and its wheel together.
Notice: Tire chains will not fit your compact
spare. Using them can damage your vehicle
and can damage the chains too. Do not use tire
chains on your compact spare.
475
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remove any accidental over-spray from other
surfaces immediately. To prevent over-spray, apply
cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.
Appearance Care
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle
Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners when
cleaning glass surfaces on your vehicle, you
could scratch the glass and/or cause damage to
the integrated radio antenna and the rear
window defogger. When cleaning the glass on
your vehicle, use only a soft cloth and glass
cleaner.
Your vehicle’s interior will continue to look its
best if it is cleaned often. Although not always
visible, dust and dirt can accumulate on your
upholstery. Dirt can damage carpet, fabric, leather,
and plastic surfaces. Regular vacuuming is
recommended to remove particles from your
upholstery. It is important to keep your upholstery
from becoming and remaining heavily soiled.
Soils should be removed as quickly as possible.
Your vehicle’s interior may experience extremes of
heat that could cause stains to set rapidly.
Many cleaners contain solvents that may become
concentrated in your vehicle’s breathing space.
Before using cleaners, read and adhere to all safety
instructions on the label. While cleaning your
vehicle’s interior, maintain adequate ventilation by
opening your vehicle’s doors and windows.
Lighter colored interiors may require more frequent
cleaning. Use care because newspapers and
garments that transfer color to your home
furnishings may also transfer color to your
vehicle’s interior.
Dust may be removed from small buttons and
knobs using a small brush with soft bristles.
Your dealer has a product for cleaning your
vehicle’s glass. Should it become necessary, you
can also obtain a product from your dealer to
remove odors from your vehicle’s upholstery.
When cleaning your vehicle’s interior, only use
cleaners specifically designed for the surfaces
being cleaned. Permanent damage may result from
using cleaners on surfaces for which they were not
intended. Use glass cleaner only on glass.
476
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Do not clean your vehicle using the following
cleaners or techniques:
Fabric/Carpet
Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush
• Never use a knife or any other sharp object to
remove a soil from any interior surface.
attachment frequently to remove dust and loose
dirt. A canister vacuum with a beater bar in
the nozzle may only be used on floor carpet and
carpeted floor mats. For soils, always try to remove
them first with plain water or club soda. Before
cleaning, gently remove as much of the soil
as possible using one of the following techniques:
• Never use a stiff brush. It can cause damage
to your vehicle’s interior surfaces.
• Never apply heavy pressure or rub
aggressively with a cleaning cloth. Use of
heavy pressure can damage your interior and
does not improve the effectiveness of soil
removal.
• For liquids: gently blot the remaining soil
with a paper towel. Allow the soil to absorb into
the paper towel until no more can be
removed.
• Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps. Avoid
laundry detergents or dishwashing soaps with
degreasers. Using too much soap will leave
a residue that leaves streaks and attracts dirt.
For liquid cleaners, about 20 drops per
gallon (3.78 L) of water is a good guide.
• For solid dry soils: remove as much as
possible and then vacuum.
To clean, use the following instructions:
1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth with
water or club soda.
• Do not heavily saturate your upholstery while
cleaning.
2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.
• Damage to your vehicle’s interior may result
from the use of many organic solvents such
as naptha, alcohol, etc.
3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently
rub toward the center. Continue cleaning,
using a clean area of the cloth each time it
becomes soiled.
477
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until the
cleaning cloth remains clean.
Leather
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is
necessary, a soft cloth dampened with a mild soap
solution can be used. Allow the leather to dry
naturally. Do not use heat to dry. Never use steam
to clean leather. Never use spot lifters or spot
removers on leather. Many commercial leather
cleaners and coatings that are sold to preserve
and protect leather may permanently change
the appearance and feel of your leather and are
not recommended. Do not use silicone or
5. If the soil is not completely removed, use a
mild soap solution and repeat the cleaning
process that was used with plain water.
If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabric
cleaner or spot lifter may be necessary. When a
commercial upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to be
used, test a small hidden area for colorfastness
first. If the locally cleaned area gives any
impression that a ring formation may result, clean
the entire surface.
wax-based products, or those containing organic
solvents to clean your vehicle’s interior because
they can alter the appearance by increasing
the gloss in a non-uniform manner. Never use
shoe polish on your leather.
After the cleaning process has been completed, a
paper towel can be used to blot excess moisture
from the fabric or carpet.
478
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces
Wood Panels
Use a clean cloth moistened in warm, soapy water
(use mild dish washing soap). Dry the wood
immediately with a clean cloth.
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is
necessary, a clean soft cloth dampened with a
mild soap solution can be used to gently remove
dust and dirt. Never use spot lifters or removers
on plastic surfaces. Many commercial cleaners and
coatings that are sold to preserve and protect
soft plastic surfaces may permanently change the
appearance and feel of your interior and are
not recommended. Do not use silicone or
wax-based products, or those containing organic
solvents to clean your vehicle’s interior because
they can alter the appearance by increasing
the gloss in a non-uniform manner.
Speaker Covers
Vacuum around a speaker cover gently, so that
the speaker will not be damaged. Clean spots with
just water and mild soap.
Care of Safety Belts
Keep belts clean and dry.
{CAUTION:
Some commercial products may increase gloss on
your instrument panel. The increase in gloss
may cause annoying reflections in the windshield
and even make it difficult to see through the
windshield under certain conditions.
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you
do, it may severely weaken them. In a
crash, they might not be able to provide
adequate protection. Clean safety belts
only with mild soap and lukewarm water.
479
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
page 484. Do not use cleaning agents that are
petroleum based, or that contain acid or abrasives.
All cleaning agents should be flushed promptly
and not allowed to dry on the surface, or they
could stain. Dry the finish with a soft, clean
chamois or an all-cotton towel to avoid surface
scratches and water spotting.
Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them
last longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.
Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth. During
very cold, damp weather frequent application may
be required. See Recommended Fluids and
High pressure car washes may cause water to
enter the vehicle.
Washing Your Vehicle
The paint finish on the vehicle provides beauty,
depth of color, gloss retention, and durability.
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
The best way to preserve the vehicle’s finish is to
keep it clean by washing it often with lukewarm
or cold water.
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and
a car washing soap to clean exterior lamps
and lenses. Follow instructions under Washing
Do not wash the vehicle in the direct rays of the
sun. Use a car washing soap. Do not use
strong soaps or chemical detergents. Be sure to
rinse the vehicle well, removing all soap
residue completely. Approved cleaning products
can be obtained from your dealer.
480
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging,
weather, and chemical fallout that can take their
toll over a period of years. To help keep the
paint finish looking new, keep the vehicle in a
garage or covered whenever possible.
Finish Care
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of the vehicle
by hand may be necessary to remove residue
from the paint finish. Approved cleaning products
can be obtained from your dealer. See Vehicle
Windshield and Wiper Blades
Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive
polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint
finish may damage it. Use only non-abrasive
waxes and polishes that are made for a
basecoat/clearcoat paint finish on your vehicle.
If the windshield is not clear after using the
windshield washer, or if the wiper blade chatters
when running, wax, sap, or other material may
be on the blade or windshield.
Clean the outside of the windshield with a glass
cleaning liquid or powder and water solution.
The windshield is clean if beads do not form when
it is rinsed with water.
The vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paint
finish. The clearcoat gives more depth and gloss
to the colored basecoat. Always use waxes
and polishes that are non-abrasive and made for a
basecoat/clearcoat paint finish.
Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper
blades and affect their performance. Clean
the blade by wiping vigorously with a cloth soaked
in full-strength windshield washer solvent. Then
rinse the blade with water.
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and
other salts, ice melting agents, road oil and
tar, tree sap, bird droppings, chemicals from
industrial chimneys, etc., can damage the vehicle’s
finish if they remain on painted surfaces. Wash
the vehicle as soon as possible. If necessary, use
non-abrasive cleaners that are marked safe for
painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.
Check the wiper blades and clean them as
necessary; replace blades that look worn.
481
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum
wheels could damage the wheels. The repairs
would not be covered by your warranty.
Use chrome polish on chrome wheels only.
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels
Your vehicle may have either aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels.
Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth
with mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water.
After rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft clean
towel. A wax may then be applied.
Use chrome polish only on chrome-plated wheels,
but avoid any painted surface of the wheel, and
buff off immediately after application.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle through an
automatic car wash that has silicone carbide
tire cleaning brushes, you could damage
the aluminum or chrome-plated wheels. The
repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Never drive a vehicle equipped with aluminum
or chrome-plated wheels through an
Notice: If you use strong soaps, chemicals,
abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, or
cleaners that contain acid on aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels, you could damage the
surface of the wheel(s). The repairs would
not be covered by your warranty. Use
only GM-approved cleaners on aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels.
automatic car wash that uses silicone carbide
tire cleaning brushes.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the
painted surface of your vehicle. Do not use strong
soaps, chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive
cleaners, cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning
brushes on them because you could damage
the surface. Do not use chrome polish on
aluminum wheels.
Do not take your vehicle through an automatic car
wash that has silicone carbide tire cleaning
brushes. These brushes can also damage the
surface of these wheels.
482
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires
Finish Damage
To clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in
the finish should be repaired right away. Bare
metal will corrode quickly and may develop into
major repair expense.
Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing
products on your vehicle may damage the
paint finish and/or tires. When applying a tire
dressing, always wipe off any overspray
from all painted surfaces on your vehicle.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with
touch-up materials available from your dealer.
Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected in
your dealer’s body and paint shop.
Sheet Metal Damage
If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body
repair shop applies anti-corrosion material to parts
repaired or replaced to restore corrosion
protection.
Underbody Maintenance
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and
dust control can collect on the underbody. If these
are not removed, corrosion and rust can develop
on the underbody parts such as fuel lines,
frame, floor pan, and exhaust system even though
they have corrosion protection.
Original manufacturer replacement parts will
provide the corrosion protection while maintaining
the warranty.
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where
mud and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close
areas of the frame should be loosened before being
flushed. Your dealer or an underbody car washing
system can do this for you.
483
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chemical Paint Spotting
Description
Usage
Removes dirt and grime
from chrome wheels and
wire wheel covers.
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can
create a chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can
fall upon and attack painted surfaces on the
vehicle. This damage can take two forms: blotchy,
ring-shaped discolorations, and small, irregular
dark spots etched into the paint surface.
Chrome and Wire
Wheel Cleaner
Removes dust,
fingerprints, and surface
contaminants. Spray on
and wipe off.
Finish Enhancer
Removes swirl marks, fine
scratches, and other light
surface contamination.
Removes light scratches
and protects finish.
Cleans, shines, and
protects in one step. No
wiping necessary.
Medium foaming
shampoo. Cleans and
lightly waxes.
Biodegradable and
phosphate free.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, GM
will repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces
of new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition
within 12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of
purchase, whichever occurs first.
Swirl Remover Polish
Cleaner Wax
Foaming Tire Shine
Low Gloss
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
Description
Usage
Wash Wax Concentrate
Polishing Cloth
Wax-Treated
Interior and exterior
polishing cloth.
Tar and Road Oil
Remover
Chrome Cleaner
and Polish
Removes tar, road oil,
and asphalt.
Use on chrome or
stainless steel.
Quickly removes spots
and stains from carpets,
vinyl, and cloth
Spot Lifter
upholstery.
Odorless spray odor
eliminator used on fabrics,
vinyl, leather and carpet.
White Sidewall
Tire Cleaner
Vinyl Cleaner
Removes soil and black
marks from whitewalls.
Cleans vinyl.
Odor Eliminator
Removes dirt, grime,
smoke and fingerprints.
Glass Cleaner
484
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Identification
Vehicle Identification
The eighth character in the VIN is the engine
code. This code helps you identify your vehicle’s
engine, specifications, and replacement parts.
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Service Parts Identification Label
This label is on your spare tire cover. It is
very helpful if you ever need to order parts. The
label has the following information:
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Model designation
• Paint information
• Production options and special equipment
Do not remove this label from the vehicle.
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It
appears on a plate in the front corner of the
instrument panel, on the driver side. You can see
it if you look through the windshield from outside
your vehicle. The VIN also appears on the Vehicle
Certification and Service Parts labels and the
certificates of title and registration.
485
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Headlamp Wiring
Electrical System
The headlamp wiring is protected by fuses in the
fuse block. An electrical overload will cause
the lamps to turn off. If this happens, have your
headlamp wiring checked right away.
Add-On Electrical Equipment
Notice: Do not add anything electrical to your
vehicle unless you check with your dealer
first. Some electrical equipment can damage
your vehicle and the damage would not
be covered by your warranty. Some add-on
electrical equipment can keep other
Windshield Wiper Fuses
The windshield wiper motor is protected by an
internal circuit breaker. If the wiper motor
overheats due to heavy snow, the wipers will stop
until the motor cools and will then restart.
components from working as they should.
Add-on equipment can drain your vehicle’s battery,
even if your vehicle is not operating.
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before
attempting to add anything electrical to your
vehicle, see Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped
486
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If
the band is broken or melted, replace the fuse.
Be sure you replace a bad fuse with a new one of
the identical size and rating. If a fuse should
blow, see your dealer for service immediately.
Power Windows and Other Power
Options
Circuit breakers protect the power windows and
power seats. When the current load is too
heavy, the circuit breaker opens and closes,
protecting the circuit until the problem is fixed or
goes away.
If you ever have a problem on the road
and don’t have a spare fuse, you can borrow
one that has the same amperage. Just pick some
feature of your vehicle that you can get along
without – like the radio or cigarette lighter – and
use its fuse, if it is the correct amperage. Replace
it as soon as you can.
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected
from short circuits by a combination of fuses,
circuit breakers and fusible thermal links.
This greatly reduces the chance of fires caused by
electrical problems.
The fuses are located in three fuse blocks.
One is located in the engine compartment, on the
passenger’s side of the vehicle, and the other
two are located under the rear seat on both the
driver’s and passenger’s side of the vehicle.
487
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The underhood fuse block is located in the front of
the engine compartment on the passenger’s
side of the vehicle. See Engine Compartment
on location and removal procedure for the front
compartment underhood sights shields.
Fuses
L REAR
WPR MOD
POST 02
Usage
Driver’s Side Rear Fuse Block
Wiper Module
Oxygen Sensor
COMP CLTCH Air Conditioner Compressor Clutch
STARTER
ABS
Starter Solenoid
Anti-lock Brake Pump
Driver’s Side Rear Fuse Block
Rain Sensor, Headlamp Washer,
Tire Pressure Monitor
Climate Control
To access the fuses, push in the tabs located on
each side of the fuse block cover, then lift the
cover off.
L REAR
RAIN SSR
CCP
Fuses
BLOWER
R REAR
I/P OUTLET
CCP
Usage
Blower Motor
SMT BM-OPT IntelliBeam™ Relay (If Equipped)
Passenger’s Side Rear Fuse Block
Front Accessory Power Outlet
Climate Control, Headlamp Leveling
Oxygen Sensor, Variable Intake (V6),
Low Beam Relay, High Beam Relay,
Park Lamp Relay
EXT LIGHTS
VOLT CHECK Instrument Panel Module
Engine Control Module (ECM),
PRE 02/CAM Purge Solenoid (V6), Camshaft
Phasers (V6)
Transmission Control Module (TCM),
Easy Key Module, Instrument Panel
Cluster
Spare
Spare
ECM/TCM
R REAR
WPR SW
FOG LAMP
OUTLET
Passenger’s Side Rear Fuse Block
Wiper/Washer Switch
Fog Lamps
SPARE
SPARE
Driver’s Side Park Lamp, Driver’s
Side Taillamp
Rear Accessory Power Outlet
LT PARK
Even Ignition Coils, Even Fuel
Injectors
EVEN COILS
489
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
Usage
Fuses
Usage
License Plate, Instrument
Panel Dimming
Instrument Panel Module Assembly
Line Data Link Connector
Heads-Up Display, Column Lock
Module, Steering Column Switch
V8 Engine Control Module (ECM),
Evap. Solenoid, Vacuum Bypass
HORN
Horn
LIC/DIMMING
LT HI BEAM Driver’s Side Headlamp High-Beam
LT LOW BEAM Driver’s Side Headlamp Low-Beam
IPM/ALDL
HUD
Passenger’s Side Headlamp
Low-Beam
RT LOW BEAM
RT HI BEAM Right Headlamp High-Beam
High Feature V6 Engine Control
HFV6 ECM
V8 ECM
Module (ECM), Mass Air Flow
Sensor (MAF) (V8)
ABS
STR RLY
Anti-lock Brake Controller
Starter Relay
WASH
Heated Washer Nozzles, Air
Quality Sensor
Odd Ignition Coils, Odd
Fuel Injectors
Transmission Control Module (TCM),
Instrument Panel, Engine Control
Spare
Mass Air Flow Sensor (V6)
Cooling Fan - High Speed
Cooling Fan - Low Speed
Passenger’s Side Park Lamp,
Right Taillamp
Relays
Usage
NOZ/AQS
HDLP WASH
RELAY
JUMPER -OPT
STARTER
RELAY MINI
SPARE
FOG LAMP
RELAY MICRO
Headlamp Washer
ODD COILS
TCM IPC
Starter
SPARE
MAF
HIGH FAN
LOW FAN
Spare
Fog Lamps
CMP CLU
RELAY MICRO Clutch
Air Conditioning Compressor
RT PARK
490
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Relays
BLOWER
RELAY MINI
POWERTRAIN
RELAY MICRO
Usage
Front Blower Motor
Relays
HIGH SPEED
FAN RELAY Cooling Fan High Speed
MINI
S/P FAN
RELAY MINI
Usage
Engine Controls
Cooling Fan Series/Parallel
Ignition 1, Starter, Washer Nozzle,
Air Quality, Anti-lock Brake System,
HORN RELAY
Horn
RUN/CRANK Climate Control Panel, Transmission
RELAY MICRO Control Module, Instrument Panel
Cluster, Mass Airflow Sensor,
MICRO
SPARE
Spare
Engine Control Module
Circuit
Breakers
HDLP WASH
C/B -OPT
Usage
LOW SPEED
FAN RELAY Cooling Fan Low Speed
MINI
Headlamp Washer (If Equipped)
Ignition 3, Rain Sensor, Headlamp
ACCESSORY
Washer, Windshield Wiper/Washer
RELAY MINI
Module
Harness
Connection
ENG W/H
BODY W/H
BODY W/H
Usage
PARK LAMP Parking Lamps, Instrument Panel
RELAY MICRO Dimming, Rear License Plate Lamps
Engine Harness Connection
Body Harness Connection
Body Harness Connection
HIGH BEAM
Headlamp High-Beam
RELAY MICRO
LOW BEAM
RELAY/HID
MINI-OPT
Low-Beam/High Intensity Discharge
491
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To reinstall the rear seat cushion, do the following:
Rear Underseat Fuse Block
Removing the Rear Seat Cushion
Notice: If you touch the exposed wires with
the metal on the seat cushion, you could cause
a short that could damage the battery and or
wires. Avoid contact between the rear seat and
the fuse center whenever you remove or
reinstall the rear seat. Do not remove covers
from any of the covered parts, and do not store
anything under the seats.
To remove the rear seat cushion, do the following:
1. Pull up on the front of the cushion to release
the front hooks.
2. Pull the cushion up and out toward the front
of the vehicle.
492
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. With the seat cushion lowered, push rearward
and then press down on the seat cushion until
the spring locks on both ends engage.
{CAUTION:
4. Check to make sure the safety belts are
properly routed and that no portion of any
safety belt is trapped under the seat.
A safety belt that is not properly routed
through the seat cushion or is twisted will
not provide the protection needed in a
crash. If the safety belt has not been
routed through the seat cushion at all, it
will not be there to work for the next
passenger. The person sitting in that
position could be badly injured. After
reinstalling the seat cushion, always
check to be sure that the safety belts are
properly routed and are not twisted.
Also make sure the seat cushion is secured.
Rear Underseat Fuse Block
There is a fuse block located under the rear seat
on the driver’s side and passenger’s side of
the vehicle. The rear seat cushion must be
removed to access the fuse blocks. See
“Removing the Rear Seat Cushion” listed
previously in this section.
1. Buckle the center passenger position safety
belt, then route the safety belts through the
proper slots in the seat cushion. Do not let the
safety belts get twisted.
2. Slide the rear of the cushion up and under the
seatback so the rear-locating guides hook into
the wire loops on the back frame.
To access the fuses, push in the two tabs, then lift
the cover off.
493
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver’s Side
Your vehicle may not have all the fuses listed below.
PUMP (OPT)
THEFT/
SHIFTER
MR-RTD
MOD (OPT)
SPARE
SPARE
Spare
Spare
Theft Sensors, Auto Shifter, Power
Sounder
Magnetic Ride Control Module
(Option)
Front Passenger Heated Seat, Auto
Shifter, Occupant Protection
IGN3
RR SHLF
SPEAKER
DPM
TRUNK DR
VALET
Rear Shelf Speaker (Option)
Memory Seat, Lumbar
Trunk Release, Valet Lockout
Switch
Reverse Lamps, Rear Parking Aid,
Inside Rearview Mirror
REAR DR MOD Rear Door Modules
ELC SOL
(OPT)
DRIVER DR
MOD
Automatic Level Control, Exhaust
Solenoid (Option)
Driver Door Module, Front Door
SubWoofers (Option)
Infotainment (Export Only)
REVERSE
LAMP
TV/VICS
494
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
Usage
Relays
Usage
AIR BAG
POSITION
LAMPS (OPT)
ELC RELAY
(OPT)
Airbag
R POSITION Right Rear Taillamp, Position Lamps
RELAY MICRO (Option)
RUN RELAY
Ignition 3
MICRO
Rear Taillamps
Automatic Level Control (Option)
STNDBY LAMP
Rear Taillamps, Position Lamps
RLY MICRO
(Option)
(OPT)
Relays
Usage
INTERCOOLER
Circuit
Usage
PUMP MICRO Intercooler Pump (Option)
(OPT)
Breakers
SEATS C/B
Power Seat
Spare
ELC RELAY
MINI (OPT)
Automatic Level Control Compressor
(Option)
L POSITION Left Rear Taillamp, Position Lamps
RELAY MICRO (Option)
TRUNK DR
REL RELAY
MICRO
Diodes
SPARE
Usage
Usage
Trunk Release Motor
Joint
Connector
JOINT
CONNECTOR
REV LAMP
RELAY MICRO Inside Rearview Mirror
Reverse Lamps, Rear Parking Aid,
Splice Pack (Green)
495
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Passenger’s Side
VENT
Clutch, Engine Run/Crank Relays
RT TURN-RIM Right Turn Signal
SUNROOF
Heated Steering Wheel, Column
Lock Module
REAR DEFOG Rear Defogger
HTD STG/CLM
Sunroof Module (Option)
(OPT)
STOP LAMPS Stoplamps
FUEL PUMP Fuel Pump
INTERIOR
Interior Lamps
LAMP
PSG DR MOD Front Passenger Door Module
LT TURN-RIM Left Turn Signal
RF HTD
Front Passenger Heated Seat,
ST/S-BAND
S-Band™ Antenna
Radio/OnStar®
Airbags
RADIO/
REAR FOG
Rear Fog Lamps (Option)
LAMP (OPT)
ONSTAR
AIR BAG
496
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
Usage
Circuit
Usage
Breakers
AFTERBOIL/
DIFF PUMP
(OPT)
After Boil, Rear Differential
Cooling Pump
WINDOW
MTRS C/B
Power Window Motors
Circuit Breaker
RIM
Ignition to Rear Integration Module
Diodes
Usage
Relays
Usage
TRUNK DIODE Trunk Release
SPARE
Spare
REAR DEFOG
RELAY MINI
FUEL PUMP
RELAY MICRO
Joint
Usage
Splice Pack (Blue)
Rear Defog
Fuel Pump
Connector
JOINT
CONNECTOR
REAR FOG
LAMP RLY
MICRO (OPT)
Rear Fog Lamps (Option)
STOP LAMP
Stoplamps
Interior Lamps
Ignition 1
RELAY MICRO
INT LAMP
RELAY MICRO
RUN/CRANK
RELAY MICRO
AFTERBOIL/
DIFF PUMP
RELAY
After Boil, Rear Differential
Cooling Pump (Option)
MICRO (OPT)
497
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. See Recommended
Capacities
Application
English
Metric
For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge
amount, see the refrigerant caution label located
under the hood. See your dealer for more
information.
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a
Cooling System
3.6L V6
11.7 qt
13.4 qt
12.5 qt
2.6 qt
11.1 L
12.7 L
11.8 L
2.5 L
4.4L V8 (V-Series)
4.6L V8
Intercooler System 4.4L Engine
Brake Fluid Capacities
Engine Oil with Filter
3.6L V6
1.1 qt
1.0 L
6.0 qt
9.0 qt
5.7 L
8.5 L
7.6 L
66.2 L
4.4L V8 (V-Series)
4.6L V8
8.0 qt
Fuel Tank
17.5 gal
498
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Capacities
Application
Transmission (Pan Removal and Filter Replacement)
5-Speed Automatic
English
Metric
7.4 qt
7.3 qt
7.0 L
6.9 L
6-Speed Automatic
6-Speed Automatic (V-Series)
Wheel Nut Torque
6.5 qt
6.2 L
100 lb ft
140 Y
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level as recommended in this
manual. Recheck the fluid level after filling.
Engine Specifications
Engine
3.6L DOHC V6
VIN Code
Transmission
Spark Plug Gap
7
D
A
Automatic
0.044 inches (1.11 mm)
0.040 inches (1.02 mm)
0.050 inches (1.27 mm)
4.4L DOHC V8 (V-Series)
4.6L DOHC V8
Automatic
Automatic
STS-V Engine Data
Engine
Horsepower
Torque
Displacement
Compression Ratio
469hp (350 kW)
@ 6400 rpm
439 lb ft (595 Nm)
@ 3800 rpm
4.4L V8 (V-Series)
4.4L
9.0:1
499
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Requirements
Maintenance Schedule
Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks,
inspections, replacement parts, and
recommended fluids and lubricants as
prescribed in this manual are necessary to
keep your vehicle in good working condition.
Any damage caused by failure to follow
scheduled maintenance might not be covered
by warranty.
Introduction
Important: Keep engine oil at the proper level
and change as recommended.
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The
Plan supplements your new vehicle warranties.
See your Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet
or your dealer for details.
502
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your Vehicle and the Environment
Using the Maintenance Schedule
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep
your vehicle in good working condition, but also
helps the environment. All recommended
maintenance is important. Improper vehicle
maintenance can even affect the quality of the air
we breathe. Improper fluid levels or the wrong
tire inflation can increase the level of emissions
from your vehicle. To help protect our environment,
and to keep your vehicle in good condition, be
sure to maintain your vehicle properly.
We at General Motors want to help you keep your
vehicle in good working condition. But we do
not know exactly how you will drive it. You may
drive very short distances only a few times a week.
Or you may drive long distances all the time in
very hot, dusty weather. You may use your vehicle
in making deliveries. Or you may drive it to
work, to do errands, or in many other ways.
Because of all the different ways people use their
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may need
more frequent checks and replacements. So please
read the following and note how you drive. If you
have any questions on how to keep your vehicle in
good condition, see your GM Goodwrench® dealer.
503
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This schedule is for vehicles that:
• carry passengers and cargo within
{CAUTION:
recommended limits. You will find these limits
on the Tire and Loading Information label.
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle
can be dangerous. In trying to do some
jobs, you can be seriously injured. Do your
own maintenance work only if you have the
required know-how and the proper tools
and equipment for the job. If you have any
doubt, see your GM Goodwrench® dealer to
have a qualified technician do the work.
• are driven on reasonable road surfaces within
legal driving limits.
page 505 should be performed when indicated.
information.
Some maintenance services can be complex. So,
unless you are technically qualified and have
the necessary equipment, you should have your
GM Goodwrench® dealer do these jobs.
When you go to your GM Goodwrench® dealer for
your service needs, you will know that GM-trained
and supported service technicians will perform
the work using genuine GM parts.
504
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you want to purchase service information, see
page 543.
Scheduled Maintenance
When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message
in the Driver Information Center (DIC) comes on, it
means that service is required for your vehicle.
Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible
within the next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible
that, if you are driving under the best conditions, the
engine oil life system may not indicate that vehicle
service is necessary for over a year. However, the
engine oil and filter must be changed at least once
a year and at this time the system must be reset.
Your GM Goodwrench® dealer has GM-trained
service technicians who will perform this work using
genuine GM parts and reset the system.
what should be checked, when to check it, and
what you can easily do to help keep your vehicle in
good condition.
The proper replacement parts, fluids, and
lubricants to use are listed in Recommended
When your vehicle is serviced, make sure these
are used. All parts should be replaced and all
necessary repairs done before you or anyone else
drives the vehicle. We recommend the use of
genuine GM parts.
505
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the engine oil life system is ever reset
Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if the
CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message comes on
within 10 months since the vehicle was purchased
or Maintenance II was performed.
accidentally, you must service your vehicle within
3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your last service.
Remember to reset the oil life system whenever
page 383 for information on the Engine Oil Life
System and resetting the system.
Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if the
previous service performed was Maintenance I.
Always use Maintenance II whenever the message
comes on 10 months or more since the last
service or if the message has not come on at all
for one year.
When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message
appears, certain services, checks, and inspections
are required. Required services are described
in the following for “Maintenance I” and
“Maintenance II.” Generally, it is recommended
that your first service be Maintenance I, your
second service be Maintenance II, and that you
alternate Maintenance I and Maintenance II
thereafter. However, in some cases,
Maintenance II may be required more often.
506
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Scheduled Maintenance
Service
Maintenance I Maintenance II
•
•
•
•
•
Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (k).
Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace filter. See Engine Air
rotation is recommended for your vehicle, rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and
page 513.
•
•
Inspect brake system. See footnote (a).
•
•
•
•
Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels. If you have the
4.4L V8 supercharged engine, check intercooler fluid level. Add fluid as
needed.
Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services”
in this section.
•
•
Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b).
Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c).
Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d).
•
•
•
•
•
•
Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e).
Lubricate body components. See footnote (f).
Replace passenger compartment air filter. See footnote (g).
507
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional Required Services
The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicated
miles (kilometers) shown for each item.
Additional Required Services
25,000
(40 000)
50,000
75,000
100,000
125,000
150,000
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
(80 000) (120 000) (160 000) (200 000) (240 000)
Inspect fuel system for damage or
leaks.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Inspect exhaust system for loose or
damaged components.
Replace engine air cleaner filter. See
4.4L Supercharged Engine:
Supercharger service. See footnote (o).
•
•
•
•
•
Change automatic transmission fluid
and filter (severe service).
See footnote (h).
•
•
•
•
Change automatic transmission fluid
and filter (normal service).
For all-wheel-drive vehicles used
for trailer towing: Change transfer
case fluid.
•
•
508
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional Required Services (cont’d)
25,000
(40 000)
50,000
75,000
100,000
125,000
150,000
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
(80 000) (120 000) (160 000) (200 000) (240 000)
Throttle body service. An Emission
Control Service. See footnotes † and (l).
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Replace spark plugs. An Emission
Control Service.
Engine cooling system service (or every
five years, whichever occurs first). An
Emission Control Service.
•
See footnote (j).
4.4L Supercharged Engine: Intercooler
system service (or every five years,
whichever occurs first).
•
•
See footnote (p).
Inspect engine accessory drive belt. An
Emission Control Service.
See footnote (n).
If using DOT-4 brake fluid, change
brake fluid at a regular maintenance
service every two years.
See footnote (i).
509
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced
if they are cracked, swollen, or deteriorated.
Inspect all pipes, fittings, and clamps; replace with
genuine GM parts as needed. To help ensure
proper operation, a pressure test of the cooling
system and pressure cap and cleaning the outside
of the radiator and air conditioning condenser is
recommended at least once a year.
Maintenance Footnotes
† The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or
the California Air Resources Board has determined
that the failure to perform this maintenance item
will not nullify the emission warranty or limit
recall liability prior to the completion of the
vehicle’s useful life. We, however, urge that all
recommended maintenance services be performed
at the indicated intervals and the maintenance
be recorded.
(d) Visually inspect wiper blades for wear or
cracking. Replace wiper blades that appear worn
or damaged or that streak or miss areas of
the windshield.
(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for
proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing,
etc. Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors for
surface condition. Inspect other brake parts,
including calipers, parking brake, etc.
(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all
your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, and
anchorages are working properly. Look for any
other loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If
you see anything that might keep a safety belt
system from doing its job, have it repaired. Have
any torn or frayed safety belts replaced. Also look
for any opened or broken airbag coverings, and
have them repaired or replaced. The airbag system
does not need regular maintenance.
(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension and
steering system for damaged, loose, or missing
parts or signs of wear. Inspect power steering lines
and hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks,
cracks, chafing, etc.
510
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders. Lubricate all
hinges and latches, including those for the hood,
rear compartment, glove box door, and console
door. More frequent lubrication may be required
when exposed to a corrosive environment.
Applying silicone grease on weatherstrips with a
clean cloth will make them last longer, seal better,
and not stick or squeak.
(i) If using DOT-4 brake fluid only: Drain, flush,
and refill brake hydraulic system at a regular
maintenance service (I or II) every two years. This
service can be complex; you should have your
page 405.
(j) Drain, flush, and refill cooling system. This
service can be complex; you should have
your dealer perform this service. See Engine
Coolant on page 389 for what to use. Inspect
hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap,
and filler neck. Pressure test the cooling
system and pressure cap.
(g) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions,
the filter may require replacement more often.
(h) Change automatic transmission fluid and filter
if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or
more of these conditions:
(k) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could
indicate a problem. Have the system inspected
and repaired and the fluid level checked. Add fluid
if needed.
− In heavy city traffic where the outside
temperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C)
or higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
(l) Inspect throttle body bore and valve plates for
deposits. Open the throttle valve and inspect
all surfaces. Clean as required.
− When doing frequent trailer towing.
− Uses such as limousine service.
− Uses such as high performance operation.
(m) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions,
inspect the filter at each engine oil change.
511
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(n) Visually inspect belt for fraying, excessive
cracks, or obvious damage. Replace belt if
necessary.
Owner Checks and Services
These owner checks and services should be
performed at the intervals specified to help
ensure the safety, dependability, and emission
control performance of your vehicle. Your
GM Goodwrench® dealer can assist you with
these checks and services.
(o) Drain, flush, and refill intercooler system. This
service can be complex; you should have your
page 389
(p) For supercharged engines only: Have your
dealer check the supercharger oil level and
add the proper supercharger oil as needed
(or every 36 months, whichever occurs first).
on page 516
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at
once. Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added
to your vehicle, make sure they are the proper
ones, as shown in Recommended Fluids and
512
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
At Each Fuel Fill
Check the windshield washer fluid level in
the windshield washer fluid reservoir and add the
proper fluid if necessary.
It is important to perform these underhood checks
at each fuel fill.
Engine Oil Level Check
At Least Once a Month
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil
further details.
Tire Inflation Check
Visually inspect your vehicle’s tires and make sure
they are inflated to the correct pressures. Do not
forget to check the spare tire. See Inflation - Tire
spare tire is stored securely. See Changing a Flat
Notice: It is important to check the engine oil
regularly and keep it at the proper level.
Failure to keep the engine oil at the proper
level can cause damage to the engine not
covered by your warranty.
Engine Coolant Level Check
Tire Wear Inspection
Check the engine coolant level and add
DEX-COOL® coolant mixture if necessary. See
Tire rotation is recommended if your vehicle has
the same size tires at all four wheel positions
and may be required for high mileage highway
drivers prior to the Engine Oil Life System service
notification. Check the tires for wear and, if
necessary, rotate the tires. See Tire Inspection
Intercooler Coolant Level Check
(4.4L Supercharged Engine)
Check the coolant level and add DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture if necessary. See Engine Coolant
on page 389 for further details.
513
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Transmission Shift Lock
Control System Check
At Least Once a Year
Starter Switch Check
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough
room around the vehicle. It should be parked
on a level surface.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough
room around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the
page 121.
Be ready to apply the regular brake
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be
ready to turn off the engine immediately if
it starts.
immediately if the vehicle begins to move.
3. With the engine off and without applying the
regular brake, try to move the shift lever out
of PARK (P) with normal effort. If the shift
lever moves out of PARK (P), contact your
GM Goodwrench® dealer for service.
3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The
vehicle should start only in PARK (P) or
NEUTRAL (N). If the vehicle starts in any
other position, contact your GM Goodwrench®
dealer for service.
514
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular
brake, set the parking brake.
Parking Brake and Automatic
Transmission Park (P) Mechanism Check
• To check the parking brake’s holding ability:
With the engine running and transmission in
NEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressure
from the regular brake pedal. Do this until the
vehicle is held by the parking brake only.
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this check, your
vehicle could begin to move. You or
others could be injured and property
could be damaged. Make sure there is
room in front of your vehicle in case it
begins to roll. Be ready to apply the
regular brake at once should the vehicle
begin to move.
• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding
ability: With the engine running, shift to
PARK (P). Then release the parking brake
followed by the regular brake.
Contact your GM Goodwrench® dealer if service is
required.
Underbody Flushing Service
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take
care to clean thoroughly any areas where mud and
other debris can collect.
515
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Intercooler
System
(4.4L V8
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and use only DEX-COOL®
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name,
part number, or specification can be obtained from
your dealer.
Supercharged Coolant.
engine)
Hydraulic Brake Delco® Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or
System
Windshield
Washer
equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.
GM Optikleen® Washer Solvent.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
The engine requires a special
engine oil meeting GM Standard
GM4718M. Oils meeting this
standard can be identified as
synthetic, and should also be
identified with the American
Chassis Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985,
in Canada 88901242) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Parking Brake
Cable Guides
Petroleum Institute (API) Certified
for Gasoline Engines starburst
symbol. However, not all synthetic
API oils with the starburst symbol
will meet this GM standard. You
should look for and use only oil that
meets GM Standard GM4718M. GM
Goodwrench® oil meets all the
requirements for your vehicle. For
the proper viscosity, see Engine Oil
on page 380.
GM Power Steering Fluid
(GM Part No. U.S. 89021184,
in Canada 89021186).
Power Steering
System
Engine Oil
Automatic
DEXRON®-VI Automatic
Transmission Transmission Fluid.
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Key Lock
Cylinders
Supercharger Oil
(GM Part No. U.S. 12345982,
in Canada 10953513). See
Supercharger Oil on page 385
Supercharger
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
Engine Cooling water and use only DEX-COOL®
System
page 389.
516
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
SAE 75W-90 Synthetic
Axle Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 12378261,
in Canada 10953455) meeting
GM Specification 9986115.
SAE 75W-90 Synthetic
Axle Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 12378261,
in Canada 10953455) meeting
GM Specification 9986115.
Hood Latch
Assembly,
Secondary
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346293,
Rear Axle
Latch, Pivots, in Canada 992723) or lubricant
Spring
Anchor, and
Release Pawl
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Front Axle
(All-Wheel
Drive)
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Hood and Door
Hinges
Transfer Case Manual Transmission Fluid
Weatherstrip Lubricant
(All-Wheel
Drive)
(GM Part No. U.S. 88861800,
in Canada 88861801).
(GM Part No. U.S. 3634770,
Weatherstrip in Canada 10953518) or
Conditioning
Dielectric Silicone Grease
(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,
in Canada 992887).
517
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your
GM dealer.
Part
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter Element
3.6L V6 and 4.6L V8
4.4L V8 (V-Series)
Engine Oil Filter
GM Part Number
ACDelco® Part Number
25735595
15813300
A2944C
A3078C
3.6L V6
4.4L V8 (V-Series)
4.6L V8
25177917
890175271
89017342
88957450
PF2129
PF261
PF61
Passenger Compartment Air Filter
Spark Plugs
CF13C
3.6L V6
4.4L V8 (V-Series)
4.6L V8
12597464
12592619
12571535
41-990
41-991
41-987
Windshield Wiper Blade
Driver’s Side – 22 inches (56.5 cm)
88958361
88958359
—
—
Passenger’s Side – 21 inches (53.0 cm)
1
Notice: If your vehicle is an STS-V model, the engine uses a special oil filter. The use of any other engine oil filter
could lead to filter failure and result in severe engine damage. Damage caused by use of the wrong engine oil filter
would not be covered by your new vehicle warranty.
518
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.6L V8 Engine
520
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service,
record pages. You should retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Odometer
Reading
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
521
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Odometer
Reading
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
522
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Odometer
Reading
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
523
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Odometer
Reading
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
524
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of
dealership management, it appears your concern
cannot be resolved by the dealership without
further help, contact the Cadillac Customer
Assistance Center, 24 hours a day, by calling
1-800-458-8006. In Canada, contact the Canadian
Cadillac Customer Communication Centre by
calling 1-888-446-2000.
Customer Assistance and
Information
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important
to your dealer and to Cadillac. Normally, any
concerns with the sales transaction or the
operation of your vehicle will be resolved by your
dealer’s sales or service departments. Sometimes,
however, despite the best intentions of all
concerned, misunderstandings can occur. If your
concern has not been resolved to your
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in
order to give your inquiry prompt attention. Please
have the following information available to give
the Customer Assistance Representative:
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
This is available from the vehicle registration
or title, or the plate at the top left of the
instrument panel and visible through the
windshield.
satisfaction, the following steps should be taken:
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member
of dealership management. Normally, concerns
can be quickly resolved at that level. If the
matter has already been reviewed with the sales,
service or parts manager, contact the owner of
the dealership or the general manager.
• Dealership name and location.
• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage.
When contacting Cadillac, please remember that
your concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s
facility. That is why we suggest you follow
Step One first if you have a concern.
526
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STEP THREE: Both General Motors and your
dealer are committed to making sure you are
completely satisfied with your new vehicle.
However, if you continue to remain unsatisfied
after following the procedure outlined in Steps One
and Two, you should file with the BBB Auto Line
Program to enforce any additional rights you
may have. Canadian owners refer to your
Warranty and Owner Assistance Information
booklet for information on the Canadian Motor
Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).
You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program
using the toll-free telephone number or write them
at the following address:
BBB Auto Line Program
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203-1838
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
This program is available in all 50 states and the
District of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by
vehicle age, mileage and other factors. General
Motors reserves the right to change eligibility
limitations and/or discontinue its participation in
this program.
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court
program administered by the Council of Better
Business Bureaus to settle automotive disputes
regarding vehicle repairs or the interpretation
of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Although you
may be required to resort to this informal dispute
resolution program prior to filing a court action,
use of the program is free of charge and your case
will generally be heard within 40 days. If you do
not agree with the decision given in your case, you
may reject it and proceed with any other venue
for relief available to you.
527
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
My GM Canada (Canada only)
Online Owner Center
My GM Canada is a password-protected section
of gmcanada.com where you can save information
on GM vehicles, get personalized offers, and
use handy tools and forms with greater ease.
Online Owner Center
(United States only)
The Owner Center is a resource for your GM
ownership needs. Specific vehicle information can
be found in one place.
Here are a few of the valuable tools and services
you will have access to:
The Online Owner Center allows you to:
− My Showroom: Find and save information on
vehicles and current offers in your area.
− My Dealers/Retailers: Save details such as
address and phone number for each of
your preferred GM Dealers or Retailers.
− My Driveway: Receive service reminders and
helpful advice on owning and maintaining
your vehicle.
− My Preferences: Manage your profile,
subscribe to E-News and use tools and forms
with greater ease.
• Get e-mail service reminders.
• Access information about your specific
vehicle, including tips and videos and
an electronic version of this owner manual.
• Keep track of your vehicle’s service history
and maintenance schedule.
• Find GM dealers for service nationwide.
• Receive special promotions and privileges
only available to members.
Refer to www.MyGMLink.com on the web for
updated information and to register your vehicle.
To sign up to My GM Canada, visit the My GM
Canada section within www.gmcanada.com.
528
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
www.Cadillac.com
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
1-800-458-8006
1-800-833-2622 (For Text Telephone
devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-882-1112
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of
hearing, or speech-impaired and who use Text
Telephones (TTYs), Cadillac has TTY equipment
available at its Customer Assistance Center.
Any TTY user can communicate with Cadillac by
dialing: 1-800-833-CMCC (2622). (TTY users
in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)
From Puerto Rico:
1-800-496-9992 (English)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
From U.S. Virgin Islands:
1-800-496-9994
Customer Assistance Offices
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
Cadillac encourages customers to call the toll-free
number for assistance. However, if a customer
wishes to write or e-mail Cadillac, refer to
the addresses below.
Canada — Customer Assistance
General Motors of Canada Limited
Canadian Cadillac Customer Communication
Centre, CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
United States — Customer Assistance
Cadillac Customer Assistance Center
Cadillac Motor Car Division
P.O. Box 33169
1-888-446-2000
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone
devices (TTYs))
Detroit, MI 48232-5169
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-882-1112
529
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overseas — Customer Assistance
GM Mobility Reimbursement
Program
Please contact the local General Motors
Business Unit.
Mexico, Central America and
Caribbean Islands/Countries
(Except Puerto Rico and U.S. Virgin
Islands) — Customer Assistance
General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center
Paseo de la Reforma # 2740
Col. Lomas de Bezares
This program, available to qualified applicants,
can reimburse you up to $1,000 of the cost
of eligible aftermarket adaptive equipment required
for your vehicle, such as hand controls or a
wheelchair/scooter lift.
C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.
01-800-508-0000
Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800
The offer is available for a very limited period of
time from the date of vehicle purchase/lease.
For more details, or to determine your vehicle’s
eligibility, visit gmmobility.com or call the GM
Mobility Assistance Center at 1-800-323-9935.
Text telephone (TTY) users, call 1-800-833-9935.
GM of Canada also has a Mobility Program.
Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details.
TTY users call 1-800-263-3830.
530
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cadillac Owner Privileges™
Roadside Service
Roadside Service provides several Cadillac
Owner Privileges™ at “no charge,” throughout
your Cadillac Warranty Period — 48 months/
50,000 miles (80 000 km).
In the United States or Canada, call
1-800-882-1112. Service is available 24 hours a
day, 365 days a year.
Who Is Covered?
Emergency Road Service is performed on site for
the following situations:
Roadside Assistance coverage is for the vehicle
operator, regardless of ownership. A person driving
this vehicle without the consent of the owner is
not eligible for coverage.
• Towing Service: Emergency towing from a
public roadway or highway to the nearest
dealership for warranty service or in the event
of a vehicle-disabling accident. Winch-out
assistance when the vehicle is mired in sand,
mud, or snow.
The following services are provided in the United
States during the Bumper-to-Bumper warranty
period and in Canada, during the Base Warranty
coverage period of the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty, up to a maximum coverage of $100.
These services are provided at a nominal charge
if the Cadillac is no longer covered by the
• Battery Jump Starting: No-start occurrences
which require a battery jump start will be
covered at no charge.
warranties listed previously. Roadside Service is
available only in the United States and Canada.
531
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Lock Out Assistance: To ensure security,
the driver must present the vehicle registration
and personal ID before lock-out service is
provided. Lock-out service will be covered at
no charge if you are unable to gain entry
into your vehicle. If your vehicle will not start,
Roadside Service will arrange to have
Additional Services for Canadian
Customers
• Trip Routing Service: Upon request, Cadillac
Roadside Service will send you detailed,
computer-personalized maps, highlighting your
choice of either the most direct route or the
most scenic route to your destination,
your vehicle towed to the nearest authorized
dealership. In the United States, replacement
keys made at the customer’s expense will
be delivered within 10 miles.
anywhere in North America, along with any
helpful travel information we may have
pertaining to your trip. To request this service,
please call us toll-free at 1-800-268-6800. We
will make every attempt to send your
personalized trip routing as quickly as possible,
but it is best to allow three weeks before your
planned departure date. Trip routing requests
will be limited to six per calendar year.
• Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel for the
customer to get to the nearest service station
(approximately $5 in the United States and
10 litres in Canada).
• Flat Tire Change (Covers change only):
Installation of your spare tire, in good
condition, will be covered at no charge. The
customer is responsible for the repair or
replacement of the tire if not covered by a
warrantable failure.
• Trip Interruption: If your trip is interrupted due
to a warranty failure, incidental expenses may
be reimbursed during the 48 months/
• Alternative Service: There may be times when
Roadside Service cannot provide timely
assistance. Your advisor may authorize you to
secure local emergency road service, and you
will be reimbursed up to $100 upon submission
of the original receipt to Cadillac Roadside
Service®.
50,000 miles (80 000 km) warranty period.
Items covered are hotel, meals, and rental car.
532
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cadillac Technician Roadside Service
(U.S. only)
Calling for Assistance
For prompt and efficient assistance when calling,
please provide the following to the Roadside
Service Representative:
Cadillac’s exceptional Roadside Service is more
than an auto club or towing service. It provides
every Cadillac owner in the United States with the
advantage of contacting a Cadillac advisor and,
where available, a Cadillac trained dealer
• A description of the problem
• Name, home address, home telephone
number
technician who can provide on-site service.
• Location of your Cadillac and number you are
calling from
A dealer technician will travel to your location
within a 30 mile (50 km) radius of a participating
Cadillac dealership. If beyond this radius, we
will arrange to have your car towed to the nearest
Cadillac dealership. Each technician travels
with a specially equipped service vehicle complete
with the necessary Cadillac parts and tools
required to handle most roadside repairs.
• The model year, Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN), odometer reading, and date
of delivery
While we hope you never have the occasion to
use our service, it is added security while traveling
for you and your family. Remember, we are
only a phone call away. In the United States or
Canada, customers call Roadside Service:
1-800-882-1112. Any customer who has access to
a (TTY) or a conventional teletypewriter can
communicate with Cadillac by dialing from the
United States or Canada 1-888-889-2438 — daily,
24 hours.
533
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cadillac and General Motors of Canada Limited
reserve the right to limit services or reimbursement
to an owner or driver when, in their sole
discretion, the claims become excessive in
frequency or type of occurrence.
The Courtesy Transportation program is
offered to customers in conjunction with the
Bumper-to-Bumper coverage provided by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. Several transportation
options are available when warranty repairs
are required. This will reduce your inconvenience
during warranty repairs.
Roadside Service is not part of or included in the
coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. Cadillac General Motors of Canada
Limited reserve the right to make any changes or
discontinue the Roadside Service program at
any time without notification.
Scheduling Service Appointments
When your vehicle requires warranty service, you
should contact your dealer and request an
appointment. By scheduling a service appointment
and advising your service consultant of your
transportation needs, your dealer can help
minimize your inconvenience.
Towing and Road Service Exclusions
Specifically excluded from Roadside Service
coverage are towing or services for vehicles
operated on a non-public roadway or highway,
fines, impound towing caused by a violation
of local, Municipal, State, Provincial or Federal
law, and mounting, dismounting or changing
of snow tires, chains, or other traction devices.
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the
service department immediately, keep driving it
until it can be scheduled for service, unless,
of course, the problem is safety-related. If it is,
please call your dealership, let them know this, and
ask for instructions.
Courtesy Transportation
If the dealer requests that you simply drop the
vehicle off for service, you are urged to do so as
early in the work day as possible to allow for
the same day repair.
To enhance your ownership experience, we and
our participating dealers are proud to offer
Courtesy Transportation, a customer support
program for new vehicles.
534
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
Transportation Options
Warranty service can generally be completed
while you wait. However, if you are unable to wait,
GM helps to minimize your inconvenience by
providing several transportation options.
Depending on the circumstances, your dealer can
offer you one of the following:
Your dealer may arrange to provide you with a
courtesy rental vehicle or reimburse you for
a rental vehicle that you obtain if your vehicle is
kept for a warranty repair. Reimbursement
will be limited to a maximum amount per day and
must be supported by receipts. This requires
that you sign and complete a rental agreement and
meet state, local and rental vehicle provider
requirements. Requirements vary and may include
minimum age requirements, insurance coverage,
credit card, etc. You are responsible for fuel usage
charges and may also be responsible for taxes,
levies, usage fees, excessive mileage or rental
usage beyond the completion of the repair.
Shuttle Service
Participating dealers can provide you with shuttle
service to get you to your destination with minimal
interruption of your daily schedule. This includes
one-way or round trip shuttle service to a
destination up to 10 miles (16 km) from the
dealership.
Generally it is not possible to provide a like-vehicle
as a courtesy rental.
Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
If your vehicle requires warranty repairs,
reimbursement of public transportation expenses
may be available, for up to a maximum of
five days. In addition, should you arrange
transportation through a friend or relative,
reimbursement for reasonable fuel expenses may
be available, up to a five-day maximum. Claim
amounts should reflect actual costs and be
supported by original receipts.
Additional Program Information
Courtesy Transportation is available during the
Bumper-to-Bumper warranty coverage period, but
it is not part of the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. A separate booklet entitled Warranty
and Owner Assistance Information furnished with
each new vehicle provides detailed warranty
coverage information.
535
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Courtesy Transportation is available only at
participating dealers and all program options, such
as shuttle service, may not be available at
every dealer. Please contact your dealer for
specific information about availability. All Courtesy
Transportation arrangements will be administered
by appropriate dealer personnel.
Vehicle Data Collection and Event
Data Recorders
Your vehicle, like other modern motor vehicles, has
a number of sophisticated computer systems that
monitor and control several aspects of the vehicle’s
performance. Your vehicle uses on-board vehicle
computers to monitor emission control components
to optimize fuel economy, to monitor conditions for
airbag deployment and, if so equipped, to provide
anti-lock braking and to help the driver control the
vehicle in difficult driving situations. Some
information may be stored during regular operations
to facilitate repair of detected malfunctions; other
information is stored only in a crash event by
computer systems, such as those commonly called
Event Data Recorders (EDR).
Canadian Vehicles: For warranty repairs during
the Complete Vehicle Coverage period of the
General Motors of Canada New Vehicle Limited
Warranty, alternative transportation may be
available under the Courtesy Transportation
Program. Please consult your dealer for details.
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally
modify, change or discontinue Courtesy
Transportation at any time and to resolve all
questions of claim eligibility pursuant to the terms
and conditions described herein at its sole
discretion.
In a crash event, computer systems, such as the
airbag Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM)
in your vehicle may record information about the
condition of the vehicle and how it was operated,
such as data related to engine speed, brake
application, throttle position, vehicle speed, safety
belt usage, airbag readiness, airbag performance,
and the severity of a collision.
536
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your vehicle is equipped with StabiliTrak®,
steering performance, including yaw rate, steering
wheel angle, and lateral acceleration, is also
recorded. This information has been used
to improve vehicle crash performance and may be
used to improve crash performance of future
vehicles and driving safety. Unlike the data
recorders on many airplanes, these on-board
systems do not record sounds, such as
In addition, once GM collects or receives data,
GM may:
• use the data for GM research needs,
• make it available for research where
appropriate confidentiality is to be maintained
and need is shown, or
• share summary data which is not tied to a
specific vehicle with non-GM organizations
for research purposes.
conversation of vehicle occupants.
To read this information, special equipment is
needed and access to the vehicle or the device
that stores the data is required. GM will not access
information about a crash event or share it with
others other than:
Others, such as law enforcement, may have
access to the special equipment that can read the
information if they have access to the vehicle
or the device that stores the data.
If your vehicle has OnStar®, please check the
OnStar® subscription service agreement or manual
for information on its operations and data
collection.
• with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the
vehicle is leased, with the consent of the
lessee,
• in response to an official request of police or
similar government office,
• as part of GM’s defense of litigation through
the discovery process, or
• as required by law.
537
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
originally designed appearance and safety
performance, however, the history of these parts
is not known. Such parts are not covered by
your GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any
related failures are not covered by that warranty.
Collision Damage Repair
If your vehicle is involved in a collision and it is
damaged, have the damage repaired by a qualified
technician using the proper equipment and
quality replacement parts. Poorly performed
collision repairs will diminish your vehicle’s resale
value, and safety performance can be
Aftermarket collision parts are also available.
These are made by companies other than GM and
may not have been tested for your vehicle. As a
result, these parts may fit poorly, exhibit premature
durability/corrosion problems, and may not
perform properly in subsequent collisions.
Aftermarket parts are not covered by your
GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any
vehicle failure related to such parts are not
covered by that warranty.
compromised in subsequent collisions.
Collision Parts
Genuine GM Collision parts are new parts made
with the same materials and construction methods
as the parts with which your vehicle was
originally built. Genuine GM Collision parts are
your best choice to assure that your vehicle’s
designed appearance, durability and safety are
preserved. The use of Genuine GM parts can help
maintain your GM New Vehicle Warranty.
Repair Facility
GM also recommends that you choose a collision
repair facility that meets your needs before you ever
need collision repairs. Your GM dealer may have a
collision repair center with GM-trained technicians
and state of the art equipment, or be able to
recommend a collision repair center that has
GM-trained technicians and comparable
equipment.
Recycled original equipment parts may also be
used for repair. These parts are typically removed
from vehicles that were total losses in prior
accidents. In most cases, the parts being recycled
are from undamaged sections of the vehicle. A
recycled original equipment GM part, may
be an acceptable choice to maintain your vehicle’s
538
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Insuring Your Vehicle
If an Accident Occurs
Protect your investment in your GM vehicle with
comprehensive and collision insurance coverage.
There are significant differences in the quality
of coverage afforded by various insurance policy
terms. Many insurance policies provide reduced
protection to your GM vehicle by limiting
Here is what to do if you are involved in an
accident.
• Try to relax and then check to make sure you
are all right. If you are uninjured, make sure
that no one else in your vehicle, or the
other vehicle, is injured.
compensation for damage repairs by using
aftermarket collision parts. Some insurance
companies will not specify aftermarket collision
parts. When purchasing insurance, we recommend
that you assure your vehicle will be repaired
with GM original equipment collision parts. If such
insurance coverage is not available from your
current insurance carrier, consider switching
to another insurance carrier.
• If there has been an injury, call 911 for help.
Do not leave the scene of an accident until
all matters have been taken care of. Move
your vehicle only if its position puts you
in danger or you are instructed to move it by a
police officer.
• Give only the necessary and requested
information to police and other parties involved
in the accident. Do not discuss your personal
condition, mental frame of mind, or anything
unrelated to the accident. This will help guard
against post-accident legal action.
If your vehicle is leased, the leasing company may
require you to have insurance that assures
repairs with Genuine GM Original Equipment
Manufacturer (OEM) parts or Genuine
Manufacturer replacement parts. Read your lease
carefully, as you may be charged at the end of
your lease for poor quality repairs.
• If you need roadside assistance, call GM
Roadside Assistance. See Roadside Service
on page 531 for more information.
539
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• If your vehicle cannot be driven, know where
the towing service will be taking it. Get a
card from the tow truck operator or write down
the driver’s name, the service’s name, and
the phone number.
• If possible, call your insurance company from
the scene of the accident. They will walk you
through the information they will need. If
they ask for a police report, phone or go to
the police department headquarters the
next day and you can get a copy of the report
for a nominal fee. In some states/provinces
with “no fault” insurance laws, a report may not
be necessary. This is especially true if there
are no injuries and both vehicles are driveable.
• Remove any valuables from your vehicle
before it is towed away. Make sure this
includes your insurance information and
registration if you keep these items in your
vehicle.
• Choose a reputable collision repair facility for
your vehicle. Whether you select a GM dealer
or a private collision repair facility to fix the
damage, make sure you are comfortable with
them. Remember, you will have to feel
• Gather the important information you will need
from the other driver. Things like name,
address, phone number, driver’s license
number, vehicle license plate, vehicle make,
model and model year, Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN), insurance company and
policy number, and a general description of
the damage to the other vehicle.
comfortable with their work for a long time.
• Once you have an estimate, read it carefully
and make sure you understand what work will
be performed on your vehicle. If you have a
question, ask for an explanation. Reputable
shops welcome this opportunity.
540
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remember if your vehicle is leased you may be
obligated to have the vehicle repaired with
Genuine GM parts, even if your insurance
coverage does not pay the full cost.
Managing the Vehicle Damage
Repair Process
In the event that your vehicle requires damage
repairs, GM recommends that you take an active
role in its repair. If you have a pre-determined
repair facility of choice, take your vehicle there, or
have it towed there. Specify to the facility that
any required replacement collision parts be original
equipment parts, either new Genuine GM parts
or recycled original GM parts. Remember, recycled
parts will not be covered by your GM vehicle
warranty.
If another party’s insurance company is paying for
the repairs, you are not obligated to accept a
repair valuation based on that insurance
company’s collision policy repair limits, as you
have no contractual limits with that company. In
such cases, you can have control of the repair and
parts choices as long as cost stays within
reasonable limits.
Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you must
live with the repair. Depending on your policy
limits, your insurance company may initially value
the repair using aftermarket parts. Discuss this
with your repair professional, and insist on
Genuine GM parts.
541
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your
vehicle has a safety defect, you should
immediately notify Transport Canada, in addition
to notifying General Motors of Canada Limited.
You may call them at 1-800-333-0510 or write to:
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which
could cause a crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately inform the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA),
in addition to notifying General Motors.
Transport Canada
Road Safety Branch
2780 Sheffield Road
Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open
an investigation, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a
recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA
cannot become involved in individual problems
between you, your dealer, or General Motors.
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport
Canada) in a situation like this, we certainly hope
you will notify us. Please call us at
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or
write to:
1-800-458-8006, or write:
Cadillac Customer Assistance Center
Cadillac Motor Car Division
P.O. Box 33169
Administrator, NHTSA
400 Seventh Street, SW.
Washington, D.C. 20590
Detroit, MI 48232-5169
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
542
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Canada, please call us at 1-888-446-2000.
Or, write:
Transmission, Transaxle, Transfer
Case Unit Repair Manual
Canadian Cadillac Customer Communication
Centre, CA1-163-005
General Motors of Canada Limited
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
This manual provides information on unit
repair service procedures, adjustments, and
specifications for GM transmissions, transaxles,
and transfer cases.
Service Bulletins
Service Publications Ordering
Information
Service Bulletins give technical service information
needed to knowledgeably service General
Motors cars and trucks. Each bulletin contains
instructions to assist in the diagnosis and service
of your vehicle.
Service Manuals
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair
information on engines, transmission, axle
suspension, brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.
In Canada, information pertaining to Product
Service Bulletins can be obtained by contacting
your General Motors dealer or by calling
1-800-GM-DRIVE (1-800-463-7483).
543
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123
Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM
Eastern Time
Owner Information
Owner publications are written specifically for
owners and intended to provide basic operational
information about the vehicle. The owner
manual will include the Maintenance Schedule for
all models.
For Credit Card Orders Only
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. at:
www.helminc.com
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner Manual,
and Warranty Booklet.
Or you can write to:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00
Without Portfolio: Owner Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00
Prices are subject to change without notice and
without incurring obligation. Allow ample time
for delivery.
Current and Past Model Order Forms
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are
quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are
to make checks payable in U.S. funds.
Technical Service Bulletins and Manuals are
available for current and past model GM vehicles.
To request an order form, please specify year
and model name of the vehicle.
544
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appearance Care (cont.)
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials .......... 484
546
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Child Restraints (cont.)
C
547
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Assistance Information (cont.)
548
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Information Center (DIC) ................... 258
Electrical System (cont.)
549
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
F
550
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
551
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Light (cont.)
L
Labeling, Tire Sidewall ................................. 423
552
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
Magnetic Ride Control ................................. 325
553
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
O
554
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power (cont.)
Steering Fluid .......................................... 403
555
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
556
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
557
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Theft-Deterrent Systems .............................. 107
Tires (cont.)
558
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
U
Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) ........ 226
559
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
560
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|
Billion Electric Company Network Router BIPAC 5100W User Manual
Blanco Indoor Furnishings 157 011 User Manual
Blaupunkt Car Stereo System Dallas RMD 169 User Manual
Bloomfield Coffeemaker 0420 User Manual
BOB Stroller OMS03A User Manual
Cabletron Systems Switch SmartCell 6A000 User Manual
Canon Camera Accessories 4411B002 User Manual
Canon Printer Accessories IX 4000 User Manual
Chicago Pneumatic Cordless Drill CP 8730 User Manual
Cisco Systems Computer Hardware 78 16356 01 User Manual